4Dwm is an X Window System client based on mwm. It provides window management functionality, desks and some session management functionality. It provides functions that facilitate control (by the user and the programmer) of elements of window states such as placement, size, icon/normal display, and input-focus ownership. The session management functionality can launch clients as well as provide a way of stopping a client. This manual page only describes additions to and differences from mwm. Ref...
abicc is a wrapper shell script for cc for compiling MIPS ABI applications. It translates a common subset of the SVR4 SGS (Software Generation System) flags and arguments to those of the native IDO (IRIS Development Option). By the use of this wrapper, applications which link "on-site" on a target platform are isolated from having to know the details of invoking that platform's compilation system. abicc also serves to hide the details of constructing an ABI application on IRIX. The details of...
ABIinfo provides a shell-level interface to determine whether a particular MIPS ABI feature is supported by the operating system. ABIinfo also provides the version of the MIPS Processor ABI Conformance Guide to which the operating system conforms. This interface allows a feature which will appear in a future Conformance Guide to be supported by the host operating system prior to that system becoming conformant with that Conformance Guide . It also allows applications to determine whether feature...
abild is a wrapper shell script for ld for link editing MIPS ABI applications. It translates a common subset of the SVR4 SGS (Software Generation System) flags and arguments to those of the native IDO (IRIS Development Option). By the use of this wrapper, applications which link "on-site" on a target platform are isolated from having to know the details of invoking that platform's compilation system. abild also serves to hide the details of constructing an ABI application on IRIX. The details...
accept allows lp(1) to accept requests for the named destinations. A destination can be either a line printer (LP) or a class of printers. Use lpstat(1) to find the status of destinations. Reject prevents lp(1) from accepting requests for the named destinations. A destination can be either a printer or a class of printers. Use lpstat(1) to find the status of destinations. The following option is useful with reject. -r[reason] Associates a reason with preventing lp from accepting requests. This r...
The accessworkstation program allows the user to open an IRIX Interactive Desktop directory view or toolchest on a specified machine. It replaces the obsolete newdir(1) program (shipped in previous IRIX releases). Users can run accessworkstation from a Unix shell command line or from the toolchest (Desktop > Access Files > As Another User or By Remote Login). The user is allowed to select interactively the directory or toolchest to be viewed, as well as the machine and login name to be used. The...
The accessx graphical interface allows movement-impaired users to set and activate special keyboard features. It uses the XKB extension built into the X server in IRIX 6.2 and later releases. The accessx panel can be run from a Unix shell command line or from the toolchest (Desktop > Customize > Accessibility). Like most other IRIX Interactive Desktop (IID) customization panels, accessx has the ``runonce'' feature, meaning only one instance of the application will run at one time. Attempting t...
Accounting software is structured as a set of tools (consisting of both C programs and shell procedures) that can be used to build accounting systems. acctsh(1M) describes the set of shell procedures built on top of the C programs. Connect-time accounting is handled by various programs that write records into /var/adm/wtmp, as described in utmp(4). The programs described in acctcon(1M) convert this file int...
acctcms reads one or more files, normally in the form described in acct(4). It adds all records for processes that executed identically named commands, sorts them, and writes them to the standard output, normally using an internal summary format. The options are: -a Print output in ASCII rather than in the internal summary format. The output includes command name, number of times executed, total kcore minutes, total CPU minutes, total real minutes, mean siz...
acctcom reads file, the standard input, or /var/adm/pacct in the form described by acct(4) and writes selected records to the standard output. Each record represents the execution of one process. The output shows the COMMAND NAME, USER, TTYNAME, START TIME, END TIME, REAL (SEC), C...
acctcon converts a sequence of login/logoff records to total accounting records (see the tacct format in acct(4)). Login/logoff records are read from standard input. The file /var/adm/wtmp is usually the source of the login/logoff records; however, because it may contain corrupted records or system date changes, it should first be fixed using wtmpfix. The fixed version of file /va...
The acctcvt command is used to convert accounting data from one format to another. The data can come from a file or stdin (such as when used as an audit filter) and similarly can be written to another file or stdout. Both SGI extended accounting and standard SVR accounting formats are supported. In addition, output can be in ASCII text. The output can be in the form of human-readable text, either in the format similar to that produced by sat_interpret(1M) or by acctcom(1). The output can also be...
acctmerg reads its standard input and up to nine additional files, all in the tacct format (see acct(4)), or an ASCII version thereof. It merges these inputs by adding records whose keys (normally user ID and name) are identical and expects the inputs to be sorted on those keys. Options are: -a Produce output in ASCII version of tacct. -i Input files are in ASCII version of tacct. -p Print input wi...
acctprc reads standard input, in the form described by acct(4), and converts it to total accounting records (see the tacct record in acct(4)). acctprc divides CPU time into prime time and nonprime time and determines mean memory size (in memory segment units). acctprc then summarizes the tacct records, according to user IDs, and adds login names corresponding to the user IDs. The ...
chargefee can be invoked to charge a number of units to login-name. A record is written to /var/adm/fee, to be merged with other accounting records by runacct. ckpacct should be initiated via cron(1M) to periodically check the size of /var/adm/pacct. If the size exceeds blocks, 1000 by default, turnacct is invoked w...
acroread is a shell script that launches the Adobe Acrobat Reader program. The program's features are fully documented in The Acrobat Help, an on-line prgram guide which is available from the product's Help menu. Acrobat Reader is part of the Adobe Acrobat family of software that lets you view, distribute, print, and save documents in Portable Document Format (PDF)-regardless of the computer, operating system, fonts, or application used to create the original file. PDF files retain all the for...
This command is used on an IRIS that has a printer attached to it. The command registers a remote user's machine, allowing it to connect to this machine in order to submit a printing request using lp(1). In the first form of the command, client is the name of a remote machine to which access will be granted. If the second form of the command is used then all remote machines will be granted access. This command modifies the /etc/hosts.lpd file and possibly /etc/passwd. Execute this command once ...
adddefpriv adds an entry to the defaultPrivileges(4) database, which has the effect of giving privilege to all users on the system. This means that any user on the system can successfully run /usr/sysadm/bin/runpriv privilege (See runpriv(1M)). In order to run adddefpriv, you must either be running as root or you must provide the -auth auth-scheme arguments and pass the authentication test. If auth-scheme is unix, then must you type the root password when prompted in order to pass. The ability t...
Addfstabentry adds a mount entry into /etc/fstab file. The filesystem/directory is not mounted. Use mountfs(1M) to mount it. Refer to fstab(4) for a detailed description of the input parameters.
Addhost adds or modifies an entry in the host file. The entry is added to the end of /etc/hosts. If the hostname already exists, the entry is modified to use the new IP address. If the IP address already exists, the hostname is updated to use the new hostname.
addLocalFileSwap creates a file of the specified size in the indicated directory. If the directory does not exist, it will be created. The file name will be chosen automatically, depending on the name of any other swap files in the directory. Once the file is created, the swapctl(2) system call is used to add the file for use as swap space. This privcmd is not intended for command line use. A better and more flexible interface is provided by the swap(1M) command....
addModem is a privileged command that edits configuration files and initializes a modem to prepare it to be used by higher-level software such as cu(1C) or ppp(1M).
Addpppin adds a PPP incoming entry to the system to enable the named account or system to have the right to call into this host using the PPP protocol. Please refer to PPP(1M) for a detail description of the input parameters. It is important to note that if you do not set up an incoming connection, a remote workstation may be able to connect to your workstation using an existing user account, such as "guest". This can be an important security issue....
Addpppout adds a PPP outgoing entry to the system to enable the system to call another host using the PPP protocol. Please refer to PPP(1M) for a detailed description of the input parameters.
addpriv adds an entry to the privilege(4) database, so that henceforth user is granted privilege. This means that runpriv would run the command privilege in the directory /usr/sysadm/privbin on user's behalf. Multiple privileges can be passed to one addpriv command. An entry is added for each privilege specified. To see the privileges associated with individual tasks, choose "View as Tasks" from the Privilege Manager menu. See privmgr(1M). The -chkconfig option is used to enable privileges on...
addprivuser adds an entry to the privilegedUsers(4) database. This gives username the ability to run all of the privileged commands in /var/sysadm/privbin as if he or she were root. In order to run addprivuser, you must either be running as root or you must provide the -auth auth-scheme arguments and pass the authentication test. If auth-scheme is unix, then must you type the root password when prompted in order to pass. The ability to run addprivuser is not itself a privilege. root cannot give ...
addSerialDevice is a privileged command that configures the system to use a serial device. addSerialDevice configures a serial port for a terminal if its first argument is terminal, an input device such as a tablet or space ball if its first argument is input, or midi if its first argument if midi. When a device is configured for a terminal, the line in /etc/inittab for the serial port is configured to run getty(1M). When a device is configured for an input device, a link is made from /dev/input...
addUserAccount adds a local user account or an NIS access account to the system. The addUserAccount command has the following required parameter: -l login-name The login name of the new user The addUserAccount command has the following optional parameters: -y Requests creation of an NIS access account -u user-ID The unique user-ID of the new user (local accounts only) -g group-ID The primary group-ID of the new user (local accounts only) -P Indicates that a password is to be added to the account...
addVirtualSwap creates a trivial file in the directory /vswap (which will be created, if necessary) and then uses the swapctl(2) system call to add that entry as the requested amount of virtual swap space. This privcmd is not intended for command line use. A better and more flexible interface is provided by the swap(1M) command.
Addzone uses the AppleTalk Zone Information Protocol to add a zone to the network attached to a specific interface. If the zone never appears, it is a sign that the nbpd(1m) daemon is malfunctioning. Adding a zone to the loopback (lo0) adds it to the local pseudo-net. If other routers are present on the same network, it is important that each have the same list of zones. This is most easily accomplished by designating a ``seed'' router and allowing the other routers to obtain their zone lists ...
Add_disk enables you to add an extra SCSI disk to a system if the disk is on an integral SCSI controller (i.e., it can not be used for disks attached to VME SCSI controllers). The disk_number option must be specified if you are not adding the default ID of 2; similarly the controller and lun must be specified if other than 0. The Add_disk command creates the required directory, makes the appropriate device file links, makes a new filesystem, does the required mount operation, and adds the approp...
admin is used to create new SCCS files and change parameters of existing ones. Arguments to admin, which may appear in any order, consist of keyletter arguments, which begin with -, and named files (note that SCCS filenames must begin with the characters s.). If a named file does not exist, it is created and its parameters are initialized according to the specified keyletter arguments. Parameters not initialized by a keyletter argument are assigned a default value. If a named file does exist, pa...
aiff2aiffc is a command-line program which reads an AIFF-C digital audio input file, and copies the header information and sample data to an AIFF output file. The output file contain copies of all the AIFF-C chunks in the original input file which are backward compatible with the old AIFF spec. This includes most standard information, such as author and copyright strings and loop points. The chunks in the new file may not appear in exactly the same order as in the original file. It the AIFF-C in...
aifccompress is a command-line program which reads an AIFF-C digital audio input file, and copies the header information and sample data to a compressed AIFF-C digital audio output file. The output file will contain copies of all the AIFF-C chunks in the original input file. The chunks may not appear in exactly the same order as in the original file. aiffccompress offers compression algorithms which are supported by the SGI audio file library. They are selected with the -c option. Be sure to aud...
aifcdecompress is a command-line program which reads an AIFF-C compressed digital audio input file, and copies the header information and sample data to a AIFF-C uncompressed digital audio output file. The output file will contain copies of all the AIFF-C chunks in the original input file. The chunks may not appear in exactly the same order as in the original file. aifcdecompress decodes data which has been compressed using one of the algorithms supported by the SGI audio file library: G.722 CCI...
aifcinfo is a command-line program which parses an AIFF-C or AIFF digital audio input file, and prints out a description of the contents of the file, including header information about the sample data, author and copyright strings, and loop point locations. If the AIFF-C/AIFF input file parses correctly, aifcinfo returns 0. If there is an error, aifcinfo returns 1. The AIFF and AIFF-C file format specifications are published by Apple Computer Inc....
-rate rate specifies the sampling rate for the output file outfile.aifc. The value rate must be one of the following (sample frames per second): 8000 11025 16000 22050 32000 44100 48000 The sampling rate specified for the output file must be different from the sampling rate of the input file. -dynamic decibels specifies the minimum attenuation (in decibels) of the alias/image artifacts generated by the sampling rate conversion. The loss in dynamic range due to the rate conversion process will be...
aiff2aiffc is a command-line program which reads an AIFF digital audio input file, and copies the header information and sample data to an AIFF-C digital audio output file. The output file will contain copies of all the AIFF chunks in the original input file. The chunks may not appear in exactly the same order as in the original file. The sample data in the AIFF-C output file will not be compressed. If the input AIFF file parses correctly, and the output file is written with no errors, aiff2aifc...
The ainfo command is used to display various information about arrays known to the array services daemon. This information could be useful for both interactive users and shell scripts, and can be displayed in formats appropriate for either. The type of information displayed is determined by the request argument which is described below. Many of the options are used to narrow down a request or to specify a particular element to be described. Not all of the options make sense for every request. Op...
The akill command sends a signal to the processes in the array session specified by the array session handle ASH, or to the single process specified by process ID PID. The value of signal may be numeric or symbolic (see signal(5)). The symbolic name is the name as is appears in /usr/include/sys/signal.h, with the SIG prefix stripped off. Signal 15 (SIGTERM) is sent by default; this will normally kill processes that do not catch or ignore the signal. The processes that are to be signalled by akil...
The alias utility creates or redefines alias definitions or writes the values of existing alias definitions to standard output. An alias definition provides a string value that replaces a command name when it is encountered. An alias definition affects the current shell execution environment and the execution environments of the subshells of the current shell. When used as specified by this specification, the alias definition will not affect the parent process of the current shell nor any utilit...
AliasToIv converts 3D model files in Alias wire format (versions 5.0, 5.0.1, 5.1, and 5.1.1) into Open Inventor 2.0 files. NURB curves and surfaces, polygons, hierarchy, textures, cameras and lights are converted into equivalent Open Inventor objects. Alias NURB surfaces are converted into Open Inventor surfaces, which are then tesselated into polygons according to the object complexity setting. If perfomance is not satisfactory on the model, try a lower complexity setting. For textures, convert...
The alpq command takes no arguments or options. It presents, on its standard output, a list of the functions currently registered with the alp STREAMS module. Information on building and using these functions is contained in the manual entry alp(7). The output list contains such entries as 1 Ucase (Upper to lower case converter) The first field is a sequence number. Th...
amconfig is used to configure availmon(5) via four configuration flags, two configuration values, and a list of email addresses. If no argument is given, amconfig shows the status of all flags and values and the content of the email lists. The first synopsis is for configuration flags. In this case, usage for showing status and turning flags on or off is the same as for chkconfig(1M). The autoemail flag controls automatic distribution of availmon reports according to autoemail.list. The shutdown...
amparse parses an availmon(5) report and extracts information according to the specified fieldname. The availmon report is read from filename, or from standard input if no filename is given. Only one fieldname can be specified at a time: -SYSID System serial number -HOSTNAME System hostname or internet address -PREVSTART Previous start time, including seconds since Jan 1, 1970, and local time -PREVSTART1 Previous start time in the form of seconds since Jan 1, 1970 -PREVSTART2 Previous start time...
amreceive converts a received availmon(5) email report to plain text. The email report can be a file or can be read from standard input. The availmon report should be sent by Embedded Support Partner facilities (see esp(5) for more details) so that the format type and report type are correctly specified in the email subject. The output of amreceive can be redirected to a file, appended to a site logfile, or piped to a mailer or to a front-end interface of a database system for further reference ...
amsyslog parses system log files and prints messages of a specified (or higher) priority. The default system log files are /var/adm/SYSLOG and /var/adm/oSYSLOG. The default priority level is 4 (warning, error and critical messages). Repeated messages in any order are recorded once, at the point of first occurrence, with the repetition count and the last time stamp shown at the end of the message, delimited by "<" and ">". This includes interspersed multiple sequences of repeated messages. Th...
amtime1970 prints the current seconds since Jan 1, 1970 if no argument is given. With arguments, it converts between local time and seconds since Jan 1, 1970. The format of local time is the same as the output of ctime(3C). The arguments are: -d seconds Convert seconds since Jan 1, 1970 to local time -t localtime Convert local time to seconds since Jan 1, 1970
IRIS Annotator is an authoring environment for annotating 3D models. Annotator is based on a 3D geometry viewer for viewing and manipulating 3D models. Analogous to 2D redlining, it also allows you to annotate the models using 3D markers. You then create and/or import multi-media notes that present additional information about the model, and attach them to the markers. Finally, you can save the annotated model, and mail it to others for their review. Annotator optionally takes a filename on the ...
ansitape reads and writes magnetic tapes written in ANSI standard format (called ``Files-11'' by DEC). Tapes written by ansitape are labeled with the first six characters of the machine name by default. Actions are controlled by the key argument. The key is a string of characters containing at most one function letter. Other arguments to the command are a tape label and filenames specifying which files are to be written onto or extracted from the tape. Note that this version is designed to wor...
audiopanel provides a graphical interface to control the audio hardware. The display indicates the state of one or more independent loci of audio hardware control known as "devices" and allows control of their signal levels, sample rates, and master timing as well as input signal metering and monitoring. The display is loosely divided into two halves; input devices panels with their related controls, when displayed, appear on the left half of the window and output devices panels and their cont...
appdefpath is responsible for supplying an absolute path to the appropriate resource defaults given X server specific information. The default is typically /usr/lib/X11/appdefaults. Page 1 (printed 10/9/01)
apply runs the named command on each argument arg in turn. Normally, arguments are chosen singly; the optional number n specifies the number of arguments to be passed to command. If n is zero, command is run without arguments once for each arg. Character sequences of the form %d in command, where d is a digit from 1 to 9, are replaced by the dth following unused arg. If any such sequences occur, n is ignored and the number of arguments passed to command is the maximum value of d in command. The ...
The appres program prints the resources seen by an application (or subhierarchy of an application) with the specified class and instance names. It can be used to determine which resources a particular program will load. For example, % appres XTerm will list the resources that any xterm program will load. If no application class is specified, the class -AppResTest- is used. To match a particular instance name, specify an instance name explicitly after the class name, or use the normal Xt toolkit ...
apropos shows which manual sections contain instances of any of the given keywords in their title. Each word is considered separately, and, case of letters is ignored. Words that are parts of other words are considered; thus, when looking for compile, apropos will also find all instances of compiler. Try apropos password and apropos editor If the line starts `name(section) ...' you can do `man section name' to get the documentation for it. Try `apropos format' and then `man 3 printf' to get ...
The archiver (ar) maintains groups of files as a single archive file. Generally, you use this utility to create and update library files that the link editor uses; however, you can use the archiver for any similar purpose. This version of ar produces both 32-bit and 64-bit archives. The 32-bit archive format is defined in the System V Release 4 ABI. The 64-bit archive format is defined in the 64-bit ELF OBJECT File Specification. 32-bit objects and 64-bit objects cannot be mixed in an archive. T...
The arp program displays and modifies the Internet-to-Ethernet address translation tables used by the address resolution protocol (arp(7P)). With no flags, the program displays the current ARP entry for hostname. The host can be specified by name or by number, using Internet dot notation. The arp flags are: -a Display all of the current ARP entries by reading the table from the routing socket. -c Clear all of the current non-permanent ARP entries from the table. -d hostname A superuser can delet...
The array command is used to execute the array command specifed by "command args..." on one or more machines in an array and display the resulting output on stdout. An array command is not necessarily the same thing as a UNIX command. It is passed to arrayd(1M), the array services daemon, which is responsible for translating it to an actual UNIX command and executing it on the machines that make up the array. Several array commands are available by default; these are described below. array tak...
arrayconfig is a tool for configuring a simple array of systems. It can perform the following tasks: - Generate an array configuration file (arrayd.conf) containing an array definition for the nodes in a single array. - Distribute an array configuration file to the nodes in an array and activate array services on them. - Update the "array services machine identifier" on the local system or all of the systems in the array that support them. The arrayconfig command itself has several command lin...
arrayd is the array services daemon. It performs several different tasks related to the use of an array of two or more machines, such as: - Allocating global array session handles - Forwarding "array commands" to all of the machines in an array - Maintaining a database of the current array configuration and providing that information to other commands and programs - Determining which processes belong to a particular array session and providing that information to other commands and programs Fo...
arshell is an array-cognizant variation of the standard rsh(1C) command: it connects to the specified host and executes the specified command. For the purposes of parsing the arshell command line, host (optionally prepended with username) is considered to be the first argument that does not being with the character "-", and command is considered to be the second such argument, as well as all of the arguments following it. arshell copies its standard input to the remote command, the standard ou...
as is the SGI assembler. It assembles a symbolic assembly language source program, producing an object file in elf format. The SGI assembler support three different Application Binary Interfaces controlled by the options -o32 , -n32 , and -64 (see abi(5) ) As never runs the loader. as always defines the preprocessor symbols: _LANGUAGE_ASSEMBLY, __sgi, __mips, __host_mips, __unix, _MIPSEB, _SYSTYPE_SVR4, _SVR4_SOURCE, _SGI_SOURCE, _MIPS_ISA, _MIPS_SIM, _MIPS_FPSET, _MIPS_SZINT, _MIPS_SZLONG, and ...
Asa interprets the output of FORTRAN programs that utilize ASA carriage control characters. It processes either the files whose names are given as arguments or the standard input if no file names are supplied. The first character of each line is assumed to be a control character; their meanings are: ' ' (blank) single new line before printing 0 double new line before printing 1 new page before printing + overprint previous line. Lines beginning with other than the above characters are treated ...
ascheck validates the configuration on all the array services daemons known to the local array services daemon. Checks are made to ensure that the various array and machine definitions are consistent with each other, both on the individual servers and with corresponding definitions on the other servers. If any problems are found, they are described in detail and suggestions are provided to correct the situation. It should be noted that ascheck is not a syntax checker for the individual array ser...
The askRestartFm utility restarts the file manager on the desktop background and, if necessary, the icon catalog. Its purpose is to show new application icons immediately, saving the user the trouble of logging out and back in. askRestartFm displays a question dialog asking the user whether to restart fm and iconcatalog. If the user clicks the Now button, then it restarts them immediately. Caveat: All iconviews (dirviews) are closed and must be reopened manually by the user. The existing fm proc...
at and batch read commands from standard input to be executed at a later time. at allows you to specify when the commands should be executed, while jobs queued with batch will execute when system load level permits. The at utility reads commands from standard input and groups them together as an at-job, to be executed at a later time. The at-job will be executed in a separate invocation of the shell, running in a separate process group with no controlling terminal, except that of the environment...
The atconfig command enables AppleTalk on an interface. It is similar in function to ifconfig(1m). When atconfig is run, the interface uses the Apple Address Resolution Protocol (AARP) to determine its net and node number. When run on the loopback lo0, atconfig sets the net and node of a local pseudo-network. Specifying a intr of "default" will configure the first interface in the ifaddr list. All numeric arguments may be specified in hexadecimal by prepending them with a 0x. The flags are def...
The atinfo command prints netrange, net, node, phase, and zone information for each Ethernet interface. If the interface has not been configured with atconfig, the Zone field will read ``Interface not configured.'' Despite the fact that Phase I AppleTalk is no longer supported, atinfo may still print phase information as ``1 or 2'' until the interface is configured. If the interface is configured, atinfo attempts to contact the nbpd(1m) to get a list of zones for the interface. If the daemon...
The atinit program manages startup and shutdown of K-Talk AppleTalk services. It is normally invoked by the server's startup scripts (see the SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION HINTS section for details) at system boot time. The action argument may be any one of the following: halt stops all AppleTalk servers running on the UNIX system. start starts all the servers and commands listed in /usr/etc/appletalk/services (described below). The command atinit start is usually found in the system startup file. It s...
The atlic command allows the user to view and modify the status of their Xinet license. The -u option will allow a user to update an existing (and valid) license. Page 1 (printed 5/15/100)
The atping command attempts to use the Apple Echo Protocol (AEP) to ping an AppleTalk node. It is similar in function to ping(1m). In its usual usage, atping is given an AppleTalk net and node number, and it sends an echo request every second. It waits for response packets, and lists each one as it is received. The output includes a round trip time, and a count of packets received and lost. The net and node arguments can be prepended with a 0x to specify hexadecimal input. -x causes atping to pr...
The atservers utility uses the AppleTalk Name Binding Protocol (NBP) to look up all named entities on the UNIX host's AppleTalk network. The flags are defined as follows: -v produces a more readable (but less parseable) output. number specifies the number of entities atservers will look up. If no number is specified, atservers will look for up to 20 entities per zone. If there are more entities in a zone than number, a '[...]' (or a longer message in verbose mode) will be printed at the end o...
The atstat command prints out tables and statistics that it reads from the AppleTalk kernel implementation. When invoked, it will print a list of tables and let you select one at a time for viewing. The -x flag will cause all numbers to be printed in hexadecimal. There are options for viewing the AARP, DDP, and RTMP statistics. These statistics are relatively selfexplanatory, and will very from implementation to implementation. They can all be reset to zero by using the "Clear statistics" opti...
Extended Attributes implement the ability for a user to attach name/value pairs to objects within the filesystem. They are currently only fully supported in XFS and CXFS filesystems. Other filesystems may provide a partial implementation. They could be used to store meta-information about the file. For example "character-set=kanji" could tell a document browser to use the Kanji character set when displaying that document and "thumbnail=..." could provide a reduced resolution overview of a hi...
System Modes Indigo2 and Indy systems support four simultaneous analog audio input and output channels. To support this additional functionality while maintaining functional compatibility with the Indigo systems, the Indigo2 and Indy provides two modes of operation: four-channel mode and Indigo mode. By default, the system is in Indigo mode, and remains in it unless you explicitly change to four-channel mode, via apanel. Switching between the modes changes both the electrical properties of the c...
audiostate is a program which displays the state of the audio hardware, in Audio Library parameter values. The state also includes count of audio ports available for use by other applications and a list of open input and output ports, described by process name, process ID, audio port name. Many audio applications name their ports inadequately.
The audit shell script is called during system startup from /etc/rc2 to start the system audit trail daemon, satd(1M), and enable auditing of predefined audit events (using sat_select(1M)). The script is called during system shutdown from /etc/rc0 to kill the daemon gracefully and disable auditing. Note that, as installed, auditing is off by default and must be enabled as described in configuration flags, below. In addition, once auditing has been enabled via chkconfig(1M), the system should be ...
The autoconfig command is used invoke lboot and other commands to generate a UNIX kernel. The autoconfig command is also a startup script in /etc/init.d. The options are as: -v Requests verbose output from lboot and other commands. -f Generates a new kernel even if it appears that no hardware or software changes have been made. Use of -f will clear any options set in the /var/config/autoconfig.options file. -p toolroot Specifies the directory tree containing the compiler and other tools needed t...
autofs is a command that installs AutoFS mount points and associates an AutoFS map with each mount point. The AutoFS filesystem monitors attempts to access directories within it and notifies the autofsd(1M) daemon. The daemon uses the map to locate a filesystem, which it then mounts at the point of reference within the AutoFS filesystem. If the filesystem is not accessed within an appropriate interval (five minutes by default), the autofsd daemon unmounts the filesystem. AutoFS is started by the...
autofsd is an RPC server that answers filesystem mount and unmount requests from the AutoFS filesystem. It uses local files or name service maps to locate filesystems to be mounted. These maps are described with the autofs(1M) command. The autofsd daemon is started during system initialization from the /etc/init.d/network script if the configuration flags nfs and autofs are set on. Type the following commands as superuser to enable AutoFS: /etc/chkconfig...
Automount is a daemon that automatically and transparently mounts NFS filesystems as needed. Whenever a user on a client machine running automount invokes a command that needs to access a remote file or directory, the hierarchy to which that file or directory belongs is mounted and remains mounted for as long as it is needed. When a certain amount of time has elapsed during which the hierarchy is not accessed, it is automatically unmounted. No mounting of unaccessed remote filesystems is done at...
autopush allows you to configure the list of modules to be automatically pushed onto the stream when a device is opened. It can also be used to remove a previous setting or get information on a setting. The following options apply to autopush: -f file This option sets up the autopush configuration for each driver according to the information stored in the specified file. An autopush file consists of lines of at least four fields each, where the fields are separated by a space as shown below: maj...
The ArrayView command (also known by its synonym aview) is used to display status information about the various machines in an array. The ArrayView window is made up of two sections. In the top section, a brief summary of the overall system utilization of each machine is displayed. In the bottom section, a separate pane for each machine is used to display more detail about some aspect of the system, such as logged-in users or the most active processes. The relative size of the upper and lower se...
Awf formats the text from the input file(s) (standard input if none) in an imitation of The -macro option is mandatory and must be `-man' or `-ms'. Awf implements the following raw requests: .\" .ce .fi .in .ne .pl .sp .ad .de .ft .it .nf .po .ta .bp .ds .ie .ll .nr .ps .ti .br .el .if .na .ns .rs .tm and the following in-text codes: \$ \% \* \c \f \n \s plus the full list of /troff special characters in the original V7 troff manual. Many restrictions are present; the behavior in gene...
NOTE: This version of awk has some incompatibilities with previous versions. See the COMPATIBILITY ISSUES section below for more detail. awk and nawk use the old regexp() and compile() regular expression routines. When the environment variable _XPG is equal to 1 (one), pawk is exec'ed which uses the newer regcomp() and regexec() routines which implement the Extended Regular Expression package. awk scans each input file for lines that match any of a set of patterns specified in prog. The prog st...
The background customization panel is used to edit the background for a particular desk. The user is presented with a list of different backgrounds. All backgrounds except those using the graphics library (GL) can be previewed. The user can select a background, modify its colors if it is a non-GL pattern, then apply the background pattern to the current desk. The background panel can be run from a Unix shell command line or from the toolchest (Desktop > Customize > Background). Like most other c...
The Backup command archives the named file or directory (the current directory if none is specified) to the local or remote tape device. It can be used to make a full system backup by specifying the directory name as /. In case of a full backup, this command makes a list of the files in the disk volume header and saves this information in a file which is then stored on tape. This file is used during crash recovery to restore a damaged volume header. Information about mounted filesystems and logi...
backup is a privileged command that performs a backup of the entire system or of a selected list of files. The backup can be performed now, once at a later date, or recurring either daily or weekly. backup uses cpio(1) to write its output. device would typically be a tape device, but can also be a file for backing up to disk. -n is used to specify that a backup occur now, -l is for backups which are occur once at a later date, -d is for daily backups, and -w is for weekly backups. Backups that o...
Managers display information about your system and provide access to interactive guides (also called tasks) that let you administer your system. For example, the User Manager displays a list of the user accounts currently on the system and gives you access to guides like "Add a User Account" and "Modify a User Account." In a Manager window, you can open a guide by choosing its name from the Task menu or by clicking its button at the bottom of the window. The Backup and Restore Manager displa...
basename deletes any prefix ending in / and the suffix (if present in string) from string, and prints the result on the standard output. It is normally used inside substitution marks (``) within shell procedures. The suffix is a pattern as defined on the ed(1) manual page. dirname delivers all but the last level of the pathname in string.
Bdftopcf is a font compiler for the X server and font server. Fonts in Portable Compiled Format can be read by any architecture, although the file is structured to allow one particular architecture to read them directly without reformatting. This allows fast reading on the appropriate machine, but the files are still portable (but read more slowly) on other machines.
bdiff is used in a manner analogous to diff to find which lines in file1 and file2 must be changed to bring the files into agreement. Its purpose is to allow processing of files too large for diff. If file1 (file2) is -, the standard input is read. Valid options to bdiff are: n The number of line segments. The value of n is 3500 by default. If the optional third argument is given and it is numeric, it is used as the value for n. This is us...
The bfs command is similar to ed except that it is read-only and processes much larger files. Files can be up to 1024K bytes and 32K lines, with up to 512 bytes, including new-line, per line (255 for 16-bit machines). bfs is usually more efficient than ed for scanning a file, since the file is not copied to a buffer. It is most useful for identifying sections of a large file where the csplit command can be used to divide it into more manageable pie...
If job control is enabled (see the description of set -m in the sh(1) manpage), the bg utility resumes suspended jobs from the current environment by running them as background jobs. If the job specified by job_id is already a running background job, the bg utility has no effect and will exit successfully. Using bg to place a job into the background causes its process ID to become "known in the current shell execution environment", as if it had been started as an asynchronous list....
bgicons maintains icons on the desktop background by comparing its notion of the system stored in icondb with the new state of the system from inputfile. If the -inputfile argument is not specified, the new state of the system is read from standard input. inputfile is a text file containing lines of serialized DNA. icondb is maintained by bgicons; the first time bgicons is run for a particular icondb, it is expected that icondb will not exist. icondb should not be edited by any program other tha...
bindkey is a program which provides an interface to the xwsh(1G) function key binding facilities. key is the name of a key on the keyboard; type bindkey without arguments to obtain a list of valid keys. The following are valid bindkey keys: f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 f8 f9 f10 f11 f12 print-scrn scroll-lock pause insert home page-up end page-down left-arrow up-arrow down-arrow right-arrow binding is the text string which the key is bound to. The text of the binding argument must be in the printable ch...
Bison is a parser generator in the style of yacc(1). It should be upwardly compatible with input files designed for yacc. Input files should follow the yacc convention of ending in .y. Unlike yacc, the generated files do not have fixed names, but instead use the prefix of the input file. For instance, a grammar description file named parse.y would produce the generated parser in a file named parse.tab.c, instead of yacc's y.tab.c. This description of the options that can be given to bison is ad...
The bitmap program is a rudimentary tool for creating or editing rectangular images made up of 1's and 0's. Bitmaps are used in X for defining clipping regions, cursor shapes, icon shapes, and tile and stipple patterns. The bmtoa and atobm filters convert bitmap files (FILE FORMAT) to and from ASCII strings. They are most commonly used to quickly print out bitmaps and to generate versions for including in text....
bootp is a server that supports the Internet Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP). This protocol is designed to allow a (possibly diskless) client machine to determine its own Internet address, the address of a boot server, and the name of an appropriate boot file to be loaded and executed. BOOTP does not provide the actual transfer of the boot file, which is typically done with a simple file transfer protocol such as TFTP. A detailed protocol specification for BOOTP is contained in RFC 951, which is avai...
bootpadd is a tool to help automate the process of adding client hosts to /usr/etc/bootptab. See bootp(1M) for more details on the contents and format of /usr/etc/bootptab. bootpadd can also be used to update existing information in the /usr/etc/bootptab. bootpadd checks the /usr/etc/bootptab to see if an entry already exists for the specified host. If an entry exists, the current options are used as defaults. The bootpadd command takes the following arguments: -b bootfile Specifies the name of ...
bootparamd is a server process that provides information to diskless clients necessary for booting. It consults the bootparams database. If the client is not found there, or if the network information service (NIS) is not running, then the /etc/bootparams file is consulted. bootparamd can be invoked either by inetd(1M) or by the user.
These shell procedures are executed via entries in /etc/inittab by init(1M) whenever the system is booted (or rebooted). First, the bcheckrc procedure checks the status of the root filesystem. If the root filesystem is found to be bad, bcheckrc repairs it. Then, the brc procedure clears the mounted filesystem table, /etc/mtab, and puts the entry for the root filesystem into the mount table. After these two procedures have executed, init checks for the initdefault value in /etc/inittab. This tell...
Bru is a UNIX filesystem backup utility with significant enhancements over other more common utilities such as tar, cpio, volcopy, and dd. Some of bru's capabilities include: o Full or incremental backup with quick and easy restoration of files. o Multiple physical volumes per archive. o Data integrity assurance via checksum computation on every archive block. o Ability to properly save and restore directories, symbolic links, block special files, and character special files. o Comparison of ar...
Note: This is the Bourne shell description. All references to sh and shell pertain to bsh and all references below to /usr/lib/rsh, the restricted shell, no longer apply to the Bourne shell. (See sh(1)). bsh is a command programming language that executes commands read from a terminal or a file. jsh is an interface to the shell that provides all the functionality of sh and enables Job Control (see Job Control below). See Invocation below for the meaning of arguments to the shell. ...
This command is a filter which buffers input from the input file and writes it to the output file. The command is especially useful for reading from or writing to streaming tape drives, where bstream can be used as a speed matching program to keep the tape streaming as much as possible. If input or output files are not specified, then bstream simply copies the standard input to the standard output through multiple buffers. A tape can be written to or read from in this manner, but bstream will no...
bufview displays periodic information about the file system buffer cache. It is modeled after the program top(1) which displays information about running processes.
The buildppd program constructs a PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file for the specified printer in the current directory. The PPD file is used by a variety of programs (including papserver(1m), textps(1), and imagetops(1) ) to determine the capabilities of the printer. buildppd first queries the printer for its "Product", and attempts to select the correct PPD from /usr/adm/appletalk/ppds. If this is not possible, it will try to build a simple PPD by querying the printer. The PPD file bu...
The following is the old c2ph.doc documentation by Tom Christiansen Date: 25 Jul 91 08:10:21 GMT Once upon a time, I wrote a program called pstruct. It was a perl program that tried to parse out C structures and display their member offsets for you. This was especially useful for people looking at binary dumps or poking around the kernel. Pstruct was not a pretty program. Neither was it particularly robust. The problem, you see, was that the C compiler was much better at parsi...
cached monitors the number of single bit errors in the secondary cache of each cpu. It reports the number of single bit errors encountered on any cpu each time it runs. The -s size parameter determines the size of the cpu secondary cache in bytes. If no value is specified, the default value of 4194304 (4 MB) is used. The -S delay parameter indicates the amount of time to wait each time between examining the secondary caches. This delay is in seconds and the default is 3600 seconds (one hour). Th...
cal prints a calendar for the specified year. If a month is also specified, a calendar just for that month is printed. If neither is specified, a calendar for the present month is printed. The month is a number between 1 and 12. The year can be between 1 and 9999. The calendar produced is that for England and the United States.
calendar consults the file calendar in the current directory and prints out lines that contain today's or tomorrow's date anywhere in the line. Most reasonable month-day dates such as Aug. 24, august 24, 8/24, and so on, are recognized, but not 24 August or 24/8. On weekends ``tomorrow'' extends through Monday. calendar can be invok...
For each input hostname, canonhost prints a single line on stdout containing the canonical name of that host. The canonical name of a host is determined by calling gethostbyname(3N).
The capitem program reads an /etc/printcap entry for the given printer and prints the value of the 2-letter item on its standard output, if the item has a value. If capitem cannot find the given printer or item in the printer's entry, it will print an error message on standard error.
captoinfo looks in file for termcap descriptions. For each one found, an equivalent terminfo description is written to standard output, along with any comments found. A description that is expressed as relative to another description (as specified in the termcap tc = field) is reduced to the minimum superset before being output. If no file is given, the environment variable TERMCA...
The capture program is obsolete. The command name and argument syntax have been retained for backwards compatibility, but their use is strongly deprecated. capture has been replaced by mediarecorder. Please refer to the manual page for mediarecorder(1) and update your scripts accordingly. capture is an interactive program to record digital media files from the camera, microphone and workstation screen. -nofork Causes capture to run in the foreground, rather than the default behavior of forking i...
cat reads each file in sequence and writes it on the standard output. Thus cat file prints the contents of file on your terminal, and cat file1 file2 >file3 concatenates file1 and file2, and writes the results in file3. If no input file is given, or if the argument - is encountered, cat reads from the standard input. cat processes su...
The cb command reads C programs either from its arguments or from the standard input, and writes them on the standard output with spacing and indentation that display the structure of the code. Under default options, cb preserves all user new-lines. cb accepts the following options. -s Canonicalizes the code to the style of Kernighan and Ritchie in The C Programming Language. -j Causes split lines to be put back together. -n Causes pairs of left braces with only whitespace between them to be int...
If directory is not specified, the value of shell parameter $HOME is used as the new working directory. If directory specifies a complete path starting with /, ., .., directory becomes the new working directory. If neither case applies, cd tries to find the designated directory relative to one of the paths specified by the $CDPATH shell variable. $CDPATH has the same syntax as, and similar semantics to, the $PATH shell variable. cd must have execute (search) permission in directory. Because a ne...
cdc changes the delta commentary, for the SID (SCCS IDentification string) specified by the -r keyletter, of each named SCCS file. Delta commentary is defined to be the Modification Request (MR) and comment information normally specified via the delta(1) command (-m and -y keyletters). If a directory is named, cdc behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component of the pathname does not begin with s.) and unreadable files are...
cddbcvt takes a database file in the old format used by pre-4.0.5 versions of cdplayer, and converts them to a CD database directory, as used by CDman and later versions of cdplayer. The optional argument olddbfile is the name of the database file you wish to convert. By default this is .cdplayerrc in the user's home directory. The optional argument newdbdir is the name of the directory in which to put the new database files. The directory will be created if it does not already exist. By defaul...
cdheadphone is a Motif based control panel for playing audio Compact Discs on a CD-ROM drive. Output is through the headphone jack or output jacks of the CD-ROM drive. To play a CD through the IRIS audio hardware (where available, e.g. on the IRIS Indigo) you must either run cdplayer(1) or plug the output jacks of the CD-ROM drive into the lineinput jacks of the audio hardware. cdheadphone can store the names of discs and tracks, and also allows track programming and assigning names to these pro...
CdPlayer is a program for playing audio tapes and CDs. When called as datplayer it works as a tape player. When called as cdplayer or when the -dev cd option is specified, CDplayer works as a CD player.
The cflow command analyzes a collection of C, yacc, and lex files and attempts to build a graph charting the external references. Files suffixed with .y, .l, .c, or .i are yacced, lexed, and compiled as appropriate. The results are collected and turned into a graph which is displayed upon the standard output. If the environment variable _XPG is defined, cflow operates in conformance with the X/Open XPG4 specifications. The format of the output may differ in accordance to the XPG4 standards. In a...
The cfsadmin command provides administrative tools for managing cached file systems. Its functions fall into four general categories: o cache creation o deletion of cached file systems o listing of cache contents and statistics o resource parameter adjustment when the file system is unmounted. For each form of the command, you must specify a cache directory, that is, the directory under which the cache is actually stored. A path name in the front file system identifies the cache directory. You c...
Cfsstat displays statistical information about the Cache File System (CacheFS). It can also be used to reinitialize this information. If no options are given the default is to print everything and reinitialize nothing. The optional argument interval may be used to indicate the interval in seconds between display updates in the "full-screen" mode described below. The default value is 1.
chacl changes the Access Control List (see acl(4)) for a file or directory. The -b flag indicates that there are two ACLs, the first is the file access ACL and the second the directory default ACL. The -d flag is used to set only the default ACL of a directory. The -R and -D flags are used to remove the file access ACL and directory default ACL respectively, the -B flag will remove all ACLs. The ACL(s) specified are applied to each file in the pat<...
chcap changes the effective, permitted, and inheritable capability sets of the specified file(s) or removes them. A file's capability sets affect the capabilities that are assigned to a process upon execution of the file. For a more complete description of the capability mechanism, see capabilities(4). capsets is a string that describes the changes to the file capability sets. It is comprised of one or more capability lists. Each capabili...
check displays RCS checkout information for files in the current directory. This includes the revision level, checkout status of the file, and who the file is checked out to. check assumes ./RCS is the default RCS directory. A different RCS directory can be specified with the rcsdir argument. The -d switch causes check to display the date when the file was checked out in addition to the usual information. The -l switch causes check to display only the names of files currently checked out. If che...
checkPassword is used to confirm a password for a particular user account. The password is supplied via stdin so that it is not visible on the process command line. The checkPassword command has the following required parameter: -l login-name The login name of the user account whose password is being checked.
checkpriv checks to see if you have been granted privilege. If checkpriv indicates that you do have privilege, then runpriv(1M) would run the command privilege found in the directory /usr/sysadm/privbin on your behalf. checkpriv indicates that you have privilege if any one of the following conditions are met: 1. You are running as root. 2. There is no root password on the system. 3. The file /var/sysadm/defaultPrivileges/privilege exists and has the string "on" as its first line (see defaultPr...
check_abi_compliance checks an object file for ABI compliance and optionally displays references to routines which are not part of the ABI and required routines which are missing from the object file. -abidir directory This specifies a directory which contains files which specify ABI routines. The filenames are of the form LIBRARY.names. -liblist library_list This specifies a list of shared objects on which this object file depends. This defaults to the liblist of the object file. -required Disp...
check_abi_interface checks a library interface and displays ABI entries which are missing as well as public entries which are not part of the ABI. -abidir directory This specifies a directory which contains files which specify ABI routines. The filenames are of the form LIBRARY.names. -libname library_list This specifies the name of the library to use when searching in abidir. The default is the name of the file. -missing Display only ABI routines which are missing from the library. -extra Displ...
check_for_syscalls finds embedded system calls in an object file. An ABI-compliant program may not directly do system calls, it must invoke an ABI-compliant DSO to access system services. -syscalls syscall_file This file is used to translate from system call numbers to names. The default is /usr/lib/abi/data/syscall.names.
chkconfig with no arguments or with the -s option prints the state (on or off) of every configuration flag found in the directory /var/config. The flags normally are shown sorted by name; with the -s option they are shown sorted by state. A flag is considered on if its file contains the string ``on'' and off otherwise. If flag is specified as the sole argument, chkconfig exits with status 0 if flag is on and with status 1 if flag is off or nonexistent. The exit status can be used by shell scri...
chkutent opens and reads /var/adm/utmpx and makes 2 checks for consistency; whether there are any entries that have duplicate 'id' fields, and whether there are any entries that are stale. Stale entries are found by looking at all entries that have ut_type equal to USER_PROCESS and checking to see if the process (specified by ut_pid) is still alive. If it isn't, ...
chlabel resets the security labels of the files specified by the listed path arguments to the value specified by label. Unprivileged users may only specify a label that is equal to that of their current process label. A user with CAP_MAC_UPGRADE capability may specify a label that is more sensitive or of lower integrity than the current process label. A user with CAP_MAC_DOWNGRADE capability may specify a label that is less sensitive or of higher integrity than the current process label. A user ...
The permissions of the named files or directories are changed according to mode, which may be symbolic or absolute. Absolute changes to permissions are stated using octal numbers: chmod nnn file(s) where n is a number from 0 to 7. Symbolic changes are stated using mnemonic characters: chmod a operator b file(s) where a is one or more characters corresponding to user, group, or other; where operator is +, -, and =, signifying assignment of permissions; and where b is one or more characters corres...
chown changes the owner of the files to owner. The owner may be either a login name found in the password file, or a decimal user ID. An optional group, separated from the owner by either a period or a colon, may also be specified. The group may be either a group name found in the group file, or a decimal group ID. chgrp changes the group ID of the files to group. The group may be either a group name found in the group file, or a decimal group ID. No errors, except for usage errors, are reported...
chroot causes the given command to be executed relative to the new root, newroot. The meaning of any initial slashes (/) in the pathnames is changed for the command and any of its child processes to newroot. Furthermore, upon execution, the initial working directory is newroot. If you redirect the output of the command to a file: chroot newroot command > x chroot creates the file x relative to the original root of the command, not the new one. The new root pathname is always...
The chrtbl command creates two tables containing information on character classification, upper/lowercase conversion, character-set width, and numeric formatting. One table is an array of (2*257*4) + 7 bytes that is encoded so a table lookup can be used to determine the character classification of a character, convert a character [see ctype(3C)], and find the byte and screen width of a character in one of the supplementary code sets. The other table contains info...
ci stores new revisions into RCS files. Each pathname matching an RCS suffix is taken to be an RCS file. All others are assumed to be working files containing new revisions. ci deposits the contents of each working file into the corresponding RCS file. If only a working file is given, ci tries to find the corresponding RCS file in an RCS subdirectory and then in the working file's directory. For more details, see FILE NAMING below. For ci to work, the caller's login must be on the access list,...
cidxfonts is a utility normally run during the installation process which processes CID-keyed fonts and creates files necessary for the operation of the X server or font server. After preprocessing some of the font files to improve font performance, the fonts.scale file is created based on information in ps2xlfd_map files. Finally, cidxfonts will run mkfontdir to generate the necessary fonts.dir file. If some condition exists that prevents cidxfonts from effectively generating a directory, the u...
The cksum utility writes to the standard output three whitespace separated fields for each input file. These fields are a checksum CRC, the total number of octets in the file and the file name. If no file name is specified, the standard input is used and no file name is written. The options are as follows: -o Use historic algorithms instead of the (superior) default one. Algorithm 1 is the algorithm used by historic Unix systems as the sum 1 algorithm. This is a 16-bit checksum...
In order to improve performance, the IRIX Interactive Desktop automatically maintains a cache of ftr types and layouts for all of the directories that are viewed with fm or dirview. The cleanCache shell script can be used remove cache files for directories which no longer exists. Since /usr/lib/desktop/cleanCache is a shell script, users can copy and modify it to suit their own particular needs.
clear clears your screen if this is possible. It looks in the environment for the terminal type and then uses the terminfo(4) database to figure out how to clear the screen. clear opens a full screen window and clears all bitplanes (front, back overlay, underlay, alphaoverlay and so forth). It sends a redraw to all open windows.
clipfly is one of the sample programs distributed with the OpenGL Performer high-performance graphics library. It is based on the perfly program, and has perfly's functionality and command-line options, with additional enhancements designed for viewing and manipulating clip textures in scenes on InfiniteReality graphics hardware. For full desription of these enhancements and suggestions on how to get started, see /usr/share/Performer/src/sample/C/clipfly/README. ote: clipfly is not supported un...
The clogin command is executed at the beginning of each session on the graphics console. It replaces the functionality of the command login(1). The choice between login(1) and clogin is made on the basis of the configuration variable visuallogin(4). If this configuration variable is set to on then clogin is used in place of login(1). clogin displays a window containing two areas. The top area contains either icons representing users who can log onto the system or an SGIlogo design. The bottom ar...
clri writes nulls on the inode table entry for i-number. This effectively eliminates the inode at that address. special is the device name on which an EFS filesystem has been defined. After clri is executed, any blocks in the affected file shows up as ``not accounted for'' when fsck(1M) is run against the filesystem. The inode can be allocated to a new file. Read and write permission is required on the specified special device. This command is used to remove a file that appears in no directory...
cl_init is the init(1M) program in diskless share tree. When client workstation installs its software using the PROM menu, the workstation uses the share tree as the root and process 1 runs cl_init instead of the regular /etc/init. cl_init prompts the user with the following questions: Do you want to use server XXX for software installation (y/n) ? XXX is the default server name used in the tapedevice or bootfile PROM variables. When doing installation, this default is the name of the server tha...
The two files are compared. (If file1 is -, the standard input is used.) Under default options, cmp makes no comment if the files are the same; if they differ, it announces the byte and line number at which the difference occurred. If one file is an initial subsequence of the other, that fact is noted. skip1 and skip2 are initial byte offsets into file1 and file2 respectively, and may be either octal or decimal; a leading 0 denotes octal. Options: -l Print the byte number (d...
cmssgi2jpg converts an SGI image file into a JPEG compliant JFIF image file and preserves the embedded ICC device profile if one is present. The compression level can be set from the command line. The resulting image file is written to the same directory as the original, with the extension changed to .jpg. Command Line Options cmssgi2jpg supports the following command line options: -q quality Specifies the quality level required for the resulting image. (This may be thought of as the inver...
cmstag associates an International Color Consortium (ICC) profile with one or more image files. The image files need not all be in the same format. There are two possible ways to associate the profile with the image(s). By default, or if the -f flag is set, the full ICC profile will be embedded as a tag in the image file(s). If the -n flag is set, then only the name of the file will be embedded. This approach is only useful if the image file and profile are guaranteed to always resid...
cmstaggif associates an International Color Consortium (ICC) profile with a GIF image file; this is called "tagging" the image file. There are two possible ways to associate the profile with the image. By default, or if the -f flag is set, the full ICC profile will be embedded as a tag in the image file. If the -n flag is set, then only the name of the file will be embedded. This approach is only useful if the image file and profile are guaranteed to always reside on the same machi...
cmstagjpeg associates an International Color Consortium (ICC) profile with a JPEG image file (in the JFIF file format); this is called "tagging" the profile. There are two possible ways to associate the profile with the image. By default, or if the -f flag is set, the full ICC profile will be embedded as a tag in the image file. If the -n flag is set, then only the name of the file will be embedded. This approach is only useful if the image file and profile are guaranteed to always...
cmstagsgi associates an International Color Consortium (ICC) profile with an SGI image file. There are two possible ways to associate the profile with the image. By default, or if the -f flag is set, the full ICC profile will be embedded as a tag in the image file. If the -n flag is set, then only the name of the file will be embedded. This approach is only useful if the image file and profile are guaranteed to always reside on the same machine. The profile tag is preserved when conv...
cmstagstiff associates an International Color Consortium (ICC) profile with an image file in the STIFF image file format. Note that the file must be in the STIFF Streamable TIFF image file format. This procedure will mangle a TIFF file that is not in the STIFF file format. If Impressario is installed, files may be converted into the STIFF format using /usr/lib/print/il2stiff. Command Line Options cmstagstiff supports the following command line options: -s s...
cmstif2jpg converts a TIFF image file into a JPEG compliant JFIF image file and preserves the embedded ICC device profile if one is present. The compression level can be set from the command line. The resulting image file is written to the same directory as the original, with the extension changed to .jpg. Command Line Options cmstif2jpg supports the following command line options: -q quality Specifies the quality level required for the resulting image. (This may be thought of as the inver...
co retrieves a revision from each RCS file and stores it into the corresponding working file. Pathnames matching an RCS suffix denote RCS files; all others denote working files. Names are paired as explained in ci(1). Revisions of an RCS file may be checked out locked or unlocked. Locking a revision prevents overlapping updates. A revision checked out for reading or processing (e.g., compiling) need not be locked. A revision checked out for editing and later checkin must normally be locked. Chec...
cocogif uses the International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles to determine how to perform the appropriate color management operation ("color correction", hence "coco") upon a GIF image file. The operation will be a color space conversion from the input device color space to the output device color space. The device color space associated with the input stream is determined in one of four ways. The following approaches are tried in order: o First, if the -s flag is set, the specified s...
cocojpeg uses the International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles to determine how to perform the appropriate color management operation ("color correction", hence "coco") upon a JPEG/JFIF image file. The operation will be a color space conversion from the input device color space to the output device color space. The device color space associated with the input stream is determined in one of four ways. The following approaches are tried in order: o First, if the -s flag is set, the spec...
cocostiff uses the International Color Consortium (ICC) profiles to determine how to perform the appropriate color management operation ("color correction", hence "coco") upon a TIFF stream. The operation will be a color space conversion from the input device color space to the output device color space. A TIFF stream is a TIFF image file in the Streamable TIFF (STIFF) format. STIFF files are directly created by Impressario products, such as gscan. Regular TIFF image files can...
col reads from the standard input and writes onto the standard output. It performs the line overlays implied by reverse line feeds (ASCII code ESC-7), and by forward and reverse half-line-feeds (ESC-9 and ESC-8). col is particularly useful for filtering multicolumn output made with the .rt command of nroff and output resulting from use of the tbl(1) preprocessor. If the -b option is given, col assumes that the output devi...
When porting a large application a critical question is ``How do I know if names in this application conflict with names in libraries I must use?'' Collide answers that question by finding name collisions across archive libraries and object files. It treats a Dynamic Shared Object (dso) as if it were an archive library. Given a list of files, collide finds all duplicate external names and writes those names to standard output. There is no output if there are no conflicts. The -l (longform) opt...
The colltbl command takes as input a specification file, file, that describes the collating sequence for a particular language and creates a database that can be read by strxfrmstrcmp(3C), strncmp(3C), or memcmp(3C). strcoll(3C) transforms its arguments and does a comparison. If no input file is supplied, stdin is read. The output file produced contains the database with collat...
Colorview is an X11 program that displays a color ``patch'' and a list of color names from an X11 rgb database. The color for a name is displayed by clicking the left mouse button over the color name. Command-line arguments are: -browse only lists the colors; the Accept and Apply buttons are not displayed. -display dpy specifies the X server to contact; see X(1). -geometry geom specifies the preferred size and position of the window; see X(1). -name name specifies the application name under wh...
comb generates a shell procedure [see sh(1)] which, when run, will reconstruct the given SCCS files. The reconstructed files will, hopefully, be smaller than the original files. The arguments may be specified in any order, but all keyletter arguments apply to all named SCCS files. If a directory is named, comb behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component of the path name does not begin with s.) and unreadable files are si...
comm reads file1 and file2, which should be ordered in ASCII collating sequence [see sort(1)], and produces a three-column output: lines only in file1; lines only in file2; and lines in both files. The file name - means the standard input. Flags 1, 2, or 3 suppress printing of the corresponding column. Thus comm -12 prints only the lines common to the two files; comm -23 prints only lines in the first file but not in t...
The command utility causes the shell to treat the arguments as a simple command, suppressing the shell function lookup. If the command_name is the same as the name of one of the special builtin utilities, the special properties in the enumerated list below (See SPECIAL BUILT-IN PROPERTIES) will not occur. In every other respect, if command_name is not the name of a function, the effect of command will be the same as omitting command. The command utility also provides information concerning how a...
Compress reduces the size of the named files using adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding. Whenever possible, each file is replaced by one with the extension .Z, while keeping the same permission modes, access and modification times. When invoked by the superuser the ownership modes are also retained. If no files are specified, the standard input is compressed to the standard output. Compressed files can be restored to their original form using uncompress or zcat. The -d option causes compress to uncompress...
comvpiew provides a graphical interface to view an image and the result of compressing the image with either sofware or hardware JPEG while interactively setting the quality factor of the compressed image. The size of the original image, the size of the compressed image, and the compression ratio are displayed. As an option the compresses/decompress cycle can be performed multiple times, with the resulting image then displayed. compview also provides panels to view the difference between the ori...
concerta ("Concert A") provides a graphical interface to a sine wave generator which can be set to produce a tone at any selected frequency or MIDI key number. It is useful for tuning samples while creating preset files for midisynth(1).
configAutoLogin is a privileged command that either enables or disables the auto login feature. If auto login is enabled, the system will automatically login to a specific user account when the system is restarted. Since no password is requested for auto login, this means that anyone can use the auto login account to gain access to the system.
Configdefaultroute adds or deletes a default route from the network routing table. This enables connection to be established with with the remote location. This may be necessary if a point-to-point link is in use or when route are off.
This command with the -up option activates the primary interface. The file /etc/config/ifconfig-1.options is updated. The -down option deactivates the primary interface. If your system is a standalone machine or you are using some other network interface, such as ISDN or modem instead of the ethernet interface, you may want to deactivate the ethernet interface. When the ethernet port is not connected and the interface is still up, you may see a dialog box that pops up at a regular interval with ...
This command with the -off option enables the user to stop forwarding routing information to other systems. If multiple network interfaces are present or if a point-to-point link is in use, you may want to suppress the routing information. The -q option is added to /etc/config/routed.options. The -on option enables the routing information to be forwarded again.
The program configkfs finds and allows users to mount AppleShare volumes from AppleShare servers on the network. It is a semifriendly interactive front-end to the mount(1m) and mount_kfs(1m) programs. Users who have X displays should use the vastly superior xktalk(1) program. The flags are defined as follows: -a look in all zones (default is the local zone) -O look for servers with this name (default is all servers) -T look for this type of server (default is AFPServer) -Z look in this zone (def...
The program configks configures printers on an AppleTalk network. The flags are defined as follows: -a look in all zones (default is the local zone) -P look for devices with this name (default is LaserWriter) -T look for this type of printer (default is LaserWriter) -Z look in this zone (default is local zone) This program looks for all AppleTalk printers that match the specified options. It then asks if you want to set up a spooler for them. It also prompts to see if you want to configure seria...
configmail is the historic interface to modifying parameters used in the sendmail.cf sendmail.cf file shipped with IRIX to obtain information about the local mail environment. configmail can also be executed by the user to display and/or modify that information. configmail is no longer the primary way to configure the sendmail.cf file. The correct way is to modify the sendmail.mc file. configmail can be used to generate a new sendmail.cf from the information and settings in the sendmail.mc file....
The configmon utility is responsible for tracking changes in system hardware and software configuration. It performs its duties automatically during system start-up. configmon gathers information about hardware and software components installed in the system and compares the results to configuration data stored in the Embedded Support Partner (ESP) database. If it finds that any hardware or software components have been installed or deinstalled, it updates the database and logs information about...
configNetIf configures the network interfaces on the system. This command not only updates the given network interface, but also updates relevant system files. This command is used by the Set Up and Start Networking and Turn Off Networking tasks.
configResolver configures the host resolution order used by various applications to resolve the hostnames on the system. This command is used by the Set Up and Start NIS, Add Host, and Modify Network Settings tasks to configure the host resolution order.
The program confirmjob is an X11/Motif client that creates a single MessageBox and waits for a button click. The text in the MessageBox is supplied by the question argument. The -title option will set the MessageBox's title bar to titlestring.
ConvertLayout reads the layout files from the Indigo Magic 1.x desktop and writes an IRIX Interactive Desktop 2.0 format layout file for those directories that still exist. It is not intended to be run directly by end users. Note: The positions of remote device icons on the background are not translated. Local devices are automatically generated. ConvertLayout accepts the following options: -v Verbose mode. Give detailed information on each layout file. -s Silent mode. Give no progress informati...
conv_alias reads $HOME/.zmailrc for MediaMail aliases and adds any new aliases to user's Netscape Address Book. If the alias already exists in the Address Book as a user or list, the alias will not be added and a message will be printed. conv_alias does not alter $HOME/.zmailrc. It updates $HOME/.netscape/address-book.html, or creates it if it doesn't exist. A backup copy of the Address Book(s) is taken before any modifications are done ($HOME/address-book.html.original or $HOME/address-book.h...
conv_nspref reads $HOME/.netscape/preferences or $HOME/.netscapepreferences and copies the most important preferences into the new $HOME/.netscape/preferences.js file. If $HOME/.netscape/preferences.js already exists then this command does nothing. conv_nspref is only required to work around a serious bug in Communicator 4.05 and should be fixed in the 4.1 release. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111...
The cord(1) command can be used to rearrange procedures in an executable object to correspond with an ordering provided in a reorder_file. Normally, the ordering is arranged to reduce virtual memory paging and/or instruction cache misses. The reorder file can be produced by the -feedback option to prof (see prof(1)). The -gprof -feedback options in prof can be used to produce a procedure ordering based on the function call counts. The default reorder file is prog.pixie.fb (if that does not exist...
cosmocreate is a WYSIWYG editor for creating HyperText Markup Language (HTML) documents for publishing on the World Wide Web (WWW). Through its WYSIWYG interface and its tight integration with the IRIX Interactive Desktop, cosmocreate greatly simplifies the task of creating compelling HTML documents. The cosmocreate program contains extensive online help and users guide. For this reason, this man page will not go into detail on the interactive aspects of the program. Please read the Cosmo Create...
covici retrieves a revision from an RCS file and opens it for editing using vi (1). The edited file is then stored as a new revision into the appropriate RCS file (see rcs (1)). A pathname matching an RCS suffix denotes an RCS file; other pathnames are assumed to denote working files not currently under RCS. If the pathname matches an RCS suffix covici runs co -l (see co (1)) and then loads the working file into vi. If the path does not match an RCS suffix the file is loaded directly into vi. Af...
file1 is copied (linked, moved) to target. Under no circumstance can file1 and target be the same (take care when using sh(1) metacharacters). If target is a directory, then one or more files are copied (linked, moved) to that directory. If target is an existing file, its contents are destroyed, except in the ln and ln -s case where the command will fail and ln will write a diagnostic message to standard error (use the -i or -f option to override this behavior). NOTE that this is a change from t...
The -i, -o, and -p options select the action to be performed. The following list describes each of the actions (which are mutually exclusive). cpio -i (copy in) extracts files from the standard input, which is assumed to be the product of a previous cpio -o. Only files with names that match patterns are selected. patterns are regular expressions given in the filename-generating notation of sh(1). In patterns, metacharacters ?, *, ...
cpp is a K&R C language preprocessor designed for standalone use and to be invoked as the first pass of all FORTRAN compilations and any K&R mode C compilation with the -mp option. Thus, cpp's output is designed to be in a form acceptable as input to the next pass of the C compiler. Standalone use of cpp on C code is not suggested, since the functionality of cpp has been incorporated into the C front-end. See m4(1) for a more general macro processor. This is a K&R C language preprocessor, not a...
IRIX Checkpoint and Restart (CPR) offers a set of user-transparent software management tools, allowing system administrators, operators, and users with suitable privileges to suspend a job or a set of jobs in midexecution, and restart them later on. The jobs may be running on a single machine or on an array of networking connected machines. CPR may be used to enhance system availability, provide load and resource control or balancing, and to facilitate simulation or modeling. The cview command p...
The cpuset command is used to create and destroy cpusets, to retrieve information about existing cpusets, and to attach a process and all of its children to a cpuset. A cpuset is a named set of CPUs, which may be defined to be restricted or open. A restricted cpuset only allows processes that are members of the cpuset to run on the set of CPUs. An open cpuset allows any process to run on its cpus, but a process that is a member of the cpuset can only run on the CPUs belonging t...
cron executes commands at specified dates and times. Regularly scheduled commands can be specified according to instructions found in crontab files in the directory /var/spool/cron/crontabs. Users can submit their own crontab file via the crontab(1) command. Commands that are to be executed only once can be submitted using the at(1) command. The following options are supported: -j jobs Specify the maximum number of jobs (MAXRUN) that cron can simultaneously run. The default value is 25. The maxi...
crontab copies the specified file, or standard input if no file is specified, into a directory that holds all users' crontabs. The -r option removes a user's crontab from the crontab directory. crontab -l will list the crontab file for the invoking user. The -e option spawns an editor which contains the user's current crontab (as output by crontab -l), and automatically updates the crontab when the user saves the file and exits the editor. The name of the editor to invoke can be specified by ...
crypt reads from the standard input and writes on the standard output. The password is a key that selects a particular transformation. If no argument is given, crypt demands a key from the terminal and turns off printing while the key is being typed in. If the -k option is used, crypt will use the key assigned to the environment variable CrYpTkEy. crypt encrypts and decrypts with the same key: crypt key cypher crypt key
csh, the C shell, is a command interpreter with a syntax reminiscent of the C language. It provides a number of convenient features for interactive use that are not available with the standard (Bourne) shell, including filename completion, command aliasing, history substitution, job control, and a number of built-in commands. As with the standard shell, the C shell provides variable, command and filename substitution....
csplit reads file and separates it into n+1 sections, defined by the arguments arg1...argn. By default the sections are placed in xx00...xxn (n may not be greater than 99). These sections get the following pieces of file: 00: From the start of file up to (but not including) the line referenced by arg1. 01: From the line referenced by arg1 up to the line referenced by arg2. . . . n: From the line referenced by argn to the end of file. If the file argum...
Ctags makes a tags file for ex(1) from the specified C, Pascal, Fortran, YACC, lex, and lisp sources. A tags file gives the locations of specified objects (in this case functions and typedefs) in a group of files. Each line of the tags file contains the object name, the file in which it is defined, and an address specification for the object definition. Functions are searched with a pattern, typedefs with a line number. Specifiers are given in separate fields on the line, separated by blanks or ...
The ctrace command allows you to follow the execution of a C program, statement-by-statement. The effect is similar to executing a shell procedure with the -x option. ctrace reads the C program in file (or from standard input if you do not specify file), inserts statements to print the text of each executable statement and the values of all variables referenced or modified, and writes the modified program to the standard output. You must put the output of ctrace into a temporary file because the...
cu calls up another UNIX system, a terminal, or possibly a non-UNIX system. It manages an interactive conversation with possible transfers of ASCII files. cu accepts the following options and arguments: -sspeed Specifies the transmission speed (300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600); The default value is "Any" speed which will depend on the order of the lines in the /etc/uucp/Devices file. -lline Specifies a device name to use as the communication line. This can be used to override the search that would...
Electronic Services CustomerLink (custlink) application provides a desktop interface to the information stored in the Silicon Graphics database. CustomerLink allows a registered user to view, maintain, and update information pertaining to themselves and their relationship with Silicon Graphics. Command Lines -config on|off Starts the application to allow reconfiguration of CustomerLink to setup the type of network configuration and the country where the application is runnin...
Use cut to cut out columns from a table or fields from each line of a file; in data base parlance, it implements the projection of a relation. The fields as specified by list can be fixed length, that is, character positions as on a punched card (-c option) or the length can vary from line to line and be marked with a field delimiter character like tab (-f option). cut can be used as a filter; if no files are given, the standard input is used. A file name of ``-...
Cvbuild provides a graphical display of build dependency information, as determined from a description file for make(1). COMMAND LINE OPTIONS Cvbuild accepts the following options: -directory Change the named directory as the working directory. -f Use the named makefile as the description file, instead of the default.
cvcat is used by the WorkShop Debugger and Performance tools to prepare command-line arguments for the target process when the complete command line is longer than can be handled by the canonical processing of the pty driver. It reads its standard input, concatenating lines and writing the result to the named file.
cvconfig is a shell script that allows the user to configure their environment so that WorkShop knows which configuration management system is in use. This is relevant when the user attempts to checkin, checkout, or uncheckout using the Versioning menu item in the File Menu of Source View (cvsource), or the Source menu of the debugger's main view. For example, to configure your environment to use rcs, run cvconfig with the argument rcs. Then, when you run WorkShop, rcs commands will be used for...
cvconnect is invoked by the WorkShop Debugger and Performance tools in order to establish a secure connection to the debug server, cvpcs. It is not normally run by users.
cvcord is a tool designed to allow a user to explore the working set behavior of an executable or shared library (DSO), and to construct a feedback file for use by cord to generate an executable with improved working-set behavior. The premise for this tool is as follows: when application and/or DSOs execute, they bring in pages from their instructions (text) as needed to execute the chain of functions triggered by any operation. By recording a WorkShop Performance Experiment, and capturing ideal...
cvcov invokes the command line version of the WorkShop Tester dynamic test coverage tool. cvxcov invokes the GUI version of the same tool. All functionality is available from either program. Some of the graphical representations of the data will be available only from cvxcov. For more information on using cvcov please refer to the "CASEVision/WorkShop Tester User's Guide." For installation of cvcov please refer to the "WorkShop Tester Release Notes."...
cvd invokes the WorkShop Debugger. The executable used with the debugger is produced by specifying an appropriate option (usually -g) to the compiler. When the executable parameter is specified, the WorkShop Debugger will be invoked with the specified executable as the target. Breakpoints and other traps may then be set on the executable before running the program. If a corefile is specified, or if the file core exists in the current directory, the WorkShop Debugger can be used to look at the st...
cvexprnt prints out the formatted contents of one or more WorkShop performance experiment directories or experiment data files. Each of the files consists of a string of beads, as described in ../include/bead.h If the name is that of a directory, the file named DESC in that directory, and any other files named within it will be dumped. If the name is that of a file, just the file will be dumped. Options are used to control the printing of the files. -d Print detailed information for each bead. -...
cvhang instantiates a process from the given command and arguments, and leaves it poised for execution just before it would execute its first user instruction. The WorkShop Debugger may then attach to it and take control of its execution.
cvinstr is a program which reads an executable program, and writes an equivalent program containing additional instrumentation code used for performance measurment of the executable. The additional code either maintains an array of counts representing the number of times various elements of the program are executed, or the number of statistical samples that found the PC at various values, or both. If the target program uses dynamic shared libraries, they are also instrumented. Normally, cvinstr ...
Cvmake is a program building tool designed to help programmers quickly compile their programs, find errors, edit the source files, and recompile. GETTING STARTED Cvmake is invoked automatically when the user selects the "Recompile" menu option in the File menu of the WorkShop Source Viewer. It can also be invoked directly from the command line. COMMAND LINE OPTIONS Cvmake accepts the following options: -f [makefile] Use the named makefile instead of the default. Cvmake passes this option along...
cvmeter is a WorkShop program that presents a graphical display of the process resource usage data for a running process, whose pid is given by the argument. It shows a number of stripcharts for various combinations of resources. It does not record data, and can not be scrolled back. It may also be launched using the Views menu on any of the WorkShop Debugger Views.
cvpav reads the analysis file(s) generated by MIPSpro 7.2 or higher, for the files in a fileset, and displays information about the loops in the files in a window. It allows the user to select any loop, request changes governing that loop, and then install those changes in the source. The analysis file is generated by MIPSpro 7.2 or higher, which is a prerequisite for WorkShop Pro MPF. The analysis file contains the information currently shown on MIPSpro 7.2 or higher, listing file (*.l), and so...
cvpcs is normally invoked by cvpcsd and, after performing the security checks described in cvconnect(1m) serves as a debug server for the various visible components of the WorkShop Debugger (cvd) and the WorkShop Performance Analyzer (cvperf).
cvperf presents a graphical display of the performance data gathered in a WorkShop Performance experiment whose experiment directory is given by . cvperf can also present the display of performance information from a pixie counts file given by . To use this feature, you will need to install a patch with a later version of pixie than is on the current released system. Contact Customer Support to obtain the patch....
cvspeed is the descriptive term for the WorkShop performance tools. It no longer exists as a program in the current release. To record a performance experiment, invoke the WorkShop Debugger, cvd, on the executable to be measured, and use the ``Perf'' menu entry to select the type of data to be recorded. To examine a previously recorded experiment, invoke the WorkShop Performance Analyzer, cvperf, with the experiment directory as its argument. You may also use the system program pixie to genera...
Cvstatic is a source code analysis tool designed to help programmers understand the structure of a program. Cvstatic allows the programmer to ask questions about a collection of files, such as "Who calls this function", or "Who references this variable". Cvstatic supports C, C++, and Fortran, and provides various ways to look at your program structure graphically, in addition to providing textual results of queries. GETTING STARTED To get started, type "cvstatic" in the directory containin...
cvusage is a WorkShop component that runs a process from the given command and arguments and prints out a summary of the resources used during the run. It is used in exactly the same way as time(1), but prints additional information. The usage information is printed to stderr in the form: 1.89 real, 0.04 user, 0.29 sys, 15 majf, 2 minf, 0 sw, 1 rb, 0 wb, 21 vcx, 38 icx The real, user and sys fields give the real-time, user-CPU time and system-CPU time, respectively. majf gives major page faults,...
cvxcov invokes the GUI version of the WorkShop Tester dynamic test coverage tool. cvcov invokes the command line version of the same tool. All functionality is available from either program. Some of the graphical representations of the data will be available only from cvxcov. For more information on using cvxcov please refer to the "CASEVision/WorkShop Tester User's Guide." For installation of cvxcov please refer to the "WorkShop Tester Release Notes."...
cvxhang is used by the WorkShop Debugger and Performance tools to instantiate the target process with its optional args and leave it waiting just before executing its first instruction. A debugger, or any other tool, may then attach to the process and take control of its execution. If the -signal argument is given, once the process is created, cvxhang informs the window of the WorkShop Debugger requesting the creation, as given by the optional hostname and window on the command line, of the targ...
The cxref command analyzes a collection of C, yacc, and lex files and attempts to build a cross-reference table. It produces a listing on standard output of all symbols (auto, static, and global) in each file separately, or, with the -c option, in combination. Each symbol contains an asterisk (*) before the declaring reference. If the environment variable _XPG is defined, cxref operates in conformance with the X/Open XPG4 specifications. The format of the output may differ in accordance to the X...
If no argument is given, or if the argument begins with +, the current date and time are printed. Otherwise, the current date is set if the user has appropriate privileges and the system permits the setting of the system date and time. Supplementary code set characters in +format (see below) are recognized and displayed according to the locale specified in the LC_CTYPE environment variable [see LANG on environ(5)]. Month and weekday nam...
DATman is a program for playing audio tapes and CDs. When called as datman it works as a tape recorder. When the -cd option is specified, DATman works as a CD player.
dbx is a source-level debugger that allows the user to trace the execution of a given object-file as well as a pool of arbitrary processes. dbx works with cc(1), f77(1), pc(1) as(1), CC(1), and MIPS machine code on 32- and 64-bit ELF object-files. The object-file used with the debugger is produced by specifying an appropriate option (usually -g) to the compiler (and linking the resulting object(s), creating an executable object-file). The resulting object-file contains debugging information, inc...
dbxhang starts a program running by doing a fork(2) and exec(2), leaving the program stopped before executing its first instruction. This is useful when a program to be debugged does unusual things with tty characteristics, or which is sensitive to the character and you don't want any in the dbx command window sent to the program to be debugged. Use dbxhang on the program to be debugged in one window and intercept the stopped program with dbx -p or dbx -P from a differen...
Dc is a reverse-polish desk calculator which supports unlimited precision arithmetic. It also allows you to define and call macros. Normally dc reads from the standard input; if any command arguments are given to it, they are filenames, and dc reads and executes the contents of the files before reading from standard input. All normal output is to standard output; all error output is to standard error. A reverse-polish calculator stores numbers on a stack. Entering a number pushes it on the stack...
dd copies the specified input file to the specified output with possible conversions. The standard input and output are used by default. The input and output block sizes can be specified to take advantage of raw physical I/O. dd processes supplementary code-set characters according to the locale specified in the LC_CTYPE environment variable (see LANG in environ(5)), except as noted below. Option Values if=file Input filename; standard input is default. ...
ddopt, the MIPS data-dependency-based optimizer, reads the input binary ucode file on a procedure by procedure basis, performs loop-based transformations on each outer-most loop nest in each procedure and outputs the optimized binary ucode file. By convention, it takes a binary ucode file with the extensions .B or .M as input and output a binary ucode file with the extension .D. In the compilation process, ddopt runs after the front-end, after uld and usplit, and before umerge, uopt and ugen. Cu...
deleteSerialDevice is a privileged command that removes configuration information about a serial port. deleteSerialDevice can be used to unconfigure terminals, input devices, and midi. Use deleteModem(1M) to unconfigure modems. When midi is unconfigured, the stopmidi command is run.
deleteUserAccount deletes a user account from the system and handles the deleted account's files. The deleteUserAccount command has the following required parameter: -l login-name The login name of the user account to delete The deleteUserAccount command has the following optional parameters: -A Indicates that all of the user's files local to the system should be deleted. None of -D, -H, or -E may be specified with the -A option. -D Indicates that the user's home directory should be deleted. ...
delta is used to permanently introduce into the named SCCS file changes that were made to the file retrieved by get(1) (called the g-file, or generated file). delta makes a delta to each named SCCS file. If a directory is named, delta behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component of the path name does not begin with s.) and unreadable files are silently ignored. If a name of - is given, the standard input is read (see WARN...
The deroff command reads each file in sequence and removes all nroff and troff command lines, backslash constructions, macro definitions, eqn constructs (between .EQ and .EN lines or between delimiters), and table descriptions and writes the remainder on the standard output. deroff follows chains of included files (.so and .nx commands); if a file has already been included, a .s
This reference page describes the Desktop customization panel, which is part of the IRIX Interactive Desktop software. For information about the entire IRIX Interactive Desktop environment and about the XUSERFILESEARCHPATH environment variable, see the IID(1) man page. The desktop customization panel allows the user to set certain resources applicable to the file manager (fm) and the IRIX Interactive Desktop environment. The desktop panel can be run from a Unix shell command line or from the too...
desktophelp is a program that is launched from the IRIX Interactive Desktop(TM) Toolchest, under the "Help" menu. Depending upon which version of IRIX you are running, the specific submenu item that launches desktophelp is either "Desktop Help" (IRIX 6.2), "How Do I..." (IRIX 6.3 or 6.4), or "Quick Answers" (IRIX 6.5). desktophelp has the simple task of posting a request to the sgihelp(1) process. If this process is not already running, it will start-up automatically. At the point sgihel...
devnm identifies the special file associated with the mounted filesystem where the argument name resides. This command is most commonly used by /etc/brc (see brc(1M)) to construct a mount table entry for the root device.
df reports the number of total, used, and available disk blocks (one disk block equals 512 bytes) in filesystems. The filesystem argument is a device special file containing a disk filesystem, a mounted NFS filesystem of the form hostname:pathname, or any file, directory, or special node in a mounted filesystem. If no filesystem arguments are specified, df reports on all mounted filesystems. The options to df are: -b Causes df to report usage in 512-byte units, which is the default. -e Causes on...
dgld is the server for programs performing remote graphics with the Graphics Libary or for programs linked with the Distributed Graphics Library. The server provides both a subprocess graphics facility and a networked graphics facility. dgld is started either by inetd(1M) or by dnserver. TCP socket connections are serviced by inetd. inetd listens for connections on the port indicated in the ``sgi-dgl'' service specification; see services(4). When a connection is found, dgld is started as speci...
dhcpdb is a database manager for the NDBM database used by the DHCP server to store address leases. It provides a command line interface to add, delete, update, or print the DHCP database. The tool can be used either in entry mode to manipulate individual entries or in file mode. In file mode the entire contents of the database can be dumped to a file or loaded from a file. COMMAND LINE OPTIONS In the entry mode options can be used to add (replace), delete, update a lease, or print an entry usin...
dhcp_bootp is the server that communicates with other DHCP and proclaim(1M) clients to provide configuration parameters, including at least an IP address. The format of DHCP messages is based on bootp messages (see RFC 951). A detailed protocol specification for DHCP is contained in RFC 1541, available from the Network Information Center. The DHCP protocol uses UDP/IP as its transport mechanism. The DHCP server receives service requests at the UDP port indicated in the bootp service description ...
dhcp_relay is the relay-agent that communicates with other DHCP and proclaim clients and servers to provide address-leases across networks using DHCP messages. The format of DHCP messages is based on BOOTP messages (see RFC 951). A detailed protocol specification for DHCP is contained in RFC 1541, available from the Network Information Center. The DHCP relay-agent receives service requests at the UDP port indicated in the bootp service description contained in the file /etc/services (see service...
diagsetup controls the running of cached and onlinediag by the diag user. This command can be used to either turn off the running of these diagnostic tests or to make them run more frequently or less frequently then they do by default. The -x cached | onlinediag parameter indicates which diagnostic testing program we are modifying the behavior of. We can modify the frequency of running one of these programs. The -x parameter must be present for this program to run. The -h par...
If both arguments are directories, diff sorts the contents of the directories by name, and then runs the regular file diff algorithm (described below) on text files which are different. Binary files which differ (unless -a is specified), common subdirectories, and files which appear in only one directory are listed. Options when comparing directories are: -l long output format; each text file diff is piped through pr(1) to paginate it, other differences are remembered and summarized after all te...
Diff3 compares three versions of a file, and publishes disagreeing ranges of text flagged with these codes: ==== all three files differ ====1 file1 is different ====2 file2 is different ====3 file3 is different The type of change suffered in converting a given range of a given file to some other is indicated in one of these ways: f : n1 a Text is to be appended after line number n1 in file f, where f = 1, 2, or 3. f : n1 , n2 c Text is to be changed in the range line n1 to line n2. If n1 = n2, t...
dircmp examines dir1 and dir2 and generates various tabulated information about the contents of the directories. Listings of files that are unique to each directory are generated for all the options. If no option is entered, a list is output indicating whether the file names common to both directories have the same contents. dircmp processes supplementary code set characters in directory and file names according to the locale specified in the LC_CT...
dirview presents the contents of a directory or URL using the IRIX Interactive Desktop file manager fm. If an fm is already open to that location, its window will be raised. Otherwise, a new fm will be started which will open the directory or URL specified as the pathname argument, and present icons of the items contained in that directory or URL. The icons can be moved, copied, opened, and manipulated in other ways. dirview is a link to fm. See fm(1) for more information, including a descriptio...
dis disassembles object files into machine instructions. The options are as follows: -b beginaddress disassemble starting at the given address. The address can be in decimal, octal (with a leading 0), or hexadecimal (with a leading 0x). -d section disassemble the named section as data, printing the offset from the beginning of the section. -C demangle C++ names. -D section disassemble the named section as data, printing the actual address of the data. -e endaddress disassembly stops at the given...
The disableXhost utility is used to prevent remote hosts from placing windows on or otherwise getting access to the local display during a user's login session. All remote hosts will have display access disabled, whether access originally was granted implicitly (ex., using xhost +) or explicitly (ex., using xhost + hostname). Remote toolchests will no longer be able to post windows on the local display; however, remote iconviews (dirviews) will be able to continue displaying and spawning child ...
This utility is designed to assist in creating striped XLV disk volumes for data streaming applications. There are many factors that must be taken into account when creating a striped XLV volume such as stripe alignment, restrictions imposed by a filesystem on the volume and by the operating system I/O functions such as readv(). This tool, in conjunction with diskprep and diskperf will help extract maximum performance from a striped XLV disk configuration for data streaming applications. The out...
Managers display information about your system and provide access to interactive guides (also called tasks) that let you administer your system. For example, the User Manager displays a list of the user accounts currently on the system and gives you access to guides like "Add a User Account" and "Modify a User Account." In a Manager window, you can open a guide by choosing its name from the Task menu or by clicking its button at the bottom of the window. The Disk Manager monitors the fixed d...
diskpatch is normally run from cron(1M) twice a week and whenever the system is shutdown. It uses the hardware inventory mechanism to find all the disk drives on the system attached to the supported SCSI controllers, (excluding the jag(7M) controller) and determines the type of disk drive by sending the SCSI inquiry command, using the ds(7M) driver. If the drive is found to be one of the susceptible drives, a special command is issued to the drive that causes it to spin down (stop) for a brief p...
The purpose of this utility is to measure the performance of a disk configuration as either a raw volume or with a filesystem such as XFS. A number of different test patterns are run including forward and backward sequential as well as random seek read/write patterns. The output is tabulated in a form usable for processing by other utilities such as gnuplot for further analysis.
diskusg generates intermediate disk accounting information from data in files or the standard input if omitted. diskusg outputs lines on the standard output (one per user) in the following format: uid login #blocks where uid is the numeric user ID of the user login is the login name of the user #blocks is the total number of disk blocks allocated to this user diskusg is normally used to read the inodes of efs or xfs...
distcp copies or compares software distributions. Software distributions are software releases for one or more software products prepared by Silicon Graphics and installed by inst(1M) or swmgr(1M). distcp is typically used to copy a software release tape or to copy software from a tape to a server workstation, which becomes the software distribution source for many workstations on a network. NOTE: Installing (loading) the miniroot from tape is no longer possible as of IRIX 6.2. It is still possi...
dkstat reports physical disk I/O statistics. The default report shows the average physical I/O rate (requests per second, or IOPS) to each disk during the sample interval (default 5 seconds). The options to dkstat are as follows; -? Output usage information. -h host Report for the host host, which must be running pmcd(1). The default is to report for the local host. -L Report for the local host and by-pass pmcd(1). This option is mutually exclusive with the -h option and is the default if pmcd(1...
The given command is executed and after each child process exits dlook shows where each process was running when it exited and how its stack and heap data was placed with page size information. If sampling is enabled, this data is also displayed at regular intervals.
dmconvert converts between different digital media files. Input files are combined, converted, and written to an output file of a selected format. dmconvert may also be used to describe input files without converting to an output file. Supported files include the following audio, image, and movie formats. The output file format is specified with the -f option, and may be any of the formats except those marked describe-only or read-only. Format Description Audio aifc Audio Interchange File Format...
dminfo displays information about the contents of each of the files. Supported digital media files are those readable by dmconvert(1), and include many audio, image, and movie formats.
dmplay plays back a movie file which contains a JPEG-compressed video track. By default, dmplay shows the video output in a window on your monitor as well as to video output devices connected to mvp (built-in on O2 systems), impact (Impact or Octane Video, as well as the Impact or Octane Compression options), ev1 (Indy Video, Indigo2 Video, and Galileo Video, for other systems). A hardware decompressor (ice for O2 systems, impact for Impact and Octane Compression, cosmo for others) is used to de...
dmrecord records a movie file which contains a JPEG-compressed video track and, optionally, an audio track. dmrecord supports realtime video recording to disk through Impact Compression, Octane Compression, ev1 video and Cosmo Compress. (Indy Video, Indigo2 Video, and Galileo Video are ev1 = 'Express Video' devices.) On O2 systems, dmrecord uses the built-in MVP ports and ICE compressor. The recorded movie file contains JPEG-compressed image data. Audio is recorded as stereo or mono 16-bit dat...
Without an argument, domainname displays the name of the current network information service (NIS) domain, which typically encompasses a group of hosts under the same administration. As such, the name of an NIS domain is typically a valid Internet domain name in order to be consistent with the domain name used by the BIND name server, named(1M). Only the super-user can set the domain name by giving an argument; this is performed by the system startup procedure using the contents of /var/yp/ypdom...
The given program is executed after placement policies are set up according to command line arguments and the specifications described in placement_file.
The given command is executed and memory accesses are sampled; after completion, dprof prepares a histogram of memory accesses. Histograms are computed for each thread of multi-threaded applications that utilize sproc(2).
drop is a fun game that tests your ability to drop 3d puzzle pieces onto a grid. The goal of the game is to drop the puzzle pieces onto the green court and form a solid grid of cubes. Each time that you fill an entire grid, that grid unit will glow brightly and drop down and off the court. You get extra points for each complete grid unit that you fill. If you get enough points during a game, then you move to the next (more difficult) level. The game will get progressively harder as you ascend th...
dtl2sgft is a utility program used to assist in maintaining a full-text searchable index of online books available to the infosearch(1) application. For a specified insight(1) online book, dtl2sgft builds a full-text indexable word file which is an extraction of the content of the book. This word file is used in conjunction with the booksAdmin(1) utility to aid in constructing and maintaining a full-text index. Along with the word file, a HTML-based version of the book's table of contents is al...
This program may be used to maintain some databases used by the AppleShare server, a la ``Rebuild Desktop'' on the Mac. FullPress and WebNative users may also use it to (re)create FPO/WEB images. It performs one or more operations on one or more files, directories and/or AppleShare volumes. Running dtrebuild with no arguments will produce an up-todate list of available OPerations. In the absence of the -a option, most of the OPerations may be run on a selected subset of AppleShare volumes or d...
dtshutdown shuts down (restarts) the system after shutting down the desktop. This command is used by the Shut Down System and Restart System tasks on the toolchest(1X) System menu.
The dtSounds customization panel lets the user toggle which sounds the SGI system produces. The panel presents a set of six toggle buttons: Mute System Startup & Shutdown Tunes Desktop Sounds System Alerts Sounds Keyboard Bell Key Click Play Desktop Sounds Through (different output choices)
The dtUtilities customization panel lets the user choose favorite utility programs for use in the IRIX Interactive Desktop. For example, the program chosen as the user's Text Editor will be used any time the user double-clicks a text icon; the contents of the text file will appear in that editor. Similarly, the program chosen as the user's Web Browser will be used any time the user double-clicks a webjumper (or jumpsite) icon. These preferences are saved on a per-user basis and remembered acro...
The du command reports the number of blocks contained in all files and (recursively) directories within each directory and file specified by the name arguments. If no name arguments are given, the current directory is used. By default, the block counts reported are in terms of 512-byte blocks, but this can be modified to 1024-byte blocks by specifying the -k option (see below). The block count includes only the actual data blocks used by each file and directory, not indirect blocks o...
dump and rdump are applicable only to EFS filesystems, use xfsdump(1m) for XFS filesystems. dump backs up all files in filesystem or files changed after a certain date to magnetic tape or files. The key specifies the date and other options about the dump. key consists of characters from the set 0123456789fusCcdbWwn. Any arguments supplied for specific options are given as subsequent words on the command line, in the same order as that of the options listed. If no key is given, the key is assumed...
dumpcounts prints out the formatted contents of a .Counts file, as generated by running a pixified executable. dumpcounts recognizes the following options: -header Print the header in the file. -bbcount Print the count data bins -gprof Print the callgraph data.
dvhtool is used to copy files to and from the volume header of disks. Formerly it had other functions also, but these have long been deprecated and have been removed. The disk volume header consists of two main parts: the partition table, and the volume directory. The volume directory is used to locate files kept in the volume header area of the disk for standalone use. The partition table describes the logical device partitions. You must be superuser to use dvhtool. Invoked with no arguments (o...
The dwarfdump command prints DWARF sections as requested by specific options. With no options nothing prints! The format is intended to be human readable. If a script is to parse the output, the -d option is useful. The format may change from release to release, so it is unwise to depend too heavily on the format. The dwarfdump command accepts one or more of the following options: -a Dumps all sections. Same as -bcfilmoprsy -tfv. -b Dumps the .debug_abbrev section. -c Dumps the .debug_loc sectio...
DxfToIv converts 3D model files in Autodesk DXF R12 format into Open Inventor 2.0 files. The program converts ASCII or binary .DXF format. Polygons, polylines, and certain versions of text are converted into equivalent Open Inventor objects. The DXF file divides the objects into layers and/or blocks. These layers and blocks are converted into Open Inventor separators so all DXF entities in a given layer are placed under one Open Inventor separator node. DXF text entities that refer to an AutoCAD...
dynaweb is a HTTP (web) server extension designed specifically for delivering searchable online books via any web client. For users who prefer to view and search online manuals via a web client, Dynaweb dynamically converts full-text indexed SGML files, the same source files used for display in IRIS InSight, to HTML. dynaweb runs as a CGI (Common Gateway Interface) program, and should not be executed standalone....
ecadmin may be used on systems with MIPS R1x000 processors to configure the global event counters maintained by IRIX using the underlying hardware event counter mechanisms. The global event counters are maintained on a system-wide basis, aggregated over all processes and for all user and system mode execution. The event arguments identify hardware-specific event counters. These may be either integers or mnemonic, case-insensitive names. In conjunction with the -e option, a single event specifica...
ecfind may be used on systems with R1x000 processors to discover which processes, if any, are currently using the process-based hardware event counter mechanisms, e.g. executing an application under the control of perfex(1). This is most useful in situations where the global event counters cannot be enabled with ecadmin(1) due to concurrent use of the process-based event counters. ecfind uses icrash(1) on the running kernel, and hence must be run as root. The options to ecfind are as follows; -t...
echo writes its arguments separated by blanks and terminated by a newline (except when "-n" is specified, see below) on the standard output. It also understands C-like escape conventions; beware of conflicts with the shell's use of \: \b backspace \c print line without new-line \f form-feed \n new-line \r carriage return \t tab \v vertical tab \\ backslash \0n where n is the 8-bit character whose ASCII code is the 1-, 2- or 3-digit octal number representing that character. echo has...
ecstats may be used on systems with R1x000 processors to interrogate the global event counters maintained by IRIX using the underlying hardware event counter mechanisms. The global event counters are maintained on a system-wide basis, aggregated over all processes and for all user and system mode execution. Global event counters are enabled and disabled using the ecadmin(1) command. The options to ecstats are as follows; -a Report absolute values for the event counters (the complement of -r). -C...
ed is the standard text editor. red is a restricted version of ed. If the file argument is given, ed simulates an e command (see below) on the named file; that is to say, the file is read into ed's buffer so that it can be edited. Both ed and red process supplementary code set characters in file, and recognize supplementary code set characters in the prompt string given to the -p option (see below) according to the locale specified in the...
edit is a variant of the text editor ex recommended for new or casual users who wish to use a command-oriented editor. It operates precisely as ex(1) with the following options automatically set: novice ON report ON showmode ON magic OFF These options can be turned on or off via the set command in ex(1). -r Recover file after an editor or system crash. -x Encryption option; when used the file is encrypted as it is being written and requires an encryption key to be read. edit makes an educated gu...
Editres is a tool that allows users and application developers to view the full widget hierarchy of any X Toolkit application that speaks the Editres protocol. In addition, editres will help the user construct resource specifications, allow the user to apply the resource to the application and view the results dynamically. Once the user is happy with a resource specification editres will append the resource string to the user's X Resources file....
edquota is a quota editor. When used with the -j option all operations are performed on project quotas and command line names are project names. Without the -j option all operations are performed on user quotas and command line names are user names. One or more users or project names may be specified on the command line. When used without the -f and -l options, a temporary file is created with an ASCII representation of the current disk quotas for each user or project and an editor is then invok...
egcmd is a diagnostic tool used for debugging gigabit Ethernet (''egN'') interfaces. egcmd has a variety of options which depend upon implementation details of the gigabit Ethernet software. It is expected that egcmd will be run as directed by Silicon Graphics service personnel. See the usage message of egcmd for a complete list of debugging options.
egconfig is executed at system startup time to download the firmware for each gigabit Ethernet (''egN'') interface configured into the system. After egconfig executes, it is still necessary to use ifconfig(1M) to configure protocol addresses and other parameters. egconfig is run automatically at system startup. It should not normally be necessary to execute it, unless resetting the interface is required....
egrep (expression grep) searches files for a pattern of characters and prints all lines that contain that pattern. egrep uses full regular expressions (expressions that have string values that use the full set of alphanumeric and special characters) to match the patterns. It uses a fast deterministic algorithm that sometimes needs exponential space. egrep accepts full regular expressions as in ed(1), except for \( and \), and except for \< and \>, with the addition of: 1. A full regular expr...
eject ejects a removable mediad device. If the device has mounted filesystems, eject will first try to unmount them. Without any options, eject will act upon the first device it finds in the hardware inventory table.
The elfdump command dumps selected parts of a given ELF object file or an archive file. This command works for 32-bit or 64-bit ELF object files or ELF archives only. In the case of an archive, options other than -g generate output output from each object in the archive. elfdump accepts one or more of these options: -a Dumps the archive header of each member of an archive. -brief Dump most sections in the file. Like -h, but leaves out sections whose names begin with .debug_, .rel, or .MIPS. -c D...
enable activates the named printers, enabling them to print requests taken by lp(1). Use lpstat(1) to find the status of printers. Disable deactivates the named printers, disabling them from printing requests taken by lp(1). By default, any requests that are currently printing on the designated printers will be reprinted in their entirety either on the same printer or on another member of the same class. Use lpstat(1) to find the status of printers. Options useful with disable are: -c Cancel any...
endsession terminates a login session initiated by xdm by removing the session property placed on the root window by reaper. Removal of this property is a signal to xdm that the session should be closed. This results in immediate termination of the current login session. endsession uses the environment variable DISPLAY to determine what session to terminate. Command line options are available to change the display variable and to suppress the confirmation window. The command line options are: -d...
Env obtains the current environment, modifies it according to its arguments, then executes the command with the modified environment. Arguments of the form name=value are merged into the inherited environment before the command is executed. If no command is specified, the resulting environment is printed, one name-value pair per line. Printenv prints out the names and values of the variables in the environment, with one name/value pair per line. If name is specified, only its value is printed. I...
Epd is the host implementation for the AppleTalk Echo Protocol. It listens for Echo Protocol packets and returns replies as specified by the protocol definition. -D causes epd to remain in the foreground and print information about packets received. -x will cause this information to be printed in hexadecimal. If hostname is specified, it is used to register epd with the Name Binding Protocol; otherwise, the gethostname(2) is used to determine a name to register....
epfirm is intended to install new firmware in an E-Plex 8-port Ethernet board. The firmware is contained within the epfirm program itself. This program is normally run by the network initialization script as the system is being started (see network(1M)). Note that the epfirm program and driver for the E-Plex board in /var/sysgen/boot/if_ep.o must match each other. When no interface name such as ep0 is present, the program checks and update if necessary the firmware in all E-Plex boards installed...
esparchive is a utility that is used for archiving the database in the Embedded Support Partner. This is generally used to conserve space on the disk. The archiving utility has to be launched from the command line. The archiving process temporarily shuts down the Embedded Support Partner to conserve data integrity during the archival process. Once archived, the database is compressed and used only for generating reports. A new database is created with no records in ...
The espconfig -help prints the list of command specifications. The optional parameter is used to list commands that matches some substring in the specification text. For example, 'espconfig -help add' will list all commands containing character sequence 'add' in the specification. The espconfig -spec command prints all commands specification in the way the command line is parsed to match the specification. The espconfig -version command gives the version of espconfig ...
esplogger is a facility for the scripted tools/tasks to log the data to the SGI Embedded Support Partner. esplogger serves as a communication pipe between different tasks and EventMon. esplogger cannot be called without an options(s). One or more of the following options must be specified: -s sequence number option that allows to specify sequence number (in decimal or hexadecimal notation). This option works only in conjunction with -t and -f, or -m options. -f filename option that allows to spe...
espnotify is a generic command line utility that is packaged with SGI Embedded Support Partner (see esp(5) for more details). It is used to perform various types of notifications. espnotify can post a given message to e-mail addresses, can display a message on local/remote X display, can post a message to a paging service to be delivered to a pager or can display the message on the system console. espnotify supports various command line options for various types of notifications. These options a...
espquery is a command that is designed to perform limited set of operations on the database in the Embedded Support Partner The command is provided mostly for use by tools that are script in nature, yet need an interface to the SSDB. The tools would have to have intimate knowledge of the schema in the SSDB and the rights to access the database. The operations on the on the SSDB are limited to:
The espreport -help prints the list of command specifications. The optional specifies to list only commands where matches some substring in the specification text. For example, 'espreport -help event' will list all commands containing character sequence 'event' in the specification. The espreport -spec command prints all commands specification in the same way as the command line is parsed to match the specification. The espreport -version command gives the version of ...
eventmond runs at system startup, collects system events from syslogd, esplogger or any other application that interacts with EventmonAPI (see EventmonAPI(3X) for more details), and passes such system events directly to the SGI Embedded Support Partner (a.k.a ESP; see esp(5) for more details) framework. In case SGI ESP Support Data Base server is not running or SGI ESP Event Manager is not running, eventmond will buffer events. Whenever rate of the incoming events is higher than ability of the s...
This page describes tools for adding and viewing real-time events in a Performer program. In describes the following programs: evpp - An Event Pre-Processor. This program takes a description of user events and generates a C program adding the new events into an application programs. evanalyzer - A viewing program for captured events. evhist - A display program for generating histograms of event durations. Usually activated from within evanalyzer. evgraph - A display program for plotting function...
ex is the root of a family of editors: ex and vi. ex is a superset of ed, with the most notable extension being a display editing facility. Display based editing is the focus of vi. If you use a window or a CRT terminal, you may wish to use the vi(1) editor, which focuses on the display-editing portion of ex.
The expand utility writes files or the standard input to the standard output with tab characters replaced with one or more space characters needed to pad to the next tab stop. Any backspace characters will be copied to the output and cause the column position count for tab stop calculations to be decremented; the column position count will not be decremented below zero.
Expect is a program that "talks" to other interactive programs according to a script. Following the script, Expect knows what can be expected from a program and what the correct response should be. An interpreted language provides branching and high-level control structures to direct the dialogue. In addition, the user can take control and interact directly when desired, afterward returning control to the script. Expectk is a mixture of Expect and Tk. It behaves just like Expect and Tk's wish...
Expectk is a combination of Expect with Tk. (See their respective man pages for a more comprehensive explanation of either.) Expectk should run any wish or expect script (with minor changes - see below). The differences between the Expectk and Expect environment follows. The send command is Tk's. Expect's send command can be invoked by the name exp_send. (For compatibility, Expect allows either send or exp_send to be used.) Scripts may be invoked implicitly on systems which support the #! nota...
exportfs makes a local directory (or file) available for mounting over the network by NFS clients. It is normally invoked at boot time by the /etc/init.d/network script, and uses information contained in the /etc/exports file to export a directory (which must be specified as a full pathname). The superuser can run exportfs at any time to alter the list or characteristics of exported directories. Directories that are currently exported are listed in the file /etc/xtab. With no options or argument...
The arguments are taken as an expression. After evaluation, the result is written on the standard output. Terms of the expression must be separated by blanks. Characters special to the shell must be escaped. Note that 0 is returned to indicate a zero value, rather than the null string. Strings containing blanks or other special characters should be quoted. Integer-valued arguments may be preceded by a unary minus sign. Internally, integers are treated as 32-bit, 2s complement numbers. The len...
The exstr utility is used to extract strings from C language source files and replace them by calls to the message retrieval function [see gettxt(3C)]. This utility will extract all character strings surrounded by double quotes, not just strings used as arguments to the printf command or the printf routine. In the first form, exstr finds all strings in the source files and writes them on the standard output. Each...
Extcentry is used to extract C functions for which FORTRAN-callable interface routines (wrappers) are to be generated by the program mkf2c(1). Extcentry accepts as input any C file (infile), and outputs (to outfile) only those portions which are surrounded by the special comments /* CENTRY */ and /* ENDCENTRY */. The first step in generating a FORTRAN-to-C interface routine is to surround only those C functions for which entry points are to be generated by these special comments and to run the f...
EZsetup, also referred to as System Setup, provides basic system administration and user account configuration. EZsetup eases first-time set up of a new IRIX system or of a new user account. In IRIX 6.5.14, EZsetup's appearance (layout and colors) was modernized. Logging in as EZsetup launches a web-based application running in a customized version of the webviewer browser from which users can do the following: 1. Set up some basic system security 2. Set up basic networking 3. Add a user to the...
When you use factor without an argument, it waits for you to give it an integer. After you give it a positive integer less than or equal to 10 to the 14th (1.0e14), it factors the integer, prints its prime factors the proper number of times, and then waits for another integer. factor exits if it encounters a zero or any non-numeric character. If you invoke factor with an argument, it factors the integer as described above, and then it exits. The maximum time to factor an integer is proportional ...
fam is a server that tracks changes to the filesystem and relays these changes to interested applications. Applications such as fm(1G) and mailbox(1) present an up-to-date view of the filesystem. In the absence of fam, these applications and others like them are forced to poll the filesystem to detect changes. fam is more efficient. Applications can request fam to monitor any files or directories in any filesystem. When fam detects changes to monitored files, it notifies the appropriate applicat...
fbdump prints out the formatted contents of compiler feedback files generated by prof(1). fbdump recognizes the following options: -verbose This option prints all the information in verbose mode. If this option is specified, table with all zero entries will be printed also. -header Print Feedback file header as described in "cmplrs/fb.h". -sections Print Feedback file section headers table as described in "cmplrs/fb.h". -proc Print Feedback procedure table as described in "cmplrs/fb.h". If...
The fc utility lists or edits and reexecutes, commands previously entered to an interactive sh. The command history list references commands by number. The first number in the list is selected arbitrarily. The relationship of a number to its command will not change except when the user logs in and no other process is accessing the list, at which time the system may reset the numbering to start the oldest retained command at another number (usually 1). When the number reaches an implementation-de...
fcagent and fccli have been deprecated in favor of a new fibre channel drive manager sesdaemon and sesmgr. Accordingly, fcagent is now chkconfig off by default. fcagent is a daemon which allows communication with attached FibreVault enclosures; status is collected and re-configuration is allowed. The low-level transport protocol is the industry standard SES (SCSI-3 Enclosure Services). The top-level transport is via RPC to allow for remote system monitoring and control. See fccli(1M) for details...
fcagent and fccli have been deprecated in favor of a new fibre channel drive manager sesdaemon and sesmgr. Accordingly, fcagent is now chkconfig off by default. The fccli command is a user front end to fcagent which collects status of all FibreVault enclosures and allows for configuration changes.
The fdetach command detaches a STREAMS-based file descriptor from a name in the filesystem. path is the pathname of the object in the filesystem name space, which was previously attached (see fattach(3C)). The user must be the owner of the file or a user with the appropriate privileges. All subsequent operations on path operate on the filesystem node and not on the STREAMS file. The permissions and status of the node are restored to the state the node wa...
If job control is enabled (see the description of set -m), the fg utility will move a background job from the current environment into the foreground. Using fg to place a job into the foreground will remove its process ID from the list of those "known in the current shell execution environment.
fgrep (fast grep) searches files for a character string and prints all lines that contain that string. fgrep is different from grep(1) and egrep(1) because it searches for a string, instead of searching for a pattern that matches an expression. It uses a fast and compact algorithm. The characters $, *, [, ^, |, (, ), and \ are interpreted literally by fgrep, that is, fgrep does not recognize full regular expressions as does egrep. Since these characters have special meaning to the shell, it is ...
file performs a series of tests on each file supplied by arg and, optionally, on each file supplied in ffile in an attempt to classify it. If arg appears to be a text file, file examines the first 512 bytes and tries to guess its programming language. If arg is an executable a.out, file prints the version stamp, provided it is greater than 0. For COFF executables, the version stamp will give the version of compilers used to generate the executab...
Managers display information about your system and provide access to interactive guides (also called tasks) that let you administer your system. In a Manager window, you can open a guide by choosing its name from the Task menu or by clicking its button at the bottom of the window. The Filesystem Manager uses several methods to monitor the filesystems in use by the system. It uses fam to detect changes in /etc/mtab, which lists mounted filesystems. It also uses fam to monitor the execution of oth...
filetype is a utility used to determine the IRIX Interactive Desktop (IID(1G)) file type of a file or set of files. filetype uses the IRIX Interactive Desktop file typing database to look up file typing rules and apply them to the files listed, then prints the file type for each file whose type was requested. The conversion rules are located in compiled .otr files in /usr/lib/filetype. The older ftr(1) database format, .ctr files are not supported anymore. The source .ftr files can be found in t...
find recursively descends the directory hierarchy for each pathname in the path-name-list (that is, one or more pathnames) seeking files that match a boolean expression written in the primaries given below. If the expression does not contain at least one of -print, -ok, or -exec, including the case of a null expression, a -print is implicit. In the descriptions, the argument n is used as a decimal integer where +n means more than n, -n means less than n, and n means exactly n. Valid expressions ...
findblk finds the filesystem claimants for the block specified as blkno; special is the device name on which a filesystem has been defined. Read permission is required on the specified special device.
This perl script is part of the Samba suite. findsmb is a perl script that prints out several pieces of information about machines on a subnet that respond to SMB name query requests. It uses nmblookup(1) to obtain this information.
findvis describes OpenGL-capable X11 Visuals that meet user-specified selection criteria. The options are as follows: -1 List only the first matching Visual, rather than all matching Visuals. -id List only the Visual ID of matching Visuals, rather than a one-line description of the Visual. This is particularly useful in shell scripts, for passing a Visual ID to a program without Visual-selection ability. -display X11-display-name Use the specified X11 display, rather than the default display giv...
Finger is used to find out about people. It searches for the local /etc/passwd file and the NIS for matching account names and first or last names. Finger displays, if known, the name of the person associated with each account, mail alias, and home and office telephone numbers. If there is an account on the local machine, the home directory and login shell, and any plan which the person has placed in the file .plan in their home directory, and the project on which they are working from the file ...
fingerd is a simple protocol based on RFC742 that provides an interface to the finger program at several network sites. The program is supposed to return a friendly, human-oriented status report on a particular person. There is no required format, and the protocol consists mostly of specifying a single ``command line.'' fingerd listens for TCP requests at port 79. Once connected, it reads a single line terminated by a and passes the first three words on the line as arguments to finger(1...
Mail folders and folder directories should be created via the Message Center in Netscape Communicator. If they are created manually outside of Netscape, Netscape may not be able to see those folders if they do not follow Netscape's naming convention. fix_nsmailfdir scans $HOME/nsmail directory to ensure that all folders and folder directories conform to Netscape's naming convention. $HOME/nsmail will be corrected so that every folder directory will end with the .sbd suffix and have a file with...
flash allows a user to manage the flash PROMs on the IO and CPU boards of Origin systems, the base system board on OCTANE systems and CPU boards on the SGI Origin 3000 server series. Without options, the command flashes all appropriate boards on the machine with the PROM images found in /usr/cpu/firmware. Normally, flash is executed automatically during the installation of a new release of IRIX. A customer should rarely need to use it directly. You must have superuser privilege to use this comma...
flashio allows a user to manage the flash PROMs on the IO4 board of Everest-based high-end systems (the Challenge L/XL, PowerChallenge L/XL, Onyx L/XL, and PowerOnyx L/XL are all based on the Everest architecture). Normally, flashio is executed automatically during the installation of a new release of IRIX; as a result, a customer should rarely need to use it directly. flashio can perform two major tasks: it can alter the contents of the flash PROMs by transferring the contents of a file into th...
flashmmsc allows a user to manage the firmware installed on the multimodule system controller ("MMSC") of Origin2000 rack systems. Ordinarily, an MMSC is shipped with firmware pre-installed. The flashmmsc command is only needed by a customer for upgrades or emergency repairs of the MMSC firmware. There are several ways to use the flashmmsc command. In the first form, the flashmmsc command is assumed to be issued from a terminal that has access to one of the MMSC's associated with the system. ...
The flashpbay utility updates FLASH memory in the power bay. The power bay flash memory contains the code for communicating status information to the L1 controller; it does not control the functional operation of the power bay. The power bay has two separate flash memories, only one of which is accessible for updating by the flashpbay utility. The power bay firmware that supports flashing resides in the inaccessible flash memory, so it is not possible to corrupt this memory during the flashing p...
The flashsc utility updates FLASH memory in the L1 or L2 controllers. The FLASH memory in the SN1 L1 controller is divided into three areas: - a "bootstrap" image, which always executes at power-up - an "a" image, which is a copy of the full L1/L2 controller firmware - a "b" image, which is a copy of the full L1/L2 controller firmware Due to memory constraints, there is only one full L2 controller image in the L2 firmware. The second image is the image that is currently running in the L2'...
flex is a tool for generating scanners: programs which recognized lexical patterns in text. flex reads the given input files, or its standard input if no file names are given, for a description of a scanner to generate. The description is in the form of pairs of regular expressions and C code, called rules. flex generates as output a C source file, lex.yy.c, which defines a routine yylex(). This file is compiled and linked with the -lfl library to produce an executable. When the executable is ru...
FLtoPopDB reads standard input, treating each line as a fully qualified pathname. If the file exists, then the filename is converted to the special format required by bgicons (serialized DNA), and written to the standard output. This is used with bgicons to put icons for specific applications on the desktop background by default.
In order to improve performance, the IRIX Interactive Desktop automatically maintains a cache of ftr types and layouts for all of the directories that are viewed with fm or dirview. The flushCache shell script can be used remove all directory-related cache files (the background, default, and URL layout files are not removed). Since /usr/lib/desktop/flushCache is a shell script, users can copy and modify it to suit their own particular needs....
The IRIX Interactive Desktop file manager, fm, is a safe, easy, and attractive alternative to the IRIX shell for running applications and organizing information. Its deceptively simple user interface spares the user from many subtle and not-so-subtle pitfalls of working in raw IRIX shells. fm presents a graphical interface to manipulate the contents of a directory or URL. The icons on the background and the windows showing icons of directories or URL sites comprise the fm application. If fm is l...
The fmprefs customization panel allows the user to define a default layout for their directory views (dirviews). The file manager fm applies these settings when displaying a directory view for the first time. Three of the settings apply to all dirviews -- new and old, open and closed -- and are called Global Settings. The fmprefs panel can be launched from the toolchest (Desktop > Customize > Icon Views) or from a Unix shell command line. Like most other customization panels, the desktop panel h...
fmserv is used by the IRIX Interactive Desktop to maintain correct folder state when multiple fm(1) processes are executing. fmserv also monitors for changes to the desktop file typing database and prompts the user to restart the desktop if a change occurs. fmserv is started and stopped automatically by the IRIX Interactive Desktop. Users should never run this command directly. For more information about the entire IRIX Interactive Desktop environment, see the IID(1) man page....
Fmt is a simple text formatter which reads the concatenation of input files (or standard input if none are given) and produces on standard output a version of its input with lines as close to width characters long as possible. The spacing at the beginning of the input lines is preserved in the output, as are blank lines and interword spacing. The default width is 72 characters. Fmt is meant to format mail messages prior to sending, but may also be useful for other simple tasks. For instance, wit...
Based on a message's classification component, fmtmsg either writes a formatted message to stderr or writes a formatted message to the console. A formatted message consists of up to five standard components as defined below. The classification and subclass components are not displayed as part of the standard message, but rather define the source of the message and direct the display of the formatted message. The valid options are: -c class Describes the...
formatRMedia formats removable media with the following formats: XFS for SGI workstations, EFS for SGI workstations, HFS for Apple Macintosh computers, and FAT for MS DOS/Windows computers. It invokes mkfp to format HFS and FAT filesystems, and fx and mkfs to format EFS and XFS filesystems.
fpck audits and repairs inconsistent conditions for filesystems. When fpck locates major filesystem structure destruction, such as critical sector damage or unrecoverable error, an error message is given. Otherwise, the user is notified with a warning message. The -t flag is required to designate a target filesystem. This utility supports two types of filesystem with four options. dos and fat are synonyms in representing MSDOS FAT filesystem while mac and hfs are synonyms in representing MACINTO...
fpmode executes command, forcing it to use the specified floating point exception and memory access mode. This is only meaningful on processors that support multiple modes. On these processors, the default mode is usually performance mode (also called imprecise exception mode) and nonsequential memory (nsmm) mode. On all other processors, the default is precise exception and sequential (smm) mode. The R8000 is the only processor which supports both a precise exception mode and a performance mode...
fru is a hardware state analyzer that provides board replacement information based on system crash dumps. The output provided by fru displays what system boards, if any, are the most likely suspects that might have induced a hardware failure. fru can be run on any namelist and corefile specified on the command line. namelist contains symbol table information needed for symbolic access to the system memory image being examined. This will typically be the unix.N kernel copied into /var/adm/crash, ...
fsck is applicable only to EFS filesystems. To repair XFS filesystems, see xfs_repair(1M). fsck audits and repairs inconsistent conditions for filesystems. You must have both read and write permission for the device containing the filesystem unless you give the -n flag, in which case only read permission is required. If the filesystem is inconsistent, you are normally prompted for concurrence before each correction is attempted. Most corrective actions result in some loss of data. The amount and...
fsdb is applicable only to EFS filesystems. fsdb can be used to patch up a damaged filesystem after a crash. It has conversions to translate block and i-numbers into their corresponding disk addresses. Also included are mnemonic offsets to access different parts of an inode. These greatly simplify the process of correcting control block entries or descending the filesystem tree. Because fsdb reads the disk raw, it is able to circumvent normal filesystem security. It also bypasses the buffer cach...
fsdump is applicable to EFS and XFS filesystems. fsdump creates the dumpfile used by rfindd(1M) to respond to rfind(1) requests. The dumpfile contains: inode contents For each allocated inode in the file system mounted at directory, fsdump stores all the fields from the inode header, excluding the extent and reference count fields. directory contents For each directory in the file system that is readable by the user "rfindd", fsdump stores the inode numbers and filenames in that directory. Qui...
fserv assists in the transfer of files when IRIX Interactive Desktop icons are dragged from one machine to another. It is invoked automatically as part of the transfer; users should never run this command directly. For more information about the entire IRIX Interactive Desktop environment, see the IID(1) man page. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
Fsinfo is a utility for displaying information about an X font server. It is used to examine the capabilities of a server, the predefined values for various parameters used in communicating between clients and the server, and the font catalogues and alternate servers that are available.
Fslsfonts lists the fonts that match the given pattern. The wildcard character "*" may be used to match any sequence of characters (including none), and "?" to match any single character. If no pattern is given, "*" is assumed. The "*" and "?" characters must be quoted to prevent them from being expanded by the shell.
fsplit splits the named file(s) into separate files, with one procedure per file. A procedure includes blockdata, function, main, program, and subroutine program segments. Procedure X is put in file X.f, X.r, or X.e depending on the language option chosen, with the following exceptions: main is put in the file MAIN.[efr] and unnamed blockdata segments in the files blockdataN.[efr] where N is a unique integer value for each file. The following options pertain: -f (default) Input files are FORTRAN...
fsr improves the organization of mounted filesystems. The reorganization algorithm operates on one file at a time, compacting or otherwise improving the layout of the file extents (contiguous blocks of file data). fsr improves the EFS filesystems by executing fsr_efs (1M); XFS filesystems are improved with fsr_xfs (1M). The intended usage is to call fsr from crontab at a regular time -- the default is once per week....
fsr_efs is applicable only to EFS filesystems. fsr_efs improves the organization of mounted filesystems. The reorganization algorithm operates on one file at a time, compacting or otherwise improving the layout of the file extents (contiguous blocks of file data) while simultaneously compacting the filesystem free space. The following options are accepted by fsr_efs. The -m, -t, and -f options have no meaning if any filesystems, directories, or files are specified on the command line. -m mtab Us...
fsr_xfs is applicable only to XFS filesystems. fsr_xfs improves the organization of mounted filesystems. The reorganization algorithm operates on one file at a time, compacting or otherwise improving the layout of the file extents (contiguous blocks of file data). The following options are accepted by fsr_xfs. The -m, -t, and -f options have no meaning if any filesystems or files are specified on the command line. -m mtab Use this file for the list of filesystems to reorganize. The default is to...
fsstat reports on the status of the filesystem on special_file. During startup, this command is used to determine if the filesystem needs checking before it is mounted. fsstat succeeds if the filesystem is unmounted and appears O.K. For the root filesystem, it succeeds if the filesystem is active and not marked bad. fsstat attempts to assure that the blocksize of the device matches that specified in the device volume header....
The fstobdf program reads a font from a font server and prints a BDF file on the standard output that may be used to recreate the font. This is useful in testing servers, debugging font metrics, and reproducing lost BDF files.
fstyp allows the user to determine the filesystem identifier of mounted or unmounted filesystems using heuristic programs. The filesystem type is required by mount(2) and sometimes by mount(1M) to mount filesystems of different types. The directory /etc/fstyp.d contains a program for each filesystem type to be checked; each of these programs applies some appropriate heuristic to determine whether the supplied special file is of the type for which it checks. If it is, the program prints on standa...
ftimer provides the cpu number of the processor handling the fast clock used by the real time itimer facility. It also reports any outstanding real time itimer timeouts. The fast clock is inactive until it is first used, then remains active from that time onward. The fast clock typically becomes active when a realtime process (i.e., those running with a non-degrading priority, see npri(1)) executes setitimer(2), or less frequently when some special kernel driver needs the fast clock enabled for ...
ftp is the user interface to the Internet standard File Transfer Protocol (FTP). The program allows a user to transfer files to and from a remote network site. The client host with which ftp is to communicate can be specified on the command line. If this is done, ftp immediately attempts to establish a connection to an FTP server on that host; otherwise, ftp enters its command interpreter and awaits instructions from the user. When ftp is awaiting commands from the user, the prompt ftp> is provi...
Ftpd is the Internet File Transfer Protocol server process. The server uses the TCP protocol and listens at the well-known port specified in the services(4) file. Ftpd is started by inetd(1M) whenever a remote client makes a connection request. The following options should specified on the ftpd line in inetd's configuration file, /etc/inetd.conf. If the -l option is specified, each successful and failed ftp session login is logged in the syslog. If this option is specified twice, the retrieve (...
fftr is a utility used to compile file-type rule (FTR) files. It creates optimized type rule (OTR) files. The ftr command, a link to the fftr command, does not support the older compiled type rule (CTR) format files anymore. An FTR file contains a list of file-type rules. Each rule describes how a file of a particular type will appear within the IRIX Interactive Desktop and defines what functions the user can perform on the file by double-clicking on it or choosing menu items that manipulate it....
ftr2mime is a utility used to generate mailcap and mime.type files from the file typing rules. This tool is now used to update the files, whenever new software is installed on the system, or whenever the FTR databases are updated. By default it looks in the desktop FTR database, /usr/lib/filetype/desktop.otr for generating the MIME type information. Users can also specify a different database with the -d option. If the output file option, -o is not given, this tool prints the information onto th...
fuser outputs the process IDs of the processes that are using the files specified as arguments. Each process ID is followed by one of these letter codes, which identify how the process is using the file: c As its current directory. r As its root directory, which was set up by the chroot(1M) command. o As an open file. t As its text file. m As a mapped file, requested by mmap(2) or exec(2) in the case of dynamic shared librar...
fwtmp reads from the standard input and writes to the standard output, converting binary records of the type found in /var/adm/wtmp to formatted ASCII records. The ASCII version is useful when it is necessary to edit bad records. The argument -ic is used to denote that input is in ASCII form and that output is to be written in binary form. wtmpfix examines the standard input or named files in utmp....
fx is an interactive, menu-driven disk utility. It detects and maps out bad blocks on a disk. It also displays information stored on the label of the disk, including partition sizes, disk drive parameters, and the volume directory. An expert mode, available by invoking with the -x flag, provides additional functions normally used during factory set-up or servicing of disks, such as formatting the disk and creating or modifying the disk label or drive parameters. Warning: Unless you are very fami...
Gated is a routing daemon that handles multiple routing protocols and replaces routed(1M), egpup(1M), and any routing daemon that speaks the HELLO routing protocol. Gated currently handles the RIP, EGP, and HELLO routing protocols. Gated can be configured to perform all routing protocols or any combination of the three. The configuration for gated is stored in the file /usr/etc/gated.conf. COMMAND LINE TRACING OPTIONS Gated can be invoked with a number of tracing flags and/or a log file. Tracing...
/usr/OnRamp/* support libraries and files /usr/WebFace/* CGI source documents /usr/ns-home/httpd-gateway/* gateway web server Page 2 GATEWAY(1) GATEWAY(1)
The gencat utility merges the message text source file(s) msgfile into a formatted message database catfile. The database catfile will be created if it does not already exist. If catfile does exist its messages will be included in the new catfile. If set and message numbers collide, the new message text defined in msgfile will replace the old message text currently contained in catfile. The message text source file (or set of files) input to gencat can contain...
The genDeviceIcons program is used to create IRIX Interactive Desktop device icons on the desktop background. It is used in conjuction with the bgicons program. The genDeviceIcons program is run automatically from the /var/X11/xdm/Xsession.dt file when the user logs in, and is not intended to be run directly by end users. genDeviceIcons reads the inputfile to determine which devices to look for. If the device is present on the system, then serialized DNA for the device is written to the standard...
Gendist generates the primary components for software products. These are the product descriptor, the product idb, and the images. The required input is a tree containing all of the files to be shipped, a master idb containing a description of each file or directory to be included in the product, and a distribution specification (spec) file that describes the product structure. Gendist reads the distribution specification file and generates products as defined in that file. For each product, the...
genperm is a simple script that constructs a somewhat restrictive /etc/uucp/Permissions file. By default, it creates a file that allows any remote system to use the name nuucp. Each remote system is allowed to use any of several services. Systems with login names not of the form Uremote where remote is the UUCP name of the system are accommodated by editing the script. This is most commonly necessary when the remote system name is long....
get generates an ASCII text file from each named SCCS file according to the specifications given by its keyletter arguments, which begin with -. The arguments may be specified in any order, but all keyletter arguments apply to all named SCCS files. If a directory is named, get behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component of the path name does not begin with s.) and unreadable files are silently ignored. If a name of - is ...
getabi is used to determine whether to use the 32-bit ABI (abi32) or the 64-bit ABI (abi64). It returns the ABI enumeration values as defined in /usr/include/getabi.h, and writes the new args list on standard output. First it checks the args for "-32" or "-64". If neither of these is given, then it checks the args for a "-mips[1-4]" option. Mips 1 and 2 imply abi32 while mips 3 and 4 imply abi64. If none of the args options specify the abi, then we check the SGI_ABI environment variable, w...
getallpppinisdn returns all the valid PPP incoming ISDN entries by reading the /etc/ppp.conf and /etc/passwd file. When the command is completed, it writes a status code to stdout then followed by the number of entries found and the name of each entry.
getallpppinmodem returns all the valid PPP incoming modem entries by reading the /etc/ppp.conf and /etc/passwd file. When the command is completed, it writes a status code to stdout then followed by the number of entries found and the name of each entry.
getallpppoutisdn returns all the valid PPP outgoing ISDN entries by reading the /etc/ppp.conf and /etc/uucp/Systems file. When the command is completed, it writes a status code to stdout then followed by the number of entries found and the name of each entry.
getallpppoutmodem returns all the valid PPP outgoing modem entries by reading the /etc/ppp.conf and /etc/uucp/Systems file. When the command is completed, it writes a status code to stdout then followed by the number of entries found and the name of each entry.
getconf provides a method to determine the current values of certain configurable system limits, options and parameters. If the system_var argument is given, getconf(1) will print the value of each requested system parameter, one per line. If the path_var and pathname arguments are given, getconf(1) will print the value of the requested variable specified by the path_var argument for the path specified by the pathname operand....
getDiskInfo checks all local fixed disks and reports their capacity and partition information. The partition information is similar to that produced by prtvtoc, but filesystem partitions are tested for valid EFS and XFS filesystems, and xlv partitions are tested to determine whether or not they are actually being administered by xlv. This privcmd is used by the DiskManager which can't access the information directly because root privilege is required to read the disk header and to invoke the xl...
getDiskParts reads the disk's volume header and returns, for each partition, its number, type, start location, and size. The getDiskParts privcmd is used by Tasks which need to read partition information, since root permission is required to read the disk's volume header.
getExportList is a privileged command that gets the list of nfs exported directories from host-name. getExportList works by contacting mountd(1M) on the remote machine. getExportList is a privileged command because in general it is necessary to use a privileged port when communicating with mountd.
Getipforwarding uses systune to get the ipforwarding state. Systune supports ipforwarding since 6.3 only. When the command is completed, it writes a '1' to stdout if ipforwarding is on and a '0' if it is off. If the ipforwarding systune is equal to 2 (i.e. forward packets unless they contain a source-route option) getipforwarding returns 1.
Getjavafrompref gets the state of Java or JavaScript from the preferences file of the user account home directory. If the preferences file does not exist, it reads $HOME/.EZsetupData/-wwwSecureData for status. For javaScript, it checks the WebViewer configuration file in $HOME/.web/.webdefaults also. When the command is completed, it writes a '0' to stdout if no status file is found. It writes a '1' if Java or Netscape JavaScript is disabled; it writes a '2' if Java or Netscape Java...
The getopts(1) command supersedes getopt. For more information, see the NOTES below. getopt is used to break up options in command lines for easy parsing by shell procedures and to check for legal options. It recognizes supplementary code set characters in the argument given to optstring according to the locale specified in the LC_CTYPE environment variable [see LANG on environ(5)]. opt...
getopts is a built-in command to sh(1) used to parse positional parameters and to check for legal options. It supports all applicable rules of the command syntax standard (see Rules 3-10, intro(1)). It should be used in place of the getopt(1) command. See the WARNINGS section below. optstring must contain the option letters the command using getopts will recognize; if a letter is followed by a colon, the option is expected to have an argument, or group of arguments, which must be separated from ...
Getsomeaccounts gets the user accounts that have no password and the account should not be locked either. It can also get active user accounts, that is an account that you can login. When the command is completed, it writes the name of the accounts to stdout beginning with the total number of accounts found.
gettxt retrieves a text string from a message file in the directory /usr/lib/locale/locale/LC_MESSAGES. The directory name locale corresponds to the language in which the text strings are written; see setlocale(3C) and environ(5). msgfile Name of the file from which to retrieve msgnum. The name can be up to 14 characters in length, but may not contain...
getty is a program that is invoked by init(1M). It is the second process in the series, (init-getty-login-shell) that ultimately connects a user with the UNIX system. It can only be executed by the super-user; that is, a process with the user-ID of root. Initially getty prints the contents of /etc/issue (if it exists), then prints the login message field for the entry it is using from /etc/gettydefs, reads the user's login name, and invokes the login(1) command with the user's name as argument...
The getzones command uses the AppleTalk Zone Information Protocol (ZIP) to look up all zones on all AppleTalk networks. It does this by sending a request to the nbpd(1m) daemon. The program then prints all reported zones. If no zones are listed, it means the nbpd(1m) daemon is not functioning correctly.
gfxinfo extracts the type of each graphics subsystem resident, and displays information that is relevant to the various pieces of hardware found in each. The displayed material may include the subsystem type, the number of boards, the number of screens attached, etc.
gfxinit extracts the type of each graphics subsystem resident, and initializes it. The initialization procedure typically consists of loading microcode. If the -v option is used, a verbose description of the procedure steps is displayed. Typically the description includes the full path name of the microcode files been loaded.
The gfxtopology command extracts information about the graphics pipes, keyboards, and mice attached to the system from the hardware graph and /etc/ioconfig.conf. This information is then displayed to relate the physical location of the devices to the logical configuration from ioconfig.conf. The first section of the gfxtopology output describes the brick that the G brick is attached to, as well as the information for the GE board of that pipe. The second section describes the physical location o...
ggd manages the I/O-rate guarantees that have been granted to processes on the system. The daemon is started from a script in the /etc/rc2.d directory. It reads the /etc/grio_disks file to obtain information about the available hardware devices. Processes can make requests for I/O-rate guarantees by using the grio_action_list(3X), grio_reserve_file(3X), or grio_reserve_fs(3X) library calls. After determining if the I/O rate can be guaranteed, the daemon returns a confirmation or rejection to the...
glp, also known as PrintPanel and printpanel, provides a graphical interface to the lp(1) printing command of the AT&T System V print spooling system. The glp program accepts all lp command line options and allows these options to be set interactively. Similar to lp, glp permits multiple filenames to be specified on the command line for printing. glp also permits its standard input to be redirected so that the output of other programs can be printed using redirection or piping. In addition, if g...
glxinfo lists information about the GLX extension, OpenGL capable visuals, and the OpenGL renderer of an X server. The GLX and renderer information includes the version and extension attributes. The visual information lists the GLX visual attributes for each OpenGL capable visual (e.g. whether the visual is double buffered, the component sizes, etc). Command line options are: -display Specify the display to query. -h list the options. -t By default the visual information is presented i...
gmemusage is a graphical memory usage viewer. gmemusage displays a bar chart depicting the breakdown of memory use, with each bar labeled with the name of the program using the memory and the number of kilobytes of memory used. If more than one copy of a program is running, the number of copies is displayed in parentheses after the program name. In addition, gmemusage will display a breakdown of the regions within a program. Clicking on a bar or program name in the main chart will replace the ma...
grelnotes provides a graphical interface for viewing the on-line release notes. For each software product installed on the workstation there is a set of on-line release notes. Each set of release notes contains a number of chapters providing important information about the product. grelnotes makes it possible to quickly locate and browse these release notes. If grelnotes is executed with no arguments, it will come up displaying the release notes for the "IRIX" software product. The "IRIX" pr...
The grep utility searches the input files, selecting lines matching one or more patterns; the types of patterns are controlled by the options specified. The patterns are specified by the -e option, -f option, or the pattern_list operand. The pattern_list's value consists of one or more patterns separated by newline characters; the pattern_file's contents consist of one or more patterns terminated by newline characters. By default, an input line will be selected if any pattern, trea...
grio displays information about the active GRIO reservations and statistics on the GRIO subsystem. Only one of the options BCDFIPRSV can be specified on a single invocation of grio: -B Print information about active GRIO reservations on a given device. Devices can be specified with the -d or -a options. -C Print the device path and show active GRIO reservations. Devices are specified with the -d option. This only works for disks. Each path component reported can be fed back to grio with the -d o...
grio_bandwidth is used to determine the number of I/O operations of a given size that can be guaranteed to be performed by a given disk device, RAID subsystem or SCSI controller in one second. It creates processes which repeatedly issue I/O requests of the given size, and device seeks of random lengths, to the specified devices. The length of time to complete each request is recorded and this information is used to determine the average number of I/O operations that were performed by the device ...
The groups command shows the groups to which you or the optionally specified user belong. Each user belongs to a group specified in the password file /etc/passwd and possibly to other groups as specified in the file /etc/group. Invoking groups without a user specified executes a getgroups system call, which returns the grouplist of which the process is currently a member. This list will contain only the effective group ID unless a multgrps call has been executed; in that case it will contain all...
growfs expands an existing Extent Filesystem, see efs(4). The special argument is the pathname of the device special file where the filesystem resides. The filesystem must be unmounted to be grown, see umount(1M). The existing contents of the filesystem are undisturbed, and the added space becomes available for additional file storage. If a -s size argument is given, the filesystem is grown to occupy size basic blocks of storage (if available). If no size argument is given, the filesystem is gro...
grpck verifies all entries in the group file, file. This verification includes a check of: the number of fields, group name, group ID, whether all login names appear in the password file, duplicate logname entries, and maximum number of groups per logname. The default group file is /etc/group. grpck has the ability to parse YP entries in the group file.
Graphical version of nstats(1). The column of values shows the exact system values, whereas the meters display a moving average of the change in these values. Note that when viewing total system activity, the meters show the total change, but the column of values continues to display on a per node basis.
This command provides a graphical display of usage of certain types of system resources. This display provides a real-time window into the overall operation of the system. The main display element is a rectangular area which is filled by uniquely colored bands, each band signifying a sampled variable measuring system performance. This rectangular area is called a bar throughout the rest of this description. Each bar in a window has a header which consists of the bar title plus the names of each ...
Graphical version of sn(1); Multiple nodes may be selected at once in order to set the same system values in more than one node at a time. Note that when more than one node is selected, the values displayed are for the first node selected.
gr_top displays a sorted list of processes which are using some portion of the available CPU cycles on a machine. The display is updated periodically as specified by interval. This version of gr_top is a perl script built on top of top(1) and xwsh(1G) which closely (although not perfectly) emulates the previous SGI gr_top. For details on the system and process data that is displayed within the gr_top window, see the top(1) man page. The version of top that is used by this gr_top is a much newer ...
gview is a program for viewing, editing, and learning about Inventor 3d scene graphs. There are two views of the Inventor scene graph: a 3d rendered view (left) and a scene graph view (right). The 3d rendered view displays the data in an examiner viewer and allows selection as well as viewing. The scene graph view renders the scene database as a directed acyclic graph illustrating the structure and relationships within the database. This view is displayed in a GraphViewer component, which is der...
Gzcmp and gzdiff are used to invoke the cmp or the diff program on compressed files. All options specified are passed directly to cmp or diff. If only 1 file is specified, then the files compared are file1 and an uncompressed file1.gz. If two files are specified, then they are uncompressed if necessary and fed to cmp or diff. The exit status from cmp or diff is preserved.
The gzexe utility allows you to compress executables in place and have them automatically uncompress and execute when you run them (at a penalty in performance). For example if you execute ``gzexe /bin/cat'' it will create the following two files: -r-xr-xr-x 1 root bin 9644 Feb 11 11:16 /bin/cat -r-xr-xr-x 1 bin bin 24576 Nov 23 13:21 /bin/cat~ /bin/cat~ is the original file and /bin/cat is the self-uncompressing executable file. You can remove /bin/cat~ once you are sure that /bin/cat works p...
gzforce forces a .gz extension on all gzip files so that gzip will not compress them twice. This can be useful for files with names truncated after a file transfer. On systems with a 14 char limitation on file names, the original name is truncated to make room for the .gz suffix. For example, 12345678901234 is renamed to 12345678901.gz. A file name such as foo.tgz is left intact.
Gzgrep is used to invoke the grep on compress'ed or gzip'ed files. All options specified are passed directly to grep. If no file is specified, then the standard input is decompressed if necessary and fed to grep. Otherwise the given files are uncompressed if necessary and fed to grep. If gzgrep is invoked as gzegrep or gzfgrep then egrep or fgrep is used instead of grep. If the GREP environment variable is set, gzgrep uses it as the grep program to be invoked. For example: for sh: GREP=fgrep g...
Gzip reduces the size of the named files using Lempel-Ziv coding (LZ77). Whenever possible, each file is replaced by one with the extension .gz, while keeping the same ownership modes, access and modification times. (The default extension is -gz for VMS, z for MSDOS, OS/2 FAT, Windows NT FAT and Atari.) If no files are specified, or if a file name is "-", the standard input is compressed to the standard output. Gzip will only attempt to compress regular files. In particular, it will ignore sym...
Gzmore is a filter which allows examination of compressed or plain text files one screenful at a time on a soft-copy terminal. gzmore works on files compressed with compress, pack or gzip, and also on uncompressed files. If a file does not exist, gzmore looks for a file of the same name with the addition of a .gz, .z or .Z suffix. Gzmore normally pauses after each screenful, printing --More-- at the bottom of the screen. If the user then types a carriage return, one more line is displayed. If th...
Gznew recompresses files from .Z (compress) format to .gz (gzip) format. If you want to recompress a file already in gzip format, rename the file to force a .Z extension then apply znew.
h2ph converts any C header files specified to the corresponding Perl header file format. It is most easily run while in /usr/include: cd /usr/include; h2ph * sys/* The output files are placed in the hierarchy rooted at Perl's architecture dependent library directory. You can specify a different hierarchy with a -d switch. If run with no arguments, filters standard input to standard output.
h2xs builds a Perl extension from any C header file. The extension will include functions which can be used to retrieve the value of any #define statement which was in the C header. The module_name will be used for the name of the extension. If module_name is not supplied then the name of the header file will be used, with the first character capitalized. If the extension might need extra libraries, they should be included here. The extension Makefile.PL will take care of checking whether the li...
halt is executed by the superuser to shut the machine down so it is safe to remove power. halt leaves the machine executing the firmware monitor, unless the -p option is present and supported on the machine. If you are remotely logged in to the system, you are prompted to confirm the shutdown. The -p option requests that the power be turned off after the system is shut down. Only some systems support this....
The hash utility affects the way the current shell environment remembers the locations of utilities found as described in Command Search and Execution . Depending on the arguments specified, it adds utility locations to its list of remembered locations or it purges the contents of the list. When no arguments are specified, it reports on the contents of the list. Utilities provided as built-ins to the shell are not reported by hash....
haven is an X screensaver client that manages a GL window as the screensaver. The pathname of the GL program to use and its argument list are specified as arguments to haven. haven has two algorithms that it can use to try to find the GL window. The -n option chooses a newer more robust algorithm. However, if it fails, the -o option is compatible with older versions of haven. The default is -n. When invoked with the -k option, haven attempts to kill any other screensaver that may be running and ...
Help finds information to explain a message from an SCCS command or explain the use of an SCCS command. Zero or more arguments may be supplied. If no arguments are given, help will prompt for one. The arguments may be either message numbers (which normally appear in parentheses following messages) or command names, of one of the following types: type 1 Begins with non-numerics, ends in numerics. The non-numeric prefix is usually an abbreviation for the program or set of routines which produced t...
hinv displays the contents of the system hardware inventory table. This table is created each time the system is booted and contains entries describing various pieces of hardware in the system. The items in the table include main memory size, cache sizes, floating point unit, and disk drives. Without arguments, the hinv command displays a one line description of each entry in the table. In addition, on some systems hinv can display manufacturing information such as board name, part number and ba...
The hostid command with no arguments prints the identifier of the current host in hexadecimal. This numeric value is expected to be unique across all hosts and is commonly set to the host's Internet address. The super-user can set the host ID by giving an argument that is a hexadecimal value or a hostname. With the -h option, the argument must be a hostname. If the argument is a hostname, hostid sets the ID to the name's Internet address listed in /etc/hosts. Hostid sets the exit status to 0 i...
Managers display information about your system and provide access to interactive guides (also called tasks) that let you administer your system. For example, the User Manager displays a list of the user accounts currently on the system and gives you access to guides like "Add a User Account" and "Modify a User Account". In the Manager window, you can open a guide by choosing its name from the Task menu or by clicking its button at the bottom of the window. The Host manager displays the local...
Hostname prints the name of the current host. The -s option trims any domain information from the printed name. The super-user can set the hostname by supplying an argument; this is usually done in the system setup initialization script /etc/init.d/sysetup using the contents of /etc/sys_id. This setting persists only until the next reboot when the startup procedure will once again initialize the hostname with the contents of the above file. To permanently change this value change the contents of...
When invoked with no arguments, hot-convert will convert NCSA Mosaic hotlist entries found in $HOME/.mosaic-hotlist-default.html into Netscape Navigator booksmarks and append them to $HOME/.MCOM-bookmarks.html If input-file is specified, then the NCSA hotlist is read from that file. If you want to save the Netscape bookmarks in another location, then you must also specify output-file as the destination file for the bookmarks....
The hotfd program monitors any hot folders configured on the system. When files appear in the folders, it submits them via the local printing system to the appropriate printer. One daemon monitors all of the folders on a single machine. Hot folders are controled by a configuration file, and are usually created with the Xinet GUI. Hotfd runs as a daemon in the background unless one of the debug options is given. The configuration file consists of a series of text lines specifying the directory to...
hpsnmpd is a daemon for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) as specified in Internet RFC 1157, and supports a subset of the HP-UX enterprise MIB. The daemon, called the SNMP agent, can be configured to run from the network startup script at boot time by the command chkconfig snmpd on or started from the command line. You must be superuser (root) to run hpsnmpd. Hpsnmpd acts as a subagent to the SGI master agent snmpd or the Peer networks encapsulator peer_encaps. The hpsnmpd subagent m...
htmake is a "site compiler." It creates a World Wide Web site (composed of several hypertext documents and related objects (e.g., graphics) from a source tree (expressed as a directory hierarchy). Pre-requisites to using htmake are: 1. a server supporting NCSA-compliant Server-Side Includes ("includes"); and 2. a Netscape-style frames- and JavaScript-capable browser/client/user-agent (such as Netscape 2.1). Includes (including `execs') must be enabled in the site's target directory. You ca...
htsmall is a simple "web site compiler." It provides a subset of the functionality found in the htmake site compiler (see htmake(1)). htsmall reads a source directory (the current working directory if not specified on the command line) and generates a single page in the destination directory. htsmall also copies all necessary files within the source directory to the destination directory. The generated page is a simple index, useful for the top level of a web site. The index is structured as a...
ical is a calendar for use as a desk accessory. It displays one month at a time. Each click of the middle mouse button advances the month. Each click of the left mouse button makes the month go back by one. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
The iceauth program is used to edit and display the authorization information used in connecting with ICE. This program is usually used to extract authorization records from one machine and merge them in on another (as is the case when using remote logins or granting access to other users). Commands (described below) may be entered interactively, on the iceauth command line, or in scripts.
The command, iconbooktocatalog, is for use internally by iconcatalog. This program converts the pre-IRIX 6.3 format to post-IRIX 6.3 format. In IRIX 6.2 and earlier releases, an iconbook page is represented by a file and each line in the file represents an icon on that page. In IRIX 6.3 and later releases, an iconcatalog page is represented by a directory and each symbolic link in that directory is an icon on that page. There are user pages and system pages to be converted. The system pages are ...
The iconcatalog (or iconbook) contains named pages which can store any type of icon, including files, folders, programs, printers, people, hosts, and tape and disk drives. Icons are stored in the catalog as references to the actual entities. If an icon is dragged onto an iconcatalog page, only a reference to the actual entity is kept on the page. With the default IndigoMagic color scheme, blue iconcatalog pages can be distinguished easily from green icon views. The "Make Reference" operation o...
iconcatalogedit modifies the contents of an existing iconcatalog(1) page by adding icons to it or removing icons from it. The icon to be added or removed is specified by the iconstring. Here is an example of a "File" iconstring: "Category:File Name:/usr/sbin/jot" The pagename is the string seen on the tabs at the bottom of the iconcatalog(1) window. For example, "Applications", "Collaboration", and "Demos" are all pagenames. A page is either a -syspage shared by...
IconSmith is an interactive drawing editor for artwork created from twodimensional polygons. This artwork is used in file-typing rules to create icons for the IRIX 5.X and 6.X Indigo Magic Desktop and the 6.5 IRIX Interactive Desktop graphical user interface (see the IID(1G) reference page). The fftr(1) compiler and the older ftr(1) compiler combine this artwork with IRIX commands specified in file-typing rules to produce icons. See the fftr(1) reference page for full details. IconSmith data fil...
iconv converts the characters or sequences of characters in file from one code set to another and writes the results to standard output. Should no conversion exist for a particular character then it is converted to the underscore ' ' in the target code set. With the arguments fromcode and tocode identifying the input and output code sets, respectively iconv will data perform conversion. If no file argument is specified on the command line, iconv rea...
icrash is a hands-on utility that generates detailed kernel information in an easy-to-read format. icrash also provides the ability to generate reports about system crash dumps created by savecore(1M). Depending on the type of system crash dump, icrash can create a unique report that contains information about what happened when the system crashed. icrash can be run on live systems or with any namelist and corefile specified on the command line. namelist contains symbol table information needed ...
id displays the calling process's ID and name. It also displays the group ID and name. If the real and effective IDs do not match, both are printed. user The login name for which the information is to be reported. -a Report all the groups to which the invoking process belongs. -g Reports only the effective group ID, using the format "%u\n". -G Reports all different group IDs (effective, real and supplementary), using the format "%u\n". If there is more than one dis...
idbg allows the superuser to invoke a number of internal kernel routines that provide useful debugging information. The -r option provides a record of the output to the given file. The kernel routines are part of the idbg kernel module, which can be either dynamically loaded or statically configured into the kernel. The ml command can be used to dynamically load the idbg.o module into a running kernel without reconfiguring and rebooting the kernel: ml ld -i /var/...
ident searches for all instances of the pattern $keyword: text $ in the named files or, if no files are named, the standard input. These patterns are normally inserted automatically by the RCS command co(1), but can also be inserted manually. The option -q suppresses the warning given if there are no patterns in a file. The option -V prints ident's version number. ident works on text files as well as object files and dumps. For example, if the C program in f.c contains #include static...
ieditor is a simple internationalized editor in which the mouse is used to cut, copy, and paste text, and to position the cursor. ieditor also allows the user to perform simple searches and replaces. ieditor accepts several standard X-style command-line arguments (listed above) whose default values can be initialized in your Foreground and background colors are set using the options of the same name. ieditor uses a font list --mincho-*--14-;7x14;*--14-* as default fonts. If you want to change fo...
ifconfig is used to assign an address to a network interface and/or configure network interface parameters. ifconfig is invoked at boot time from /etc/init.d/network to define the network address of each interface present on a machine; you can also use it once the system is up to redefine an interface's address or other operating parameters. The interface parameter is a string of the form ``name unit'', for example, enp0. Using the -a option shows status for all interfaces on the machine. If ...
Two environment variables can be used to configure the global IFL environment. These environment variables are summarized in a table here and described in more detail below: Variable Default ______________________________________________ IFL_DATABASE /usr/lib/ifl/ifl_database LD_LIBRARY_PATH /usr/lib:/lib LD_LIBRARYN32_PATH /usr/lib32:/lib32 LD_LIBRARY64_PATH /usr/lib64:/lib64 The image file formats recognized by IFL are determined at runtime by searching for dynamic shared objects (DSOs) that c...
***THIS COMMAND IS NOW OBSOLETE*** Trusted networking rule is no longer assigned to network interface, thus iflabel is obsolete. The rhost.conf database is used, it describes the default labels to use for networking to non-trusted hosts and the idiom of network label support used for trusted multi-label hosts. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
In IRIX 6.3 and later releases, screen-specific resources are kept in subdirectories under the $HOME/.desktop- directory named for the screen (for example, $HOME/.desktop-/0.0). These hold many of the 4Dwm resource files that in previous IRIX releases resided in the ./desktop- directory. Host-specific resources are kept under the $HOME/.desktophost directory. This is data that cannot be shared among hosts. Specific files and subdirectories of interest in each $HOME/...
The IRIS InSight Viewer is an online information retrieval system. This viewer provides an easy-to-use interface which allows the user to search and browse through online information that is distributed from Silicon Graphics.
A set of environment variables can be used to configure the global IL environment. In particular, the file format, multi-processing, graphics hardware acceleration, caching capabilities and monitoring functions of the IL can be controlled using these variables. The environment variables are summarized in a table here and describe in more detail below: Variable Default ____________________________________________ IL_ARENA_MAXUSERS 40 IL_CACHE_FRACTION .3 IL_CACHE_SIZE use cache fraction IL_COMPUT...
ilptops converts a text file into a PostScript file for printing on an Apple LaserWriter, or any other PostScript-compatible output device. It supports selection of a variety of fonts at arbitrary point sizes, margin specification, portrait and landscape page orientation, automatic page numbering, page outlining, and multi-column printing. It is similar to ilptops (1) except that it processes supplementary code set characters according to the locale specified in the LC_CTYPE environment variable...
The program imagetops produces a printable PostScript version of the image filename on standard output. It will be able to read all image formats that the psfiletype(1) program labels as ``image'' or ``eps.''
imdmonitor runs in the background and monitors available space on mounted filesystems and requests for message alerts from the sysmon(1M) facility. When it detects a condition requiring a graphical alert notifier, it uses fork(2) to launch a new process to post the notifier. The /usr/lib/sysmon/errhook program posts the notifier. imdmonitor is launched at login from the /var/X11/xdm/Xsession.dt script. It is not intended to be run directly by end users. It establishes a connection to the X serve...
imgcopy allows image files with formats supported by the ImageVision Library to be copied and converted to other supported formats. The following command line options are allowed: -fformat Specifies the file format to convert to. By default the output image file format is based on the file name extension. If the extension is not of a known type, then the default file format will be used (usually TIFF). The supported file formats depend on what ImageVision file formats have been installed; if an ...
imged is a pixel-based editor for making changes to image files stored in the SGI imglib format. Images may be stored in colormap, RGB, or greyscale format. imged may also be used to create a new colormap or RGB image by specifying an X and Y size on the command line. If the -rgb flag is given, the new image is created as RGB, otherwise it is created as a colormap image. New images are initialized with a solid grey background. The imged window contains a scaled representation of the image being ...
imginfo prints information about image files with formats supported by the ImageVision Library. The information includes: image dimensions in pixels, page size, data type, dimension order, color model, minimum and maximum pixel values, file format, data compression and image description if available. The following command line options are allowed: -gui Runs in a graphical user interface mode that shows the information in a separate window, along with a reduced view of the image data. In this mod...
The imgtcl shell provides a tcl-based scripting interface to the IL. IL operators and image files can be created, linked together, and displayed in an ilViewer or ilDisplay object. Most of the IL's classes can be be created and manipulated within imgtcl; multi-dimensional arrays can also be allocated (usually to be used as parameters to an IL function.)
imgview allows multiple image files to be displayed. Only image files with formats supported by the Image File Library (IFL) and that are installed, can be displayed. Use the imgformats command to determine which file formats are currently supported. The following command line options are allowed: -compare Tells the tool to display all images on the command line in a single window instead of in separate windows. The images will be stacked one on top of the other with the last file specified on t...
imgworks is a visual tool for altering and enhancing color and monochrome images. imgworks provides a graphical user interface that shows the effect of each operation as it is performed. Additionally, you can undo or redo a series of operations. You can use imgworks to manipulate images in the following ways: flipping, resizing, cropping, and rotating them; converting color to monochrome; creating photographic negatives; adjusting brightness, contrast, and color balance; thresholding and posteri...
When inetd is started at boot time by /etc/init.d/network, it reads its configuration information from the /etc/inetd.conf and listens for connections on certain internet sockets. When a connection is found on one of its sockets, it decides what service the socket corresponds to, and invokes a program to service the request. After the program is finished, it continues to listen on the socket (except in some cases which will be described below). Essentially, inetd allows running one daemon to inv...
infocmp can be used to compare a binary terminfo entry with other terminfo entries, rewrite a terminfo description to take advantage of the use= terminfo field, or print out a terminfo description from the binary file (term) in a variety of formats. In all cases, the boolean fields will be printed first, followed by the numeric fields, followed by the string fields....
inform opens up a window on the graphics console containing the text and a Continue button. If the mouse is clicked in the Continue button, the window will go away.
init init is a general process spawner. Its primary role is to create processes from information stored in an inittab file (see inittab(4)). The default inittab file used is /etc/inittab; other files can be specified using the INITTAB keyword in the system file (see system(4)). At any given time, the system is in one of eight poss...
initDisk invokes fx to initialize a disk and partition it as an option disk with all usable space in one partition, partition 7. It is essentially equivalent to performing the operation fx -x -c INITIALIZE on the indicated disk.
inpcontrol is used as a command line interface to InPerson. It passes commands specified in the commandstring to InPerson. This is useful for applications that want to initiate InPerson calls, or for users who wish to create InPerson shortcuts.
Please see the on-line InPerson User's Guide and the InPerson Setup and Administration Guide for detailed instructions on the use of this product. What follows is a brief summary.
The IRIS InSight Administration utility is used to assist in maintaining the libraries of books available to the IRIS InSight Viewer. This utility will rebuild the library-level index for any bookshelf specified on the invocation line, and will update the list of books for that particular bookshelf (booklist.txt). After the installation of any book, inst(1M) automatically runs this command over the necessary bookshelves. The only time an administrator needs to execute this command is if they hav...
inst is the installation tool used to install, upgrade, or remove software distributed by Silicon Graphics. There are two ways to run inst: - Invoke inst as a command from the shell. This is known as invoking inst using IRIX Installation and you must be superuser to do this. Some software cannot be installed using IRIX Installation (Release Notes and inst itself warn you about this software) and some commands within inst cannot be performed when using IRIX Installation. This is due to system int...
Install copies regular files generated in a source tree into a target directory. It can also create directories, links and special files in a target directory. The target directory's pathname will be prefixed by the value of the ROOT environment variable. Install is most commonly invoked from makefiles (see make(1)). If the RAWIDB environment variable is set, install creates no files in target directories; instead, it appends records describing the files that it would have created to the instal...
installf informs the system that a pathname not listed in the pkgmap file is being created or modified. It should be invoked before any file modifications have occurred. When the second synopsis is used, the pathname descriptions will be read from standard input. These descriptions are the same as would be given in the first synopsis but the information is given in the form of a list. (The descriptions should be in the form: pathname [ftype [[major minor...
The Inventor 3d File Format is SGI's standard for 3d data. The format supports both an ASCII and private binary format. The binary format is network-neutral and thus can be exported across machine boundaries. Page 1 Release 6.5 August 1991
ioconfig assigns logical controller numbers to all devices in the I/O subsystem. It is run as a part of the /etc/bcheckrc startup script. ioconfig walks the /hw hardware graph tree and assigns a unique and persistent logical controller number to each physical device found. The options are: -d Enable debugging messages. -f starting_directory Specify the root of the hardware graph tree. ioconfig attempts to match each device found as it walks the /hw hardware graph tree with an entry in /etc/iocon...
ipanel allows the user to change the environment's international settings consisting of locale, keyboard layout, and timezone specification through a graphical user interface. Individual users' environments as well as the system default environment can be set by using ipanel. If the specified combination of the country and language does not exist as one of the defined locales in the system, ipanel will generate the appropriate customized co...
ipaste is a utility that displays images stored using the image library "libimage.a". ipaste reads pixel values, image dimensions and other relevant data from the file imgfile via calls to the image library. ipaste then displays the image in a window. On machines with few bit planes, ipaste dithers the image. The -f option causes ipaste to run in the foreground. Normally, ipaste forks off a background process to display the image while the foreground process exits back to the command line. Wit...
ipcrm will remove one or more specified messages, semaphore or shared memory identifiers. The identifiers are specified by the following options: -q msqid removes the message queue identifier msqid from the system and destroys the message queue and data structure associated with it. -m shmid removes the shared memory identifier shmid from the system. The shared memory segment and data structure associated with it are destroyed after the last detach. -s semid removes the semaphore identifier semi...
ipcs prints certain information about active inter-process communication facilities for which the calling process has read access. Without options, information is printed in short format for message queues, shared memory, and semaphores that are currently active in the system. Otherwise, the information that is displayed is controlled by the following options: -q Print information about active message queues. -m Print information about active shared memory segments. -s Print information about ac...
-d This enables ipfilterd into a debug mode in which it will display each filter that is being created when reading the configuration file. Packets that are passed to the ipfilterd daemon for a accept/reject/grab decision will be logged using the syslog(3C) function with the log facility set to LOG_DAEMON. This includes an indication of whether the packet matched a filter or was dropped by default; an indication of whether the filter was one that specified an interface only or included protocol ...
Ipkbd changes the specified user's keyboard-cfg.xkb file to contain the specified configuration settings. These settings must be given as name/value pairs on the command line. This privcmd is not intended for command line use. Rather, ipanel(1) should be used to customize your cultural settings and create composite locales.
Iplang changes the specified user's $HOME/.lang file to contain the specified locale string. This privcmd is not intended for command line use. Rather, ipanel(1) should be used to customize your cultural settings and create composite locales.
Ipld creates a composite locale based on a specification read from stdin. This privcmd is not intended for command line use. Rather, ipanel(1) should be used to customize your cultural settings and create composite locales.
Iptime changes the specified user's $HOME/.timezone file to contain the specified timezone string. This privcmd is not intended for command line use. Rather, ipanel(1) should be used to customize your cultural settings and create composite locales.
ipxdebug is used to enable or disable diagnostic output from the IPX protocol stack. It is intended for use by Silicon Graphics developers and field personnel.
ipxstat shows various statistics related to IPX packet traffic. These include the total number of input and output packets, as well as the number and type of malformed packets dropped. The IPX protocol is implemented by the ipx STREAMS module, and is used by the NetWare client software to communicate with a NetWare server.
ircombine creates and operates on video format combinations, descriptions of raster sizes and timings to be used on video outputs, as well as the configuration of the underlying frame buffer. The resulting combination can be used as the current video configuration, stored as the default configuration to be used at system power-up or graphics initialization, or saved in a video format combination file. The combination can be created from scratch or by modifying the current or a saved combination....
Managers display information about your system and provide access to interactive guides (also called tasks) that let you administer your system. For example, the User Manager displays a list of the user accounts currently on the system and gives you access to guides like "Add a User Account" and "Modify a User Account". In the Manager window, you can open a guide by choosing its name from the Task menu or by clicking its button at the bottom of the window. The ISDN manager displays the ISDN ...
isSuper is used to check if testtype has a supertype of type supertype defined in the optimized type rule (OTR) file file.otr or, if not there, in /usr/lib/filetype/desktop.otr. It also supports the old compiled type rule (CTR) database file format. For more information about the entire IRIX Interactive Desktop environment, see the IID(1) man page.
ivcat reads each file in sequence and then writes each out. If no input file is given, or a filename of "-" is specified, ivcat reads from the standard input file. The input files must be valid Open Inventor 3D Interchange Format files (1.0 or 2.0). The following command line options are allowed: -b Write out the files in binary Inventor format. The default is to write out the files in Inventor's ASCII format. -f Remove all SoFile nodes. This has the effect of condensing hierarchical files in...
ivdowngrade reads the input file infile and converts it to the Inventor format specified by -v targetVersion , either 1.0 or 2.0. If the -v option is not specified, an Inventor V2.0 file will be generated. The input file can be in Inventor or VRML format. The output will always be in ascii format. If no output file is specified, ivdowngrade writes to stdout. If no input file is specified as well, ivdowngrade reads from stdin....
ivfix reads an Inventor object and restructures it to improve the object's rendering performance. ivfix processes the scene graph in two phases: Phase 1) Analyzes the organization of the input scene graph, and tries to sort it a better way to take advantage of coherence. For example, it tries to organize subgraphs by common textures, since switching textures is expensive. Once sorted, it also tries to combine subgraphs so that the final result has fewer nodes. Phase 2) "Flattens" the subgraph...
ivinfo prints (to standard output) information about the named file. (If no input file is given, ivinfo reads from the standard input.) The information includes whether the file is in ASCII or binary format, and, for each scene graph in the file, the number of nodes in the graph and the contents of any SoInfo nodes contained in it.
IvToRib converts an Open Inventor 2.0 file into a Renderman 3.0.3 .RIB data file. Copyright (c) Acuris, Inc. 1995. Command Line Options Typically, IvToRib expects an Open Inventor file to be specified on the command line after all command option switches. If no Open Inventor file is specified on the command line, IvToRib will read from standard input (stdin). By default, IvToRib writes the converted data to standard output (stdout) and messages to standard error (stderr). -h Prints a program usa...
ivview reads an Inventor file (or files) and provides a simple interface to quickly view 3D data. The input files must be valid Inventor 3D files (versions 1.0 or 2.0). All the files specified at the command line are read in and rendered. ivview presents a single window containing an Inventor viewer (examiner viewer or the walk viewer) and a menu bar. Note that if you click and hold the right mouse button, the viewer pop-up capabilities will be displayed. Also, note that the viewer has a help ca...
The iwsh program is an international terminal emulation program that runs a shell (or other UNIX command) within its own window on the screen. It comes from xwsh. The functions are the same as original xwsh, and the iwsh using xwnmo inputing multilingual strings.
/usr/java/bin/javac Java language compiler /usr/java/bin/java Java language interpreter /usr/java/bin/jdb Java language command-line debugger /usr/java/bin/javah Program that creates C header files and C stub files for a Java class /usr/java/bin/javap Program that disassembles compiled Java files /usr/java/bin/javadoc Program that generates API documentation in HTML /usr/java/bin/appletviewer Program that allows you to run applets without a web browser /usr/java/bin/jar The Java archive tool /us...
For more general information about the purpose and use of this plug-in, see http://java.sun.com/products/plugin/ For details on its use on SGI systems, see the release notes for java_plugin relnotes java_plugin
Jgui is an administration program for Xinet servers which speaks a proprietary protocol over a TCP/IP connection to a ``client'' application that handles user GUI interactions. Xinet also ships a JAVA application that implements the client side of this protocol. See the Xinet Administration Guide for details about running the JAVA client on a Macintosh. The jgui program implements identical behaviour to xktalk(1), except for not interacting with the user via the X Window System. It even uses t...
The jobs utility displays the status of jobs that were started in the current shell environment; see Shell Execution Environment. When jobs reports the termination status of a job, the shell removes its process ID from the list of those "known in the current shell execution environment".
join forms, on the standard output, a join of the two relations specified by the lines of file1 and file2. If file1 is -, the standard input is used. file1 and file2 must be sorted in increasing code set collating sequence on the fields on which they are to be joined, normally the first in each line [see sort(1)]. join processes supplementary code set characters in files, and recognizes supplementary code set characters given to the -e and -t op...
Jot is a display-oriented cut-and-paste style ASCII text editor tuned to run on Silicon Graphics machines. Jot is written using pure Graphics Library code, and hence will not work on a generic X terminal, and it ignores the X resources. Jot (which was originally called "zip"), is tuned to run well on large files, and can edit arbitrary binary files.
These routines let you copy, delete, move and set AppleShare attributes for K-AShare files. K-AShare stores AppleShare specific information, such as file Type and Creator and the resource fork, in several utility files. This information will be lost if you use cp(1), mv(1) and rm(1), to move K-AShare files around a unix filesystem. If you use kscp, ksmv, and ksrm, the AppleShare info will be moved or deleted as necessary. Kats is an administrative program used to view and set various AppleShare ...
Katype tests each argument in an attempt to classify it. It uses the same algorithm as K-AShare to determine the Macintosh Finder Information, FileType and FileCreator for files resident in the UNIX filesystem. The main purpose of katype is to check the proper working of the file typing heuristics. See filetype(5) for a discussion of these. Flags include: -m typefile specifies an alternate file of specifications. This is useful when one wants to test the applied heuristics. -c gives a test print...
Tables included in the file filename are loaded into the kbd STREAMS module, which must already have been pushed into the standard input stream. (In this context loaded means copied from a disk file into main memory within the operating system.) This program is intended both to provide for loading and linking of both shared or public tables and private tables implementing user-specific functionality. New users should refer to kbdcomp(1M) and kbd(7) for a ge...
The kbdpipe command allows the use of kbd tables as pipeline elements between user programs. [See kbdcomp(1M) and kbd(7) for descriptions of the module and its capabilities.] kbdpipe is mostly useful in code set conversion applications. If an output file is given, then all infiles are piped to the given output file. With no arguments other than -t, standard input is converted and sent to standard output. The r...
The kbdset command is the normal user interface to the kbd STREAMS module. [See kbdcomp(1M) and kbd(7) for a general description of the module's capabilities.] kbdset allows users to attach to pre-loaded tables, detach from tables, and set options. Options are provided for setting hot-keys to toggle tables and for controlling modes of the module. Arguments and options are scanned and acted on in command line order. If th...
The kernprof executable allows kernel profiling information to be gathered. To use it, use the ssrun(1) command on the kernprof executable, specifying any of the experiments that are supported for the kernel. These experiments will generate a SpeedShop experiment named kernprof... The experiments describe themselves as being run on the program "/unix", and prof(1) can be used to process the data; the filename of the actual kernel for which the data was collected must to b...
keyboard allows users to set four keyboard parameters: key click sounds (on or off), key repeat (whether or not holding down a key causes a character to repeat), repeat speed (rate at which a depressed key will repeat characters), and repeat delay (amount of time to pass before a depressed key begins repeating characters). The panel can be launched from the toolchest (Desktop > Customize > Keyboard) or from a Unix shell command line. Like most other customization panels, the desktop panel has th...
kill sends a signal to the specified processes. The value of signal may be numeric or symbolic [see signal(5)]. The symbolic signal name is the name as it appears in /usr/include/sys/signal.h, with the SIG prefix stripped off. Signal 15 (SIGTERM) is sent by default; this will normally kill processes that do not catch or ignore the signal. pid and pgid are unsigne...
killall sends a signal to a set of processes or process groups specified by pname(s). It is similar to kill(1), except that it allows processes to be specified by name and has special options used by shutdown(1M). When no processes are specified, killall terminates all processes that are not in the same process group as the caller. This form is for use in shutting down the system and is only available to the superuser. The options to killall are: signal, -signal Specifies the signal number. The ...
Killautomount kills the automount deamon. It tries to unmount the filesystems that are automounted and not busy. "chkconfig automount off" is executed also.
The killxwnmo requires termination of the input manager xwnmo. If the owner of killxwnmo process is not same as that of xwnmo process, that requirement will fail. And if more than zero client(s) is(are) connecting to xwnmo, that requirement will fail. But with -9 option, that requirement will success even if more than zero client(s) is(are) connecting to xwnmo. "SEE ALSO" xwnmo(1X)
The file /var/adm/klogpp is a kernel /dev/log post-processor. It reads from standard input, converts standard device name formats to include the mounted filesystem, and then writes to standard output. This program is usually invoked as a filter via /etc/syslogd.conf by syslogd(1M) to convert hex device numbers in kernel printfs to /dev names.
Zone memory consists of a number of zones of differing sizes. Since there is limited table space for zones, structures with sizes close to each other are lumped together in the same zone. For example, structures that have a size of 712 bytes may be put into the zone listed as size 768. In cases like this, you may need to know the exact size of the structure you wish to split when using kmem_split_zone. kmem_split_zone should not be used with kmem_make_zones_private_max and kmem_make_zones_privat...
Ksd is an AppleShare network file system server. It uses the K-Talk AppleTalk protocols to service file system requests from remote clients. The K-AShare server advertises its services with the Name Binding Protocol Daemon nbpd(1m) using the server-name specified (unless the -noddp argument is given). The server name may contain blanks, but it must then be quoted in the shell invocation. The boot-time invocation of the servers normally resides in the file /usr/etc/appletalk/services, which is us...
ksd_msg allows the administrator to send a message to all K-AShare users who have volumes mounted. The message will appear in a pop-up dialog box on each user's screen.
ksd_restart allows the administrator to shut down the KAShare server and, if desired, restart it. The script will query for a number of minutes before shutdown, and will allow the invoker to specify a custom message. The message will be sent to all K-AShare users with mounted volumes every minute until the shutdown, telling the reason for the shutdown, and the number of minutes until shutdown.
These utility programs let the user convert between various Macintosh archival formats and the K-AShare file format. The supported archive formats are AppleSingle, AppleDouble, BinHex, CAP-AUFS 3.0, Helios Ethershare, MacBinary, TOPS (version 2 or later), and IPT uShare 4.1. These formats are used to encode Macintosh specific information (file type and creator, resource fork etc.) into one or more files that can be stored on non-Macintosh file systems. BinHex also encodes files into ASCII, so th...
labelit can be used to provide labels for unmounted disk file systems or file systems being copied to tape. You must be superuser to run labelit . The -n option provides for initial labeling only (this destroys previous contents). With the optional arguments omitted, labelit prints current label values. The special name should be the physical disk section (e.g., /dev/dsk/dks0d1s0), or the a rewind tape device (e.g., /dev/tape). The device may not be on a remote machine. The fsname argument repre...
Last will look in the wtmp file which records all logins and logouts for information about a user, a terminal or any group of users and terminals. Arguments specify names of users or terminals of interest. Names of terminals may be given fully or abbreviated. For example `last d1' is the same as `last ttyd1'. If multiple arguments are given, the information which applies to any of the arguments is printed. For example `last root console' would list all of "root's" sessions as well as all s...
launch is a small application which consists of a text field where the user can enter commands and their arguments for execution. The IRIX Interactive Desktop file manager (fm) invokes launch when the user double-clicks an icon and the icon's filetype requires additional information before the corresponding application can be launched. End users can also run launch program at a Unix shell command line, though this would be unusual (it is easier to run the command itself directly). The options t...
The launchbookviewer utility launches the user's favorite book viewer as chosen on the dtUtilities(1) panel or set in the BOOKVIEWER environment variable. If the user has not chosen a favorite book viewer, the script launches Insight. The launchbookviewer script is not intended to be run directly by the end user, but can be run at a Unix shell command line. It is also accessible from the toolchest (Help > Online Books). For more information about the entire IRIX Interactive Desktop environment,...
launchESPartner is a utility that brings up SGI Embedded Support Partner User Interface. A web based User Interface requires a html browser (Netscape or Lynx) to operate. The User Interface provides access to all SGI Embedded Support Partner facilities. Please refer to esp(5) for a detailed description of Embedded Support Partner and available facilities. launchESPartner can be invoked either by double-clicking the Embedded Support Partner icon (located in Icon Catalog > Support Tools folder) or...
The launchWebJumper script opens a webjumper or URL into the user's Web browser. The script runs when the user chooses Internet > Open Web Browser on the toolchest or double-clicks a webjumper(1) icon. Also the user can run it at a Unix shell command line. -n Use Netscape, ignoring the user's chosen Web browser. The optional jumpsite and URL arguments specify which page(s) to load. Each page appears in a separate browser window. Given no arguments, launchWebJumper opens the user's chosen Web ...
The lboot command is used to configure a bootable UNIX kernel. Master files in the directory master contain configuration information used by lboot when creating a kernel. System files in the directory system are used by lboot to determine which modules are to be configured into the kernel. If a module in master is specified in the system file via "INCLUDE:", that module is included in the bootable kernel. For all included modules, lboot searches the boot directory for an object file with the ...
Applications that would like to take advantage of the Low Bandwidth extension to X (LBX) must make their connections to an lbxproxy. These applications need to know nothing about LBX, they simply connect to the lbxproxy as if were a regular server. The lbxproxy accepts client connections, multiplexes them over a single connection to the X server, and performs various optimizations on the X protocol to make it faster over low bandwidth and/or high latency connections. With regard to authenticatio...
Ld, the link editor, links Elf object files. The archive format ld uses is the one created by the archiver ar(1). ld is normally invoked by cc(1), although it can be run separately. When ld is used as part of a cc compilation, the ld options must be passed via the -Wl mechanism. See cc(1) for details of -Wl. The ld command combines several object files into one, performs relocation, resolves external symbols, builds tables and relocation information for run-time linkage in case of shared linking...
IRIX systems DESCRIPTION: The runtime dynamic linker loads the object (an executable or DSO) and all of the libraries reporting what libraries were loaded. But does not execute the program or DSO. This is to make it easy to detect what libraries are loaded by an executable without having to run it. Options: -a rldargs Sets the environment variable _RLD_ARGS to the string rldargs before executing the runtime linker (rld). -D Does not on delay-loaded DSOs....
NOTE: When the environment variable _XPG is a value greater than 0 (zero), lex execs the POSIX compliant /usr/bin/flex. The lex command generates programs to be used in simple lexical analysis of text. The input files (standard input default) contain strings and expressions to be searched for and C text to be executed when these strings are found. lex processes supplementary code set characters in program c...
lfmt uses format for printf style formatting of args. lfmt encapsulates the output in the standard error message format and displays the output on stderr. In addition, lfmt forwards its output to the logging and monitoring facility. The following options are available. -c Also write the output to the console logger device (/dev/conslog), with a date and time stamp. This device is not normally used wit...
The RX Plug-in may be used with Netscape Navigator (3.0 or later) to interpret documents in the RX MIME type format and start remote applications. The RX Plug-in reads an RX document, from which it gets the list of services the application wants to use. Based on this information, the RX Plug-in sets the various requested services, including creating authorization keys if your X server supports the SECURITY extension. It then passes the relevant data, such as the X display name, to the applicatio...
When executed without file arguments, License Manager displays the Main Window, which provides a complete graphical interface for viewing, installing, upgrading, and removing FLEXlm and NetLS software licenses. The optional argument -vendor is used to specify the vendor mode, which customizes the License Manager interface for a specific vendor. The vendor mode determines the default values of license entry fields, the location of the license files, and the location of licensing server startup sc...
line copies one line (up to a new-line) from the standard input and writes it on the standard output. It returns an exit code of 1 on EOF and always prints at least a new-line. It is often used within shell files to read from the user's terminal.
The link command is used to create a filename that points to another file. The unlink command is used to remove a link to a file. The only difference between ln(1) and link(1M) is that the latter simply makes the link(2) system call with the arguments specified. No error checking is performed. Analogously, unlink(1M) simply calls the unlink(2) system call with the specified pathname. Use of these commands is discouraged. The commands ln(1), rm(1), and rmdir(1) provide the necessary functionality...
linkstat reports on router link performance and error rates. It also reports error rates on the Hub chip Craylink network interface (NI) and I/O Interface (II) links.
lint detects features of C program files which are likely to be bugs, non-portable, or wasteful. It also checks type usage more strictly than the compiler. lint issues error and warning messages. Among the things it detects are unreachable statements, loops not entered at the top, automatic variables declared and not used, and logical expressions whose value is constant. lint checks for functions that return values in some places and not in others, functions c...
listAllDiskFS checks all local fixed disks for filesystems, and for each filesystem found reports its partition type, filesystem type, size, free space, and mount directory, if any. This privcmd is used by the FilesystemManager which can't access the information directly because root privilege is required to read the disk header.
The listen port monitor ``listens'' to a network for service requests, accepts requests when they arrive, and invokes servers in response to those service requests. The network listener process may be used with any connection-oriented network (more precisely, with any connectionoriented transport provider) that conforms to the Transport Interface (TLI) specification. The listener internally generates a pathname for the minor device for each connection; it is this pathname tha...
listPrinters is a privileged command that gets a list of printers which are connected to host-name. The list is written to standard output, one printer per line. listPrinters works by running /usr/lib/print/listprinters. listPrinters is a separate program because /usr/lib/print/listprinters must be run as root in order to work properly; listPrinters is used to grant users the "list printers" privilege....
The listres program generates a list of a widget's resource database. The class in which each resource is first defined, the instance and class name, and the type of each resource is listed. If no specific widgets or the -all switch are given, a two-column list of widget names and their class hierarchies is printed. This internationalized version listres uses the internationalized Athena Widget Set. And so it generates a list of the internationalized Widget....
listRootBackups is a privileged command that uses at(1M) and crontab(1M) to get information about backups which have been scheduled by the superuser. This is a privileged command because ordinary users cannot get information about the super-user's at and cron jobs. It is installed as a default privilege. The output format is one line per at backup consisting of the at identifier followed by the backup command, a blank line, and then one line per cron backup consisting of the cron line for that ...
The List_tape command lists the contents of a system backup tape made with Backup(1), cpio(1), tar(1), or bru(1). If a tape drive attached to a remote host is used, the name of the remote host needs to be specified with the -h hostname option on the command line. For remote listing to successfully work, the user should have a TCP/IP network connection to the remote host and also have "guest" rsh privileges on that host. If the local or remote tape device is pointed to by a device file other th...
lltune is a utility which either: o puts a set of lapb parameters to the lapb driver, o gets a set of lapb parameters from the lapb driver, o puts a set of llc2 parameters to the llc2 driver, or o gets a set of llc2 parameters from the llc2 driver. By default, a get operation is performed. These parameters are on a per-subnetwork basis and thus, the subnetwork identifier must be specified. The options used in lltune are the following: -s subnet_id subnet_id is the subnetwork to be referenced. -p...
lmcksum will perform a checksum of a license file. This is useful to verify data entry errors at your location. lmcksum will print a line-byline checksum for the file as well as an overall file checksum. lmcksum takes the -k switch to force the encryption key checksum to be casesensitive. lmcksum will ignore all fields that do not enter into the encryption key computation; thus the server node name and port number, the vendor daemon and options file paths, and lowercase keyword=value pairs on FE...
lmdiag diagnoses problems when license checkout fails. If no feature is specified, lmdiag will operate on all features in the license file(s) in your path. lmdiag will first print information about the license, then attempt to checkout each license. If the checkout succeeds, lmdiag will indicate this. If the checkout fails, lmdiag will give you the reason for the failure. The the failure is a failed connection to the server, you will have the option of running extended connection diagnostics....
lmdown sends a message to every license daemon asking it to shut down. The license damons write out their last messages to the log file, close the file, and exit. All licenses which have been given out by those daemons will rescinded, so that the next time a client program goes to verify his license, it will not be valid. NOTE: In FLEXlm v2.4 and later, lmdown is either a link or a copy of the lmutil program. (On VMS, lmdown is still a separate program)....
lmhostid calls the FLEXlm version of gethostid and displays the results. The output of lmhostid looks like this: lmhostid - Copyright (C) 1989, 1990 Highland Software, Inc. The FLEXlm host ID of this machine is "1200abcd"
When executed with an argument, lmparthostids will print the lmhostid for each possible partition of the current system. The optional sysid argument may be used to compute lmhostids for an arbitrary system.
lmremove allows the system administrator to remove a single user's license for a specified feature. This could be required in the case where the licensed user was running the software on a node that subsequently crashed. This situation will sometimes cause the license to remain unusable. lmremove will allow the license to return to the pool of available licenses.
lmreread allows the system administrator to tell the license daemon to reread the license file. This can be useful if the data in the license file has changed; the new data can be loaded into the license daemon without shutting down and restarting it. lmreread uses the license file from the command line (or the default file, if none specified) only to find the license daemon to send it the command to reread the license file. The license daemon will always reread the original file that it loaded....
lmstat provides information about the status of the server nodes, vendor daemons, vendor features, and users of each feature. Information can be optionally be qualified by specific server nodes, vendor damons, or features.
lmswitchr switches the FLEXadmin REPORTLOG log file to a new file. The feature argument is to connect to the correct vendor-daemon. All feature log entries for that daemon are moved to the new file.
lmutil is the "general-purpose" FLEXlm utility program. Normally, endusers would not use lmutil directly, they would use the individual utility programs which are either a copy or a link to lmutil.
lmver scans the contents of a binary or library file for the FLEXlm version string and displays it. If no argument is given, lmver assumes the filename is "liblmgr.a" and attempts to find and display the version from that file.
The locale utility writes information about the current locale environment to the standard output. When locale is invoked without any arguments, it summarizes the current locale environment for each locale category as determined by the settings of the environment variables defined LANG, LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, LC_COLLATE, LC_MONETARY, LC_NUME...
The localedef utility converts source definitions for locale categories into the locale source files usable by the locale generators such as chrtbl, wchrtbl, colltbl, and montbl. It will then execute those generators to produce the locale runtime files LC_CTYPE, LC_COLLATE, and LC_MONETARY respectively. The lo...
lockd provides the inherently stateful locking services within the stateless NFS environment. It allows the locking of records and files between applications running on different physical machines sharing the same filesystems mounted with NFS. nservers is the number of lockd servers to start. Locks are presently advisory only. The lock style implemented by lockd is that specified in the SVID (see lockf(3C) and fcntl(2)). There is no interaction between the lockd's locks and flock(3B) style lock...
Logger provides a shell command interface to the syslog(3B) system log routine. It can log a message specified on the command line, from a specified file, or from the standard input. Each line in the specified file or standard input is logged separately. Logger has the following options: -i Log the process ID of the logger process with each line. -s Log the message to standard error, as well as the system log. -f file Log the contents of the specified file. -p pri Enter the message with the spec...
The login command is used at the beginning of each terminal session and allows you to identify yourself to the system. It is invoked by the system when a connection is first established. It is invoked by the system when a previous user has terminated the initial shell by typing a to indicate an end-of-file. If login is invoked as a command, it must replace the initial command interpreter. This is accomplished by typing exec login ...
lp arranges for the named files and associated information (collectively called a request) to be printed by a line printer. If no file names are mentioned, the standard input is assumed. The file name - stands for the standard input and may be supplied on the command line in conjunction with named files. The order in which files appear is the same order in which they will be printed. lp associates a unique id with each request and prints it on the standard output. This id can be used later to ca...
lpadmin configures line printer (LP) spooling systems to describe printers, classes and devices. It is used to add and remove destinations, change membership in classes, change devices for printers, change printer interface programs and to change the system default destination. Exactly one of the -p, -d or -x options must be present for every legal invocation of lpadmin. -pprinter names a printer to which all of the options below refer. If printer does not exist then it will be created. -xdest r...
lpenabled monitors the output device for the printer specified on the command line. An example output device is /dev/plp. Once the output device is writable (by lp) lpenabled will enable the printer using the enable(1) command. lpenabled is normally invoked by lpsched(1) when it can not open the output device and the output device. This can happen when the parallel port is connected to both a floppy drive and a printer on O2 systems. The parallel port will become available once the floppy is eje...
lpqserver is obsolete. The functionality is now available in spoolserv. The lpqserver is a server that provides information to the Macintosh K-Spool Monitor desk accessory. It accepts requests from Macintoshes, and responds with information gained by executing lpq(1) (for lpr systems) or lpstat(1) (for lp systems), or by attempting to read the various files in the printer's spool directory. The lpqserver is invoked with an argument naming an entry in the printcap(5) file. Flags include: -D turn...
lpsched schedules requests taken by lp(1) for printing on line printers (LP's). lpsched is normally invoked at boot time from the /etc/init.d/lp file. chkconfig (1M) can be used to enable or disable lpsched from starting ("chkconfig lp off" or "chkconfig lp on"). lpsched will normally fork to free the calling process. The -nofork option can be used to prevent lpsched from forking. Do NOT use -nofork in the /etc/init.d/lp file (the intended use is for debugging when running lpsched from a sh...
lpstat prints information about the current status of the LP spooling system. If no options are given, then lpstat prints the status of all requests made to lp(1) by the user. Any arguments that are not options are assumed to be request ids (as returned by lp). lpstat prints the status of such requests. Options may appear in any order and may be repeated and intermixed with other arguments. Some of the keyletters below may be followed by an optional list that can be in one of two forms: a list o...
lptops converts a text file into a PostScript file for printing on an Apple LaserWriter, or any other PostScript-compatible output device. It supports selection of a variety of fonts at arbitrary point sizes, margin specification, portrait and landscape page orientation, automatic page numbering, page outlining, and multi-column printing. This program is usually used to print ascii text files. However, it can also be used to print files which contain ISO 8859-1 characters. To print a file with I...
For each directory argument, ls lists the contents of the directory; for each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information requested. The output is sorted alphabetically by default. When arguments are not given, the current directory is listed. When several arguments are given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, but file arguments appear before directories and their contents. ls processes supplementary code set characters according to the locale speci...
lv_to_xlv parses the file describing the logical volumes used by the local machine and generates the required xlv_make(1M) commands to create an equivalent XLV volume. Normally, lv_to_xlv uses the logical volume file /etc/lvtab, but when the -f option is specified, the given argument lvtab_file is used. If the -o option is specified, the xlv_make(1M) commands are sent to the file output_file instead of stdout....
The m4 command is a macro processor intended as a front end for C, assembler, and other languages. Each of the argument files is processed in order; if there are no files, or if a file name is -, the standard input is read. The processed text is written on the standard output. m4 processes supplementary code set characters in comments and literals according to the locale specified in the LC_CTYPE environment variable [see LANG on envi
The mactest command allows the current process and specified files/directories to have their MAC label attributes compared for dominance, equality and moldyness. mactest evaluates the MAC labels using the given options and returns a boolean result. The options P, F, L and M determine the type of test: -P Compare current running process and file. -F Compare two files. -L Compare MAC label and file. -M Check if the process or directory is moldy. The options D, d, e and x determine the type of comp...
Mail.local reads the standard input up to an end-of-file and appends it to each user's mail file. The user must be a valid user name. The options are as follows: -f from Specify the sender's name. Individual mail messages in the mailbox are delimited by an empty line followed by a line beginning with the string ``From ''. A line containing the string ``From '', the sender's name and a time stamp is prepended to each delivered mail message. A blank line is appended to each message. A great...
mailbox watches your mailbox, and notifies you when you have mail. It displays a small picture of a mailbox to perform notification. The flag on the mailbox rises whenever new mail messages appear in your mailbox. You can open the mailbox and read your mail by clicking on the mailbox window with the left mouse button. If one of the shift keys is held down, or if you have no mail, the mailbox door simply opens without running the mail reading program. Once you have finished reading your mail, the...
Mailq prints a summary of the mail messages queued for future delivery. The first line printed for each message shows the internal identifier used on this host for the message, the size of the message in bytes, the date and time the message was accepted into the queue, and the envelope sender of the message. The second line shows the error message that caused this message to be retained in the queue; it will not be present if the message is being processed for the first time. The following lines...
The mailstats utility displays the current mail statistics. First, the time at which statistics started being kept is displayed, in the format specified by ctime(3). Then, the statistics for each mailer are displayed on a single line, each with the following whitespace separated fields: M The mailer number. msgsfr Number of messages from the mailer. bytes_from Kbytes from the mailer. msgsto Number of messages to the mailer. bytes_to Kbytes to the mailer. msgsrej Number of messages rejected. msgs...
mailx is an interactive mail processing system, which has a command syntax reminiscent of ed with lines replaced by messages. Send Mode can be used by applications or users to send messages from the text in standard input. Receive Mode is more oriented to interactive users. Mail can be read and sent in this interactive mode. When reading mail, mailx provides commands to facilitate saving, deleting and responding to messages. When sending mail, mailx allows editing, reviewing and other modificati...
Sending Mail The command-line arguments that follow affect SENDING mail: An address can be any one of the following: 1) An RFC 822-compliant address specification (i.e. ``user@host.domain''). 2) A UUCP route (i.e. ``host1!host2!user''). 3) A local user name or alias. When addresses are specified, mail assumes a message is being sent. It reads the text of the message from standard input up to an end-of-file (control-d), or until it reads a line consisting of just a period. When either of thos...
Mail is an interactive mail processing system, which has a command syntax reminiscent of ed with lines replaced by messages. The -v flag puts Mail into verbose mode; the details of delivery are displayed on the users terminal. The -i flag causes tty interrupt signals to be ignored. This is particularly useful when using Mail on noisy phone lines. The -n flag inhibits the reading of /usr/lib/Mail.rc. Sending mail. To send a message to one or more other people, Mail can be invoked with arguments w...
The make utility can be used as a part of software development to update files that are derived from other files. A typical case is one where object files are derived from the corresponding source files. The make utility examines time relationships and updates those derived files (called targets) that have modified times earlier than the modified times of the files (called prerequisites) from which they are derived. A description file (makefile) contains a description of the relationships betwee...
MAKEDEV creates specified device files in the current directory; it is primarily used for constructing the /dev directory. It is a "makefile" processed by the make(1) command. Its arguments can be either targets in the file or assignments overriding parameters defined in the file. The targets alldevs and owners are assumed if no other targets are present (see below). All devices are created relative to the current directory, so this command is normally executed from /dev. In order to create th...
To work properly, the IRIX Interactive Desktop (IID) requires the directory $HOME/.desktop- to exist when the user logs into a host named . This directory is referred to as the desktop configuration or dot desktop directory. The makeDotDesktop program lets users choose whether their desktop configuration should be the same as or different from their desktop configurations on other systems. makeDotDesktop runs at login from the /usr/lib/X11/xdm/Xsession.dt script. The user can...
makeIconVisuals chooses a set of visuals based on the hardware to provide good-looking IRIX Interactive Desktop icons that use a minimum of memory and avoid colormap flashing. This program is run from the file /usr/lib/X11/xdm/Xsession.dt at user login. Users should normally not run this command directly. For more information about the entire IRIX Interactive Desktop environment, see the IID(1) man page. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111...
makekey improves the usefulness of encryption schemes depending on a key by increasing the amount of time required to search the key space. It reads 10 bytes from its standard input, and writes 13 bytes on its standard output. The output depends on the input in a way intended to be difficult to compute (i.e., to require a substantial fraction of a second). The first eight input bytes (the input key) can be arbitrary ASCII characters. The last two (the salt) are best chosen from the set of digits...
A colormap is a mapping from color-index values (integers) into RGB values. All GL programs (graphics programs linked with libgl) share a common X colormap, which is distinct from the default X root colormap. Essentially, makemap causes a certain set of colors to be assigned to the GL colormap (which is just another X colormap as far as the X server is concerned). Although there may be multiple X colormaps defined in the system at any one time, only one of these X colormaps is installed (loaded ...
makemdbm takes infile and converts it to a file in mdbm(3B) format. Each line of the input file is converted to a single mdbm record. All characters up to the first tab or space form the key, and the rest of the line is the data. If a line ends with \, then the data for that record is continued on to the next line. It is left for the clients of the network information service (NIS) to interpret #; makedbm does not itself treat it as a comment character. infile can be -, in which case standard i...
makemovie is used to take image and audio data in a variety of forms and put them into a movie file that can be edited with moviemaker or viewed with movieplayer. The -o option must be used to specify the file in which the resulting movie will be placed. Image and audio data are taken from the input files in the order listed; this ordering determines the order in which they will appear when the movie is played. The options -c, -l, -i, -t, -r, -s, -b, -q, -p, -k, and -a can be used to set the com...
makepsres creates PostScript language resource database files. Resource database files can be used to specify the location of resources that are used by the font selection panel and other Adobe software. For a complete description of the resource location facilities in the Display PostScript system, see Appendix A and Appendix B of "Display PostScript Toolkit for X" in Programming the Display PostScript System with X. makepsres creates a resource database file named PSres.upr that contains all...
makewhatis scans the manual page (also known as reference page) trees, parses the manual pages, and strips out the NAME section information to create the "whatis" database used by apropos(1), man(1), and whatis(1). By default, makewhatis creates the file /usr/share/catman/whatis. Another file can be created as the database by specifying its filename on the command line. An alternate manual page tree can be specified by using the -M option to specify a path or paths to a manual page tree or tre...
This tool is part of the Samba suite. make_smbcodepage compiles or de-compiles codepage files for use with the internationalization features of Samba 2.2
This tool is part of the Samba suite. make_unicodemap compiles text unicode map files into binary unicode map files for use with the internationalization features of Samba 2.2.
man locates and prints the titled entries from the on-line reference manuals. man also prints summaries of manual entries selected by keyword or by associated filename. If a section is given, only that particular section is searched for the specified title. The current list of valid sections are any single digit [0-9], the letter 'D', plus the sections local, public, new, and old, corresponding to the sections l, p, n, and o, respectively. When a section name of this form is given, the first c...
maze is a fun 3d game that will test your ability to navigate a marble through a 3d maze by tilting the floor of the maze. The object of the game is to maneuver the marble through the entire maze without falling into any of the holes. There is only one path through the maze and it is NOT marked. Use the left mouse to control the tilt of the maze floor. You can adjust the view of maze by pressing the right mouse button and choosing the Decoration on menu button. This will add some additional butt...
The mcogamma command allows the setting of the gamma lookup table directly for each output of the MultiChannel Option. This command affects the MultiChannel Option only, and has no effect on the standard graphics output.
mdbm_remove will perform mdbm_invalidate and unlink on the listed files. mdbm_remove will NOT remove files that are not mdbm databases. This command is needed to remove any mdbm file where there may be a process that has opened the mdbm file. The mdbm_invalidate call will cause any process to close the mdbm file on their next access.
mediaconvert is a graphical tool for converting between different audio, image, and movie file formats. Internally, mediaconvert invokes the command-line conversion utility dmconvert(1). -b Causes mediaconvert to print status and debug information. This includes the command-line that is used to invoke dmconvert(1). mediaconvert, formerly called moviemaster, replaces the soundfiler and movieconvert tools that shipped in previous releases. It provides a superset of the file conversion functionalit...
mediad is a daemon that monitors the removable media devices on a system. When media is inserted, mediad scans the media for filesystems and mounts them. When a user issues the eject command, eject sends mediad a message, and mediad dismounts the filesystems and ejects the media. N.B.: Because data corruption and loss will occur if media is forcibly removed without unmounting any filesystems present on the media, always eject disk media using either the eject command or the Eject selection in th...
mediarecorder is a graphical tool to record digital media files from the camera, microphone, external video and audio hardware, and workstation screen. To supplement the discussion below, you may wish to consult the online help, accessible from the Help menu within the tool. mediarecorder records three different types of files: movie files (such as QuickTime), still image files (such as TIFF, JFIF or GIF), and audio files (such as AIFF/AIFC). You can record movie or still image files from the sy...
memleak is a utility that generates a report describing possible memory leaks in the operating system. It is intended to be used only by those involved in writing and debugging device drivers or other parts of the kernel. There are times when zone memory growth is normal. Someone involved with writing and debugging kernel or device driver modules will know when the growth is normal. namelist contains symbol table information needed for symbolic access to the system memory image being examined. T...
merge incorporates all changes that lead from file2 to file3 into file1. The result goes to standard output if -p is present, into file1 otherwise. merge is useful for combining separate changes to an original. Suppose file2 is the original, and both file1 and file3 are modifications of file2. Then merge combines both changes. A conflict occurs if both file1 and file3 have changes in a common segment of lines. If a conflict is found, merge normally outputs a warning and brackets the conflict wit...
The mergeOPTIONS program accepts data from stdin (or a single optional file) and sends it to stdout. Its primary purpose is to merge queue or user-specific PostScript options into the postscript stream. In addition, in many types of printers, mergeOPTIONS is responsible for performing accounting and performance timing. The flags are defined as follows: -u specifies the user who sent the job. This determines what printer-specific options are sent when the job originates on Unix. -p specifies the ...
mesg with argument n forbids messages via write(1) , talk or other utilities by revoking non-user write permission on the user's terminal. The terminal affected is determined by searching for the first terminal in the sequence of devices associated with standard input, standard output and standard error, respectively. mesg with argument y reinstates permission. All by itself, mesg reports the current state without changing it. Processes with appropriate privileges may be able to send messages t...
midikeys provides a 3D graphical MIDI keyboard controller interface used to transmit events to an external MIDI device or the internal software MIDI synthesizer. The MIDI Controllers panel is used to transmit a plethora of MIDI controllers and monitor incoming data. MIDI note data is transmitted by clicking the mouse on the music keyboard or pressing the computer keyboard keys. See the OnLine book for the computer keyboard to note mapping scheme. The position of the mouse button click controls t...
midisynth is a program which listens on the MIDI input port and generates sounds in real time in response to MIDI events. midisynth has the following command-line options, most with a short and long form as indicated: -h help Print list of options. -a allMIDI Listen to all MIDI inputs. Default is to listen to only the 'Software Synth' port. -bank Use as the default GM preset bank. Default is /usr/share/data/sounds/synth/presets/GeneralMIDI_SoundSetLevel1 -chans N Open an ...
Miser starts the miser daemon. Miser is a deterministic batch scheduling facility that can be used to balance batch and interactive cpu and memory usage.
The miser_jinfo command is used to query the schedule/description of a job that has already been scheduled by miser(1) If the specified job exists and miser(1) is running, miser_jinfo will return the schedule in the same format as miser_submit(1).
The miser_kill command is used to terminate a miser job. The command sends a SIGKILL to the job and all it's children. Upon termination of the job, the reserved resources are freed immediately. A miser job that is killed using other mechanisms, may not properly cleanup all it's children and/or the committed resources.
The miser_move command removes a tuple of space from the source queue's vector and adds it to the destination queue's vector beginning at the start time and ending at the end time. The resources added or removed do not change the vector definition and are, therefore, temporary. The command returns a table that lists the start and end times of each resource transfer and the amount of resources transfered....
The miser_qinfo command is used to retrieve information about the free resources of a queue, the names of all miser queues, and to query all jobs currently scheduled against a particular queue.
The miser_reset command is used to force a running version of miser to use a new configuration file (the format of the configuration file is detailed in miser(4) ). The new configuration will succeed if and only if all currently scheduled jobs can be successfully scheduled against the new configuration. If the attempt at creating a new configuration fails, then miser(1) retains the old configuration. The miser_reset will fail if the requested new miser configuration oversubscribes the resources ...
The miser_submit command is used to submit a job (the command) to a miser(1) queue. A job is an application that will be scheduled by miser. Any application that does not change its session ID or change its process group ID can be submitted to a miser queue. For an application to be properly submitted to a miser(1) queue, it needs to specify its resource schedule. A resource schedule is a list of resource specifications, called segments, that define the resource requirements of a particular job....
mkboottape is used to build, list, or extract "boot tape filesystems". Booting from tape is no longer supported. However, the tape filesystem format is still used in the sa file used in booting from CDROM. A tape filesystem consists of a special directory that contains the list of filenames, sizes, and offsets, and from one to 20 files. Filenames can be up to 16 characters in length. The following options are understood: -l List the contents of the boot tape. In this case the file arguments ar...
mkbsdnetpr provides access on a local machine to a printer that is connected to a networked remote machine. The BSD printing protocols are used to communicate with the remote machine. mkbsdnetpr can be run either interactively or in batch mode. mkbsdnetpr will run interactively if any or all of its command line arguments have not been specified. mkbsdnetpr will prompt for any missing command line arguments. local printer name is the name you wish to give the printer on your machine (see lpadmin ...
mkcentpr installs a printer with a parallel interface for use with the System V printer spooling system. mkcentpr is an interactive installation program that will display available options and prompt for the relevant installation parameters. You must be root to execute mkcentpr. The program first asks for the name you wish to give the printer. This name must be no more than fourteen characters. See lpadmin(1M) for more information on naming printers. After entering a name for the printer, the pr...
Mkdepend infers make(1) dependencies from source containing C #include directives. It invokes cc(1) with the -M option to compile dependencies given a list of source files, and edits the generated dependency information into depfile, which may be a makefile or a make include file. The -c option substitutes compiler, which may be an elaborate, quoted invocation of a compiler, for the default cc -M. This option is useful in an environment where the -D and -I options of cc are used to govern header...
mkdir creates the specified directories in mode 777 [possibly altered by umask(1)]. Standard entries in a directory, ., for the directory itself, and .., for its parent are made automatically. mkdir cannot create these entries by name. Creation of a directory requires write permission in the parent directory. The owner ID and group ID of the new directories are set to the process's real user ID and group ID, respectively. The mkd...
mkf2c is used to generate assembly-language routines to provide greater flexibility when calling a C function from a FORTRAN routine. Mkf2c accepts as input a set of C functions, and produces an assemblylanguage interface routine in the output file. If the input and output files are not specified, mkf2c reads from stdin and writes to stdout. The input may be a copy of the actual C file being interfaced, perhaps filtered by the program extcentry(1). The output of mkf2c is an assembly-language (.s...
mkfifo creates the FIFO special files named by its argument list. The arguments are taken sequentially, in the order specified; and each FIFO special file is either created completely or, in the case of an error or signal, not created at all. For each path argument, the mkfifo command behaves as if the function mkfifo [see mkfifo(2)] was called with the argument path set to path and the mode set to the bitwise inclusive OR o...
mkfile creates one or more files. The file is padded with zeroes by default. The default size is in bytes, but it can be flagged as kilobytes, blocks, megabytes, or gigabytes with the k, b, m, or g suffixes, respectively.
For each directory argument, mkfontdir reads all of the font files in the directory searching for properties named "FONT", or (failing that) the name of the file stripped of its suffix. These are converted to lower case and used as font names, and, along with the name of the font file, are written out to the file "fonts.dir" in the directory. The X server and font server use "fonts.dir" to find font files. The kinds of font files read by mkfontdir depend on configuration parameters, but ty...
mkfp is a formatting/partitioning utility that can be used to create DOS and HFS file systems on devices such as floppy, floptical, SuperDisk (LS-120), SyQuest, Jaz, Zip and hard drives. It also works on PC Cards. mkfp is capable of creating single DOS partitions on floppies and floptical disks as well as multiple DOS partitions on other forms of media. On the other hand, mkfp can only create single HFS partitions spanning entire disks. mkfp can NOT be used to manipulate existing partitions on d...
mkfs constructs a filesystem by writing on the special file given as one of the command line arguments. The filesystem constructed is either an EFS filesystem or an XFS filesystem depending on the arguments given. mkfs constructs EFS filesystems by executing mkfs_efs(1M); XFS filesystems are constructed by executing mkfs_xfs(1M). The filesystem type chosen can be forced with the -t option (also spelled -F). If one of those options is not given, mkfs determines which filesystem type to construct ...
mkfsXfs is a wrapper around mkfs_xfs that facilitates granting access to it as a privileged command. It makes an xfs filesystem on the given device. The details of the other parameters are the same as for mkfs_xfs.
mkfs_efs constructs a filesystem by writing on the special file using the values found in the remaining arguments of the command line. Normally mkfs_efs prints the parameters of the filesystem to be constructed; the -q flag suppresses this. If the -i flag is given, mkfs_efs asks for confirmation after displaying the parameters of the filesystem to be constructed. In it's simplest (and most commonly used form), the size of the filesystem is determined from the disk driver. As an example, to make...
mkfs_xfs constructs an XFS filesystem by writing on a special file using the values found in the arguments of the command line. It is invoked automatically by mkfs(1M) when mkfs is given the -t xfs option, options that are specific to XFS, or no options that are specific to EFS. In its simplest (and most commonly used form), the size of the filesystem is determined from the disk driver. As an example, to make a filesystem on partition 7 (all of the useable portion of an option drive, normally) o...
The mkmsgs utility is used to create a file of text strings that can be accessed using the text retrieval tools [see gettxt(1), srchtxt(1), exstr(1), and gettxt(3C)]. It will take as input a file of text strings for a particular geographic locale [see setlocale(3C)] and create a file of text strings in a format that can be retrieved by both gettxt(1) and ge...
mknetpr provides access on a local machine to a printer that is connected to a networked remote machine. mknetpr can be run either interactively or in batch mode. mknetpr will run interactively if any or all of its command line arguments have not been specified. If run interactively mknetpr will first query the user and display: Spool files: 1. To another SGI workstation? 2. A printer connected to a non-SGI workstation that supports the BSD printing protocols (files will be converted to PostScri...
mknod makes a directory entry and corresponding inode for a special file or named pipe. The first argument is the name of the entry to create. In the first form of the command, the second argument is b if the special file describes a block device (disks, tape) or c if it is a character device (for example, a tty line). The last two arguments are numbers specifying the major device number and the minor device number (for example, the unit, drive, or line number). They may be either decimal or oct...
mkpart is the partition administration tool for the Origin 3000 series of servers. It provides the System Administrator with capabilities to list current partitions, re-configure the system into multiple partitions, and to re-initialize, or unpartition, the system. You must have superuser privilege to use this command. If the system is configured as CAP_NO_SUPERUSER, you must have effective capabilities of CAP_SHUTDOWN, CAP_DEVICE_MGT and CAP_SYSINFO_MGT. All the affected partitions have to be r...
mkserialpr installs a printer with a serial interface for use with the System V printer spooling system. mkserialpr is an interactive installation program that will display available options and prompt for the relevant installation parameters. You must be root to execute mkserialpr. The program first asks for the name you wish to give the printer. This name must be no more than fourteen characters. See lpadmin(1M) for more information on naming printers. After entering a name for the printer, th...
Mkstr is used to create files of error messages. Its use can make programs with large numbers of error diagnostics much smaller, and reduce system overhead in running the program as the error messages do not have to be constantly swapped in and out. Mkstr will process each of the specified files, placing a massaged version of the input file in a file whose name consists of the specified prefix and the original name. To process the error messages in the source to the message file mkstr keys on th...
The ml command provides a means of loading and unloading dynamic kernel modules. The first argument to ml specifies its action from one of the following: list, load, unload, register, unregister. With no options, ml acts as if it were invoked as ml list -b. The ld, unld, reg, and unreg options are available only to the superuser. If successful, the ml command executes silently, unless the -v option is specified. ml list provides a list of modules that are currently known by the kernel. The follo...
mmail2nsmail copies files and directories from a specified folder directory ($HOME/Mail unless the user changes this when prompted) to $HOME/nsmail, where Netscape Messenger expects folders to reside when using Movemail. mmail2nsmail does not alter or delete any files in the original folder directory. If the folder already exists in $HOME/nsmail, the folder will not be copied over and a message will be displayed. Files in detach.dir and index.dir directories will not be copied over. If there are...
mmscd is a daemon run by /etc/rc2.d/S33sn0start. It handles all necessary communications with an Origin2000 system's Multi-Module System Controller (MMSC). An MMSC is usually connected to systems composed of more than one module (one or more racks). The MMSC controls power sequencing and fan speed, monitors system sensors, and drives the LCD front panel. mmscd works with the MMSC to run the CPU activity meter on the front panel, perform controlled normal or emergency system shutdowns, and handl...
This command mounts the /proc filesystem. /proc is the new name for the /debug filesystem. See proc(4) for a detailed description of the /proc filesystem. This filesystem is mounted at system boot time by the brc(1M) startup script. /proc should never be unmounted. The system automatically unmounts the /proc filesystem during a reboot(1M).
This is the standard interpreter for executing Tcl Motif programs. Specialised versions of this may be built, or it can have Tcl extensions added to it. The moat interpreter is an extension to the Tcl interpreter tclsh. If it is run with no file argument it reads commands from standard input. If it is run with a file argument (which is a file name not beginning with a `-' sign) it reads and executes commands from that file. The options are the standard Xt options, which typically consist of an ...
This command is used by the Printer Manager and other utilities (mkcentpr(1m), mknetpr(1m), mkserialpr(1M)) to build a list of supported printers. When modelinfo is first run it creates the file /var/spool/lp/modelinfo.dat which contains the modelinfo output. The contents of this file are also printed to standard out. The directories /var/spool/lp/model and /var/spool/lp/PPD_model are searched to determine supported printers. (/var/spool/lp/PPD_model will only exist if the Impressario PPD driver...
modifyPermissionsAndOwnership modifies the permissions and/or ownership of files and directories using chown(1) and chmod(1). The modifyPermissionsAndOwnership command requires at least one set of modifications and one set of files. These sets must be non-empty. Each pair of modifications and the files they should be applied to should be separated by commas. The modifications can be specified as follows (at least one is required): -u Specifies the changes to make to the user permission...
Modify an existing user account and do associated handling of user files if needed. The modifyUserAccount command has the following required parameter: -l login-name The login name of the user account to modify The modifyUserAccount command has the following optional parameters: -P Indicates that the account password is to be replaced with a new password. The command will prompt the user for the new password. This option may not be used in conjunction with -N or with -R. -N Indicates that the ac...
modinfofltr is used to parse the data found in the file /var/spool/lp/modelinfo.dat. (See the modelinfo(1m) man page for information about the modelinfo.dat file.) modinfofltr reads input from standard in and writes to standard out. modinfofltr is used by various script files to present a menu of printer choices for the user to select....
monpanel provides a graphical interface to control the backlight level of the Presenter display, to switch the display between high and low color resolution, to turn on the Presenter display when the display was not connected at boot time, and to restart the Presenter display when the display has been disconnected.
The montbl command takes as input a specification file, infile, that describes the formatting conventions for monetary quantities for a specific locale. -o outfile Write the output on outfile; otherwise, write the output on a file named LC_MONETARY. The output of montbl is suitable for use by the localeconv function [see localeconv(3C)]. Before outfile can be used b...
more is a filter that displays the contents of a file on the terminal, one screenful at a time. After each screenful more prints a prompt and pauses awaiting user commands. The prompt usually contains the name of the file and an indication (percentage) of the current location within the file. more scrolls up to display one more line in response to a RETURN character; it displays another screenful in response to a SPACE character. Other commands are listed belo...
mount attaches a named filesystem fsname to the filesystem hierarchy at the pathname location dir. The directory dir must already exist. It becomes the name of the newly mounted root. The contents of dir are hidden until the filesystem is unmounted. If fsname is of the form host:path, the filesystem type is assumed to be nfs. umount unmounts a currently mounted filesystem, which can be specified either as a mounted-on directory or a filesystem. mount and umount maintain a table of mounted filesy...
This command mounts all filesystems listed in /etc/fstab. It can be executed only by the superuser. Before each filesystem is mounted, it is checked using fsstat(1M) to see if it appears mountable. If the filesystem does not appear mountable, it is checked, using fsck(1M), before the mount is attempted.
mountd is an rpc(4) server that answers rpc filesystem mount/umount requests. One such sender of the requests is autofs. mountd reads the file /etc/xtab (described in exportfs(1M)) to determine which filesystems are available to which machines and users. It also provides information as to which clients have filesystems mounted. This information is stored in the servers /etc/rmtab file and can be accessed using the showmount(1M) command. The mountd daemon is normally invoked by inetd(1M)....
The mount_kfs program is an AppleShare mounter. It lets the user mount volumes from AppleShare servers on UNIX file systems. Mounted file systems "look" like K-AShare volumes; i.e., data forks appear as normal UNIX files, resource forks appear in a special resource directory (.HSResource), Macintosh desktop info (file type, creator, comments etc.) is stored in a desktop database (.HSancillary), and Macintosh ASCII characters in file names are mapped to hexadecimal equivalents. In general, user...
mouse allows the user to modify mouse acceleration, mapping (left- or right-handed), and click speed (delay between clicks in a double-click). The user can launch this panel from the toolchest (Desktop > Customize > Mouse) or at a Unix shell command line. Like most other customization panels, the mouse panel has the ``runonce'' feature, meaning only one instance of the application will run at one time. Attempting to launch the application a second time will have the effect of deiconifying the ...
mediaplayer, also known as movieplayer for backwards compatibility, is a player application for SGI, QuickTime, AVI and MPEG-1 movie files, as well as Audio files supported by the SGI audiofile library (eg, AIFF, AIFC, WAVE, MPEG1-audio, Sun .snd/Next .au, etc.). mediaplayer can be used as a stand-alone application with a graphic user interface for interactive control of the playback. It can also be used as a command line utility for launching playback from within other applications, such as IRI...
mpadmin provides control/information of processor status. Exactly one argument is accepted by mpadmin at each invocation. The following arguments are accepted: -n Report which processors are physically configured. The numbers of the physically configured processors are written to the standard output, one processor number per line. Processors are numbered beginning from 0. -u[processor] When no processor is specified, the numbers of the processors that are available to schedule unrestricted proce...
Mpc is a source-to-source C translator that transforms code containing parallel directives, inserted by pca(1) or by hand, into parallel C code containing calls to the C multiprocessing library. For further information on the types of directives that mpc implements, refer to the IRIS Power C User's Guide. Mpc is normally invoked as an option to cc(1), although it can be run separately. When mpc is used as part of a cc compilation, the mpc options must be passed via the -W (specifically, -WM) me...
Mrouted is an implementation of the Distance-Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP), an earlier version of which is specified in RFC-1075. It maintains topological knowledge via a distance-vector routing protocol (like RIP, described in RFC-1058), upon which it implements a multicast datagram forwarding algorithm called Reverse Path Multicasting. Mrouted forwards a multicast datagram along a shortest (reverse) path tree rooted at the subnet on which the datagram originates. The multicast deli...
mt is used to give commands to the magnetic tape drives. By default, mt performs the requested operation using /dev/nrtape. Normally the operations are performed once. Some operations may be performed multiple times by specifying count . For all others, count is ignored. count is parsed with the strtol(3) library routine, which means that values with leading 0's are taken as octal, those with leading 0x or 0x are taken to be hex, and other's are taken to be decimal. To use an alternate device,...
Assessing problems in the distribution of IP multicast traffic can be difficult. mtrace utilizes a tracing feature implemented in multicast routers (mrouted version 3.3 and later) that is accessed via an extension to the IGMP protocol. A trace query is passed hop-by-hop along the reverse path from the receiver to the source, collecting hop addresses, packet counts, and routing error conditions along the path, and then the response is returned to the requestor. The only required parameter is the ...
Mtrconfig is used to configure the Madge token ring specific parameters in each token ring interface. General network parameters, such as network address, are configured through ifconfig (1). Mtrconfig is invoked at boot time from /etc/init.d/network to start the token ring interface when it detects the existence of a Madge token ring PCI device. The default values defined in /var/sysgen/mtune/if_mtr are used for all the interfaces in the system. These values can be modified in /var/sysgen/stune...
multgrps creates a new shell process which is simultaneously a member of all groups to which the invoking user belongs. Every user belongs to a default group specified in /etc/passwd. Any additional group memberships are listed in the file /etc/group. Traditional System V allows processes to be in only one group at any given time; that group may be changed via the newgrp(1) command. A process has group access privileges only to the files whose group ID matches the process's current value. BSD a...
multi switches the system to multiuser mode if it was in singleuser mode or causes it to reread its /etc/inittab file and turn the appropriate gettys on and off. multi is a shell script that invokes /etc/telinit.
mvdir moves directories within a filesystem. dirname must be a directory. If name does not exist, it is created as a directory. If name does exist, dirname is created as name/dirname. dirname and name can not be on the same path; that is, one can not be subordinate to the other. For example: mvdir x/y x/z is legal, but mvdir x/y x/y/z is not....
The mwm window manager provides functions that facilitate control (by the user and the programmer) of elements of window state such as placement, size, icon/normal display, and input-focus ownership. The stand-alone window manager is not an integral part of CDE and does not support communication with other components in the CDE environment, such as the Style Manager and the Session Manager. Options -display display This option specifies the display to use; see X(1). -xrm resourcestring This opti...
The myzone command uses the AppleTalk Zone Information Protocol to look up the host's AppleTalk zone on the network by sending a Zone Inquiry to the nbpd(1m) daemon. The program then prints the reported zone. If the zone is reported as "*" it indicates that the nbpd(1m) daemon is malfunctioning. The zone returned is the default local zone which was specified as an argument to nbpd(1m) when it was started. Services that are not given a specific zone will be located in this zone....
named is the Internet domain name server. It replaces the original host table lookup of information in the network hosts file /etc/hosts. (See RFC1034 for more information on the Internet name-domain system.) named-xfer is invoked by named to transfer zone data from primary servers. named is started at system initialization if the configuration flag named is set on with chkconfig(1M). Without any arguments, named reads the default boot file /etc/named.boot, read any initial data and listen for q...
The nbpd daemon is a host daemon which manages AppleTalk Name Binding Protocol (NBP) requests and AppleTalk Zone Information Protocol (ZIP) requests. It listens on the well-known Names Information Socket for NBP lookup requests and on the ZIP socket for ZIP requests. The daemon maintains a table of named services registered by host processes and reports these services when requested by remote users. The nbpd daemon creates two files upon its invocation: /usr/adm/appletalk/names_table, the regist...
Nbpremove uses the AppleTalk Name Binding Protocol (NBP) to remove entity names that are registered with the local nbpd(1m). It is usually used to remove the name of a service that has exited irregularly (i.e., core dump). If the removal is successful, the pid of the process that registered the name is printed. If the -Z zone option is given, the removal will be for the specified AppleTalk zone; otherwise, the lookup will be in the local zone....
NCC (which is synonymous with CC -32) compiles C++ with a integrated compiler frontend (i.e. not a translator to C), using a conventional (cfront-compatible) code generation style. DCC, which refers to the old SGI Delta/C++ compiler, no longer compiles C++ source files using Delta/C++ style code generation, but rather, is also synonomous with CC -32) for compatibility. Both NCC and DCC produce only 32-bit executables. For more information, refer to the CC(1) man pages. Page 1 Release 6.4...
ncheck with no arguments generates a pathname and i-number list of all files on a set of default filesystems (see /etc/fstab). Names of directory files are followed by /.. The options are as follows: -i limits the report to only those files whose i-numbers follow. -a allows printing of the names . and .., which are ordinarily suppressed. -s limits the report to special files and files with setuserid mode. This option may be used to detect violations of security policy. filesystem must be specifi...
The Networked Dual-head Software Daemon, ndsd, enables a machine with ndsd software, the "slave" machine, to accept keyboard and mouse input from another machine on the network (the "master" machine). Conversely, a "master" machine with ndsd software can also be used to control applications on a remote "slave" machine. Various configuration options can be specified by command line options or in the ndsd configuration file /usr/nds/dh_config. Commands in the configuration file will overri...
Managers display information about your system and provide access to interactive guides (also called tasks) that let you administer your system. The Network Interface Manager displays a list of network interfaces, that are currently installed on your system. It also allows you to get the interface status, and configure an interface using the Set Up and Start Networking guide. In the Manager window, you can open a guide by choosing its name from the Task menu or by clicking its button at the bott...
netprint sends a print request to a printer on another host. netprint is used in the lp model file /var/spool/lp/model/netface to submit lp print jobs to remote printers.
When started, netscape will automatically load either the URL(s) specified on the command line, or the "home page" specified in the user preferences if no URL is given on the command line. On line help describing the configuration and use of netscape can be accessed by selecting Help Contents from the Help menu on the right hand side of the netscape menu bar....
Netsnoop captures packets which match an optional filter from a network interface or saved tracefile. If filter is omitted and no -e option is given, it captures packets promiscuously. For each packet, netsnoop prints decoded frames of protocol data on standard output. It stores captured packets in a buffer before decoding them; the default buffer size is one. After decoding buffered packets, netsnoop resumes capturing. Only the superuser can run netsnoop on a local network interface. Users acce...
The netstat command symbolically displays the contents of various network-related data structures. There are a number of output formats, depending on the options for the information presented. The first form of the command displays a list of active sockets for each protocol. The second form presents the contents of one of the other network data structures according to the option selected. Using the third form, with an interval specified, netstat will continuously display the information regardin...
The nettest and nettestd commands invoke client and server programs that are used for timing data throughput of various methods of interprocess communication. For TCP and OSI connections, the nettest program establishes a connection with the nettestd program, and then it does count writes of size bytes, followed by count reads of size bytes. For UDP, the nettest program performs only writes; reads are not performed. The nettestd program, if used with UDP connections, reads the data packets and p...
The network shell script is called during system startup from /etc/rc2 to initialize the standard and optional network devices and daemons. The script is called during system shutdown from /etc/rc0 to gracefully kill the daemons and inactivate the devices. When called with the start argument, the network script does the following, using the various configuration flags described below: o Defines the hostname and hostid based on the name in /etc/sys_id and its corresponding Internet address in /et...
Newaliases rebuilds the random access data base for the mail aliases file /etc/aliases. It must be run each time this file is changed in order for the change to take effect. Newaliases is identical to ``sendmail -bi''. The newaliases utility exits 0 on success, and >0 if an error occurs.
The newer command compares the modification times (in seconds since 00:00:00 UTC, Jan. 1, 1970) of the two files given as arguments. If file1 was modified more recently than file2, or if either file does not exist, then the newer command returns a status of 0. Otherwise it returns a status of 1. The /var/X11/xdm/Xsession.dt script uses the newer command. The newer command is not intended to be run directly by the end user, unless the user is writing shell scripts. For more information about the ...
The newfile program creates a new file with the prefix name (default: out) in the directory dir, but waits until there is enough available free disk space in the directory. The actual file created will have the pathname dir/name###sfx, where ### is an optional unique three-digit HEX number; i.e. newfile will not overwrite an existing file. There is no default sfx. The final complete pathname will be written on standard output. If the -d argument is given, newfile restricts the last component of ...
newform reads lines from the named files, or the standard input if no input file is named, and reproduces the lines on the standard output. Lines are reformatted in accordance with command line options in effect. Except for -s, command line options may appear in any order, may be repeated, and may be intermingled with the optional files. Command line options are processed in the order specified. This means that option sequences like ``-e15 -l60'' will yield results different from ``-l60 -e15'...
newgrp changes a user's group identification. The user remains logged in and the current directory is unchanged, but calculations of access permissions to files are performed with respect to the new real and effective group IDs. The user is always given a new shell, replacing the current shell, by newgrp, regardless of whether it terminated successfully or due to an error condition (i.e., unknown group). Exported variables retain their values after invoking newgrp; however, all unexported varia...
newlabel allows the user to run a process at another label without logging off. To prevent inappropriate transfers of information, all open file descriptors are closed before the new process is invoked. Unless the invoked by the Superuser with one or more of the -E, -F, -I, or -O options, the stdin, stdout, and stderr are closed and reopened after the label is changed. The default path used is /dev/tty, but may be changed with the -e, -f, -i, and -o options. If the path cannot be opened /dev/nul...
newproj changes the user's project identification to project. The user remains logged in and the current directory is unchanged, but all process and array session resource accounting will be performed with respect to the new project. If the change is successful, the user will be given a new shell. The original shell, and any processes it may have had running, will remain alive and associated with the original project. Thus, exiting the new shell will return the user to the original shell and or...
news is used to keep the user informed of current events. By convention, these events are described by files in the directory /var/news. When invoked without arguments, news prints the contents of all current files in /var/news, most recent first, with each preceded by an appropriate header. news stores the ``currency'' time as the modification date of a file named .news_time in...
The newsess command starts a new array session. The user remains logged in and the current directory is unchanged. If the change is successful, the user will be given a new shell. The original shell, and any processes it may have had running, will remain alive and associated with the original array session. Thus, exiting the new shell will return the user to the original shell and original array session. By default, the new array session will be a global array session (see array_sessions(5) for ...
nfsd starts the nfs(4) server daemons that handle client NFS requests. biod starts asynchronous block I/O daemons. This command is used on a NFS client to perform buffer cache read-ahead and write-behind. bio3d processes are the asynchronous kernel processes for NFS version 3. No daemon is necessary to start bio3ds. There is one bio3d associated with each mounted filesystem at mount time. If the NFS traffic to a filesystem increases, up to three more bio3d processes are spawned for that filesyst...
nfsSetup configures the NFS state ( chkconfig nfs on|off ), and turns on automount, autofs or none. This command is used by Set Up and Start NFS, and Turn Off NFS tasks.
nfsstat displays statistical information about the Network File System (NFS) and Remote Procedure Call (RPC) interfaces to the kernel. It can also be used to reinitialize this information. If no options are given, the default is nfsstat -csnr That is, print everything and reinitialize nothing. The optional arguments unix and core can be used to indicate another system namelist and kernel memory image, respectively....
nice executes command with a lower CPU scheduling priority. If the increment argument (in the range 1-20) is given, it is used; if not, an increment of 10 is assumed. The invoking process (generally the user's shell) must be in the timesharing scheduling class. The super-user may run commands with priority higher than normal by using a negative increment, e.g., --10.
nisSetup configures the NIS domain name, and turns on/off the NIS state ( chkconfig yp on/off ). This command is used by Set Up and Start NIS and Turn Off NIS tasks.
nl reads lines from the named file, or the standard input if no file is named, and reproduces the lines on the standard output. Lines are numbered on the left in accordance with the command options in effect. nl processes supplementary code set characters according to the locale specified in the LC_CTYPE environment variable [see LANG on environ(5)], except as noted below. In regular expressions, pattern searches are performed on ...
The nm command prints formatted listings of the symbol tables for each ELF file specified. A file can be a relocatable or absolute ELF object file, or it can be an archive. nm produces different output formats depending on options and the binary ABI. The differences are an attempt to preserve the operation of scripts that depend on nm. Anyone desiring consistent operation across different ABIs should use XPG4 format or Berkeley format. For old 32-bit-ABI objects the output format by default is t...
This tool is part of the Samba suite. nmblookup is used to query NetBIOS names and map them to IP addresses in a network using NetBIOS over TCP/IP queries. The options allow the name queries to be directed at a particular IP broadcast area or to a particular machine. All queries are done over UDP.
nohup executes command with hangups and quits ignored. If output is not re-directed by the user, both standard output and standard error are sent to nohup.out. If nohup.out is not writable in the current directory, output is redirected to $HOME/nohup.out. If standard output is redirected by the user, then nohup will redirect standard error to the same destination as standard output.
noodle is an interactive program for creating a variety of 3d objects. The concept is very similar to a pasta maker in which one chooses a noodle cross-section and pushes the dough through, (hence the name). noodle was written using the Inventor 3d Toolkit. It outputs Inventor files. The noodle program has 5 main windows and a control panel. The five windows are: Each window can be used to view or edit the object (with the exception of the top right window which only allows viewing). Use the rig...
This command allows the super-user to modify certain scheduling parameters of a process or to create a new process with specific scheduling parameters. For a detailed description of how the parameters affect the scheduling of a process, please see the sched_setscheduler(2) manual page. If npri is invoked without reference to a specific process or command to execute, it simply invokes a copy of the user's shell, as specified by the SHELL environment variable, with the scheduling characteristics ...
The config-directory argument tells the server the location of the server configuration files. The ns-admin command should never be invoked from the shell. During configuration of a Netscape server, you must specify a specific port number where your Netscape Administration server is to listen for admin requests. A single Netscape administration server can manage all Netscape servers on a host. The default port number is port 81. Assuming you have not relocated the server root for your administra...
The config-directory argument tells the server the location of the server configuration files. The ns-httpd command should never be invoked from the shell. Once the servers have been installed they will attempt to autoconfigure themselves upon startup. The installation process pre-configures the server on your system with the user "admin" as the administration user and "admin" as the administration password. The administration port is port 8182. To administer the Netscape FastTrack Server 3....
The nsadmin utility is used for administration of the Unified Name Service interface (see nsd(1m)). The nsd daemon maintains a filesystem typically mounted on /ns using various directory service protocols to provide information. It also maintains local cache files for each lookup. The nsadmin command allows manipulation of the name space and cache files maintained by the nsd daemon. Run with no arguments it acts as a command line interpreter and can be given multiple commands. Each command is fo...
The Unified Name Service (UNS) provides a generic interface to network lookup services. The daemon provides a filesystem front end to the name service namespace, and maintains local cache files. The services that the nsd daemon supports are NIS and NIS+ - the Network Information Service, DNS - the Domain Name Service, local configuration files, MDBM, NDBM, and DB - local hash files, LDAP - Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. By default the nsd daemon is activated at system startup time from t...
Nslookup is a program to query Internet domain name servers. Nslookup has two modes: interactive and non-interactive. Interactive mode allows the user to query name servers for information about various hosts and domains or to print a list of hosts in a domain. Non-interactive mode is used to print just the name and requested information for a host or domain.
nsmount attaches the filesystem provided by the nsd(1M) daemon. Nsd satisfies the requests using directory service protocols and caches them in memory then provides the data as a filesystem using the nfs(4) protocol. There may be no actual remote filesystem containing the data. This command is executed directly by the nsd daemon so there is rarely any need for it to be run separately.
This command retrieves the current NUMA placement strategies for the process specified by pid. Information displayed includes current placement policies, MLDSETs and MLDs.
nvram can be used to set or print the values of non-volatile RAM variables. When invoked with no arguments, nvram displays all known variables in the name=value form. The nvram arguments are: name Print the value of name. value If name is defined in non-volatile RAM, replace name's definition string with value. -v Print a line of the form name=value after getting or setting the named variable. If invoked as sgikopt, more than one name can be given. names that do not match known variables are ig...
nwfsdebug is used to enable or disable diagnostic output from the NetWare file system. It is intended for use by Silicon Graphics developers and field personnel.
nwlogin is used to remotely login a NetWare user to a NetWare server. If successful, the NetWare server is mounted as a filesystem under the /netware directory. Three values are needed by nwlogin : a server name, a user name, and the user's password. None of these are case-sensitive. Any information not provided on the command line will be prompted for interactively. Access rights to the files on the remote server are controlled by NetWare, according to the access rights of the NetWare username...
nwmount is used to establish a mount point (root directory) where all NetWare servers on the network will be visible. If a directory is specified on the command line, that directory will be used as the mount point. If one is not specified, then the default directory /netware will be used. -r Mounts the NetWare filesystem as read-only.
oawk scans each input file for lines that match any of a set of patterns specified in prog. With each pattern in prog there can be an associated action that will be performed when a line of a file matches the pattern. The set of patterns may appear literally as prog, or in a file specified as -f file. The prog string should be enclosed in single quotes (') to protect it from the shell. Parameters, in the form x=... y=... etc., may be passed to oawk. Files are read in order; if there are no file...
ObjToIv converts 3D model files in Wavefront .obj format (versions 3.0 and 4.0) into Open Inventor 2.0 files. The program converts ASCII files in .obj format, .pv files are not handled. NURB and cardinal surface, polygons, groups, textures are converted into equivalent Open Inventor objects. For textures, convert the bitmap texture image to an SGI .rgb file. Place it in the same directory as the .obj file. Use the function fromrla to convert .rla files into .rgb files. For materials, either the ...
OCC (capital OCC) invokes the cfront translator to translate C++ source code to C source code. Its normal operation is then to invoke the C compiler cc(1) to generate an object file. CC will invoke OCC if given the -use_cfront option. In the subsequent discussion below, CC refers to OCC. CC takes arguments ending in .C, .c, .c++, .cc, or .cxx to be C++ source programs. Files with the suffixes .a , .o, and .s, are also accepted by the CC command and passed to cc(1). CC defines the same symbols fo...
od displays a list of files in one or more formats, as selected by user supplied arguments. If no such argument is given, -t o2 (or -o) is default. If no file is specified, the standard input is used. For the purposes of this description, ``word'' refers to a 16-bit unit, independent of the word size of the machine; ``long word'' refers to a 32-bit unit, and ``double long word'' refers to a 64-bit unit. od processes supplementary code set characters according to the...
This used to be the diff command. The current diff command is a port of GNU diff, and is upward compatible with this odiff. If both arguments are directories, odiff sorts the contents of the directories by name, and then runs the regular file odiff algorithm (described below) on text files which are different. Binary files which differ, common subdirectories, and files which appear in only one directory are listed. Options when comparing directories are: -l long output format; each text file odi...
The odump command dumps selected parts of each object file. It works on object files in either COFF or Elf formats. But users are recommended to use elfdump(1) for Elf objects because it is better supported. This command works for object files and archives of object files. It accepts one or more of these options: -a Dumps the archive header for each member of the specified archive file. -c Dumps the string table. -f Dumps each file header. -g Dumps the global symbols from the symbol table of a M...
oglsnoop is a program for viewing the color, depth and stencil values of windows on the desktop. It displays these values graphically as well as numerically in its window. oglsnoop can be used to determine the Visual and Colormap that a given window is using. It can view both the Front and Back buffers of Double Buffered windows and allows you to visualize the Depth and Stencil Buffers using a grey scale display. oglsnoop has an Information dialog to view information about the window currently b...
The on program is used to execute commands on another system, in an environment similar to that invoking the program. All environment variables are passed, and the current working directory is preserved. To preserve the working directory, the working file system must be either already mounted on the host or be exported to it. Relative path names will only work if they are within the current file system; absolute path names may cause problems. Standard input is connected to standard input of the ...
onlinediag runs diagnostic tests on cpus to test floating point units. It reads the full path names of binaries out of a config file (default of /etc/config/onlinediag.config) and reports failures of these tests in the /var/adm/SYSLOG. The output of the test binaries are saved in the log file (default of /var/adm/onlinediag.logfile) if there are any failures or the tests fail to run for some reason. The -p procnum parameter indicates what processor the test will run on. If no value is specified,...
The openHintsShortcuts script loads the IRIX Interactive Desktop Hints & Shortcuts documentation into the user's favorite Web browser as chosen on the dtUtilities(1) panel. If the user has not chosen a favorite browser, it uses Netscape. If the Hints & Shortcuts documentation is not installed on the local host, then openHintsShortcuts uses InfoSearch and tries to load the page from the InfoSearch documentation server last accessed. The openHintsShortcuts script can be accessed from the toolches...
The openhomepg script loads the user's OutBox page into the user's favorite Web browser. If the user has not yet chosen a favorite browser on the dtUtilities(1) panel, then it will use Netscape. If the OutBox product is not installed, then it will post a dialog telling the user how to install it. The openhomepg script is launched from the toolchest (Internet > Browse OutBox Page). Users can also launch it from a Unix shell command line, though that is not its intended use. For more information...
The optionalsym command both reports on and sets the st_other field in an ELF symbol table. It was written to manipulate the STO_OPTIONAL value in the st_other field of the ELF symbol table. Thus the name optionalsym. The optionalsym command accepts one or more of the following options: -p prints information on selected symbols. If -u is also supplied, the symbol is printed before updating. -v selectname selects symbols with st_other having that value. For example, optionalsymbol -v STO_OPTIONAL...
Ordist is a program to maintain identical copies of files over multiple hosts. It preserves the owner, group, mode, and mtime of files if possible and can update programs that are executing. Ordist reads commands from distfile to direct the updating of files and/or directories. If distfile is `-', the standard input is used. If no -f option is present, the program looks first for `distfile', then `Distfile' to use as the input. If no names are specified on the command line, ordist will update...
osview monitors various portions of the activity of the operating system and displays them using the full screen capabilities of the current terminal. A large number of activity counters are monitored, and the display may be dynamically altered to hide or show only those counters in which the user is interested. The default is no longer to display all the statistics initially, instead there is a selection menu at the bottom of the display; enter the number of the selection to switch displays. Se...
outbox is a simple tool to Publish files automatically to the user's Out Box page. These files can then be viewed or downloaded by people viewing the user's Out Box page using Mosaic, Netscape or another Web Browser. The URL for the user's Out Box Page is http:///~
outputd captures output from applications launched from the desktop (the file manager, toolchest, session management), and displays them in popup windows, one per application. If outputd is not running, all output goes to the system console. By default, outputd is not launched. It can be launched via the Desktop customization panel (desktop). This panel can be opened from the Desktop toolchest by selecting Customize and then Desktop; on the panel, check the Display Application Errors toggle. Sub...
With the desks overview, ov, users can create, change, copy, rename and delete desks. Users can also drag windows from one desk to another or place windows on the global desk. Desks are available only when running a version of 4Dwm that includes support for desks. Users can launch the program from the toolchest (Desktop > Extra Desks) or from a Unix shell command line. ov has the ``runonce'' feature, meaning only one instance of the application will run at one time. Attempting to launch the ap...
pack attempts to store the specified files in a compressed form. Wherever possible (and useful), each input file name is replaced by a packed file name.z with the same access modes, access and modified dates, and owner as those of name. The -f option will force packing of name. This is useful for causing an entire directory to be packed even if some of the files will not benefit. If pack is successful, name will be removed. Packed files can be restored to their original form using unpack or pcat...
padc traces the activity of a process or group of processes and writes the raw event data to the standard output. System calls, scheduling actions, and disk i/o operations are activities that padc can trace. In addition to kernel-generated events, padc collects any events created by processes through the rtmon_log_user_tstamp(3) library routine. padc is normally invoked by the par(1) pr...
The papserver is a server which emulates a LaserWriter. It registers itself on the network as a Laserwriter, accepts print requests from Macintoshes and other machines, and spools them for printing. The papserver is an implementation of the server side of the AppleTalk Printer Access Protocol (PAP). It communicates with the LaserWriter driver on the Macintosh, and answers printer queries. It will collect and cache dictionaries, so they do not have to be retransmitted. The papserver will also par...
The papstatus program checks the status of AppleTalk printers. The flags are defined as follows: -a look in all zones (default is the local zone) -p read the printer, type and zone parameters out of the /etc/printcap entry for name printer. -P look for printer with the name printer (default is LaserWriter) -T look as if it is the type of printer (default is LaserWriter) -Z tells papstatus to look in the zone zone (default is local zone) number specifies the maximum number of printers to check (d...
par is a system utility program that reports on system call and scheduling activity for one or more processes. par can be used to trace the activity of a single process, a related group of processes, or the system as a whole. See the EXAMPLES section near the end for some examples on how par is commonly used. When tracing system calls, par(1) prints a report showing all system calls made by the subject processes complete with arguments and retur...
The passmgmt command updates information in the password files. This command works with both /etc/passwd and /etc/shadow. If there is no /etc/shadow, any changes made by passmgmt will only go into /etc/passwd. If the shadow file is not present, the -f and -e options have no effect, because the data fields they modify are not present in the base password file. passmgmt -a adds an entry for user name to the password files. passmgmt -a +na...
Passthru opens an audio input port and an output port, and connects them. Command line options allow the user to experiment with the various audio port parameters. -h help: print out a list of command line options and their descriptions -v verbose: output to stdout -n number of channels: 1 = mono, 2 = stereo -s sample format: 8, 16, or 24 bit -r sample rate: 48000, 44100, 32000, etc -b transfer blocksize: specify value in sample FRAMES -q queuesize for each of the two audio ports: specify value ...
The passwd command changes the password or lists password attributes associated with the user's login name. Additionally, super-users may use passwd to install or change passwords and attributes associated with any login name. Passwords for NIS entries that don't override the passwd field with a local value must be changed with yppasswd(1). When used to change a password, passwd prompts ordinary users for their old password, if any. It then prompts for the new password twice. The first time th...
In the first two forms, paste concatenates corresponding lines of the given input files file1, file2, and so on. It treats each file as a column or columns of a table and pastes them together horizontally (parallel merging). If you will, it is the counterpart of cat(1) which concatenates vertically, that is, one file after the other. In the last form above, paste replaces the function of an older command with the same name by combining subsequent lines of t...
Patch will take a patch file containing any of the four forms of difference listing produced by the diff program and apply those differences to an original file, producing a patched version. By default, the patched version is put in place of the original, with the original file backed up to the same name with the extension ".orig" ("~" on systems that do not support long file names), or as specified by the -b, -B (--prefix), or -V (--version-control) options. The extension used for making ba...
pathchk checks that one or more pathnames are valid (that is, they could be used to access or create a file without causing syntax errors) and portable (that is, no filename truncation will result). More extensive portability checks are provided by the -p option. By default, the pathchk utility will check each component of each pathname operand based on the underlying file system. A diagnostic will be written for each pathname operand that: o is longer than PATH_MAX bytes o contains any co...
pathconf provides a shell interface to the pathconf(2) system call for determining the current value of a configurable limit or option (variable) that is associated with a file or directory. The name argument represents the variable to be queried. The list of supported variables can be obtained by invoking pathconf without any arguments. By default, the values pertain to the root file system (``/''), to query the values of a different file or dir...
Pax reads and writes archive files which conform to the Archive/Interchange File Format specified in IEEE Std. 1003.1-1988. Pax can also read, but not write, a number of other file formats in addition to those specified in the Archive/Interchange File Format description. Support for these traditional file formats, such as V7 tar and System V binary cpio format archives, is provided for backward compatibility and to maximize portability. Pax will also support traditional cpio and System V tar int...
pciconfig is used to hot-plug insert a device into a PCI slot, hot-plug remove a device from a PCI slot, and query a slot on a PCI bus controlled by a bridge device. PCI Hot-Plug operations are executed while the system is running. A hot-plug insertion powers-up the PCI slot, determines the type of card installed, and calls the appropriate device driver to initialize the card and its software. Typically, after a successful hot-plug insertion, new device entries will be found in the hardware grap...
peer_encaps is a daemon which provides a way to encapsulate proprietary SNMP agents, and an integrated environment for hosts that also run an off-the-shelf or custom, non-extensible SNMP Agent or proxy. The peer_snmpd(1m) daemon implements the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). Since only a single SNMP Agent can be listening to the standard SNMP port (UDP port 161), this limits a Manager to access only variables associated with one agent. The peer_encaps daemon provides a mechanism to ov...
peer_snmpd is a daemon which implements versions one and two (V1 and V2p) of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) as specified in Internet RFC series 1441-1452. The daemon, called the SNMP agent, can be configured to run from the network startup script at boot time by the command chkconfig snmpd on or started from the command line. You must be superuser (root) to run peer_snmpd. peer_snmpd listens on a udp(7P) socket for the snmp service for SNMP queries. If no such service can be found...
peoplepages provides phonebook-like database capabilities for InPersonTM and other communication tools. The database is comprised of a number of books. Complete information about people & places you need to contact can be stored in these books. peoplepages displays a list of the available books. You click on the desired book to select it. peoplepages' main window displays a list of entries from the current book. Each entry has a draggable icon which can be dropped on InPerson, MediaMailTM & oth...
The given command is executed; after it is complete, perfex prints the values of various hardware performance counters. The counts returned are aggregated over all processes that are descendants of the target command, as long as their parent process controls the child through wait (see wait(2)). The R10000 event counters are different from R12000 event counters. See the r10k_counters(5) man page for differences. For R10000 CPUs, the integers event0 and event1 index the following table: 0 = Cycle...
perfly is one of the sample programs distributed with the OpenGL Performer high-performance graphics library. perfly is a powerful way to see graphics data: it's very fast, reads many different graphics file formats, and has interesting options for examining geometric data. Take a Test Drive If you are new to OpenGL Performer, the best way to start learning about it is to go for a test drive. The Performer-based sample application perfly is installed in the /usr/sbin directory. To start perfly,...
Perl is a language optimized for scanning arbitrary text files, extracting information from those text files, and printing reports based on that information. It's also a good language for many system management tasks. The language is intended to be practical (easy to use, efficient, complete) rather than beautiful (tiny, elegant, minimal). Perl combines (in the author's opinion, anyway) some of the best features of C, sed, awk, and sh, so people familiar with those languages should have little...
Perl's source code should use the above functions instead of those defined in ANSI C's stdio.h, perlio.h will the #define them to the I/O mechanism selected at Configure time. The functions are modeled on those in stdio.h, but parameter order has been "tidied up a little". PerlIO * This takes the place of FILE *. Unlike FILE * it should be treated as opaque (it is probably safe to assume it is a pointer to something). PerlIO_stdin(), PerlIO_stdout(), PerlIO_stderr() Use these rather than std...
1 Do not attempt to verify the type of $self. That'll break if the class is inherited, when the type of $self is valid but its package isn't what you expect. See rule 5. 2 If an object-oriented (OO) or indirect-object (IO) syntax was used, then the object is probably the correct type and there's no need to become paranoid about it. Perl isn't a paranoid language anyway. If people subvert the OO or IO syntax then they probably know what they're doing and you should let them do it. See rule 1...
A program to help generate bug reports about perl or the modules that come with it, and mail them. If you have found a bug with a non-standard port (one that was not part of the standard distribution), a binary distribution, or a non-standard module (such as Tk, CGI, etc), then please see the documentation that came with that distribution to determine the correct place to report bugs. perlbug is designed to be used interactively. Normally no arguments will be needed. Simply run it, and follow th...
Although this stuff is easier to explain using examples, you first need be aware of a few important definitions. Perl has a number of C functions that allow you to call Perl subroutines. They are I32 perl_call_sv(SV* sv, I32 flags) ; I32 perl_call_pv(char *subname, I32 flags) ; I32 perl_call_method(char *methname, I32 flags) ; I32 perl_call_argv(char *subname, I32 flags, register char **argv) ; The key function is perl_call_sv. All the other functions are fairly simple wrappers which make it eas...
"As soon as we started programming, we found to our surprise that it wasn't as easy to get programs right as we had thought. Debugging had to be discovered. I can remember the exact instant when I realized that a large part of my life from then on was going to be spent in finding mistakes in my own programs." --Maurice Wilkes, 1949 If you invoke Perl with the -d switch, your script runs under the Perl source debugger. This works like an interactive Perl environment, prompting for debugger com...
Perl5.004 builds out of the box on Unix, Plan 9, LynxOS, VMS, OS/2, QNX, AmigaOS, and Windows NT. Perl runs on Windows 95 as well, but it cannot be built there, for lack of a reasonable command interpreter.
perldoc looks up a piece of documentation in .pod format that is embedded in the perl installation tree or in a perl script, and displays it via pod2man | nroff -man | $PAGER. (In addition, if running under HP-UX, col -x will be used.) This is primarily used for the documentation for the perl library modules. Your system may also have man pages installed for those modules, in which case you can probably just use the man(1) command....
The most important thing to understand about all data structures in Perl -- including multidimensional arrays--is that even though they might appear otherwise, Perl @ARRAYs and %HASHes are all internally onedimensional. They can hold only scalar values (meaning a string, number, or a reference). They cannot directly contain other arrays or hashes, but instead contain references to other arrays or hashes. You can't use a reference to a array or hash in quite the same way that you would a real ar...
At the time of this writing, there are two versions of Perl which run under Win32. Interfacing to Activeware's Perl library is quite different from the examples in this documentation, as significant changes were made to the internal Perl API. However, it is possible to embed Activeware's Perl runtime, see the Perl for Win32 FAQ: http://www.perl.com/perl/faq/win32/Perl_for_Win32_FAQ.html With the "official" Perl version 5.004 or higher, all the examples within this documentation will compile ...
When I first began the Perl FAQ in the late 80s, I never realized it would have grown to over a hundred pages, nor that Perl would ever become so popular and widespread. This document could not have been written without the tremendous help provided by Larry Wall and the rest of the Perl Porters.
Copyright (c) 1997 Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington. All rights reserved. See the perlfaq manpage for distribution information. Page 5 PERLFAQ1(1) PERLFAQ1(1) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 6666
Copyright (c) 1997 Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington. All rights reserved. See the perlfaq manpage for distribution information. Page 9 PERLFAQ2(1) PERLFAQ2(1) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 11110000
Copyright (c) 1997 Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington. All rights reserved. See the perlfaq manpage for distribution information. Page 10 PERLFAQ3(1) PERLFAQ3(1) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 11111111
Copyright (c) 1997 Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington. All rights reserved. See the perlfaq manpage for distribution information. Page 22 PERLFAQ4(1) PERLFAQ4(1) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 22223333
Copyright (c) 1997 Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington. All rights reserved. See the perlfaq manpage for distribution information. Page 17 PERLFAQ5(1) PERLFAQ5(1) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 11118888
Copyright (c) 1997 Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington. All rights reserved. See the perlfaq manpage for distribution information. Page 12 PERLFAQ6(1) PERLFAQ6(1) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 11113333
Copyright (c) 1997 Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington. All rights reserved. See the perlfaq manpage for distribution information. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 11115555
Copyright (c) 1997 Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington. All rights reserved. See the perlfaq manpage for distribution information. Page 7 PERLFAQ9(1) PERLFAQ9(1) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 8888
Because the values line may contain arbitrary expressions (for at fields, not caret fields), you can farm out more sophisticated processing to other functions, like sprintf() or one of your own. For example: format Ident = @<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< &commify($n) . To get a real at or caret into the field, do this: Page 4 PERLFORM(1) PERLFORM(1) format Ident = I have an @ here. "@" . To center a whole line of text, do something like this: format Ident = @||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| "...
Datatypes Perl has three typedefs that handle Perl's three main data types: SV Scalar Value AV Array Value HV Hash Value Each typedef has specific routines that manipulate the various data types. What is an "IV"? Perl uses a special typedef IV which is a simple integer type that is guaranteed to be large enough to hold a pointer (as well as an integer). Perl also uses two special typedefs, I32 and I16, which will always be at least 32-bits and 16-bits long, respectively....
Perl uses a simple signal handling model: the %SIG hash contains names or references of user-installed signal handlers. These handlers will be called with an argument which is the name of the signal that triggered it. A signal may be generated intentionally from a particular keyboard sequence like control-C or control-Z, sent to you from another process, or triggered automatically by the kernel when special events transpire, like a child process exiting, your process running out of stack space, ...
If Perl applications are to be able to understand and present your data correctly according a locale of your choice, all of the following must be true: o Your operating system must support the locale system. If it does, you should find that the setlocale() function is a documented part of its C library. o Definitions for the locales which you use must be installed. You, or your system administrator, must make sure that this is the case. The available locales, the location in which they are kept,...
Now it's time to print your data structure out. How are you going to do that? Well, if you want only one of the elements, it's trivial: print $LoL[0][0]; If you want to print the whole thing, though, you can't say print @LoL; # WRONG because you'll get just references listed, and perl will never automatically dereference things for you. Instead, you have to roll yourself a loop or two. This prints the whole structure, using the shell-style for() construct to loop across the outer set of subs...
See the perlmodlib manpage for general style issues related to building Perl modules and classes as well as descriptions of the standard library and CPAN, the Exporter manpage for how Perl's standard import/export mechanism works, the perltoot manpage for an in-depth tutorial on creating classes, the perlobj manpage for a hard-core reference document on objects, and the perlsub manpage for an explanation of functions and scoping. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 8888...
CPAN stands for the Comprehensive Perl Archive Network. This is a globally replicated collection of all known Perl materials, including hundreds of unbundled modules. Here are the major categories of modules: o Language Extensions and Documentation Tools o Development Support o Operating System Interfaces o Networking, Device Control (modems) and InterProcess Communication o Data Types and Data Type Utilities o Database Interfaces o User Interfaces o Interfaces to / Emulations of Other Programmi...
A kinder, gentler tutorial on object-oriented programming in Perl can be found in the perltoot manpage. You should also check out the perlbot manpage for other object tricks, traps, and tips, as well as the perlmodlib manpage for some style guides on constructing both modules and classes. Page 9 PERLOBJ(1) PERLOBJ(1) PPPPaaaaggggeeee 11110000
Terms and List Operators (Leftward) A TERM has the highest precedence in Perl. They includes variables, quote and quote-like operators, any expression in parentheses, and any function whose arguments are parenthesized. Actually, there aren't really functions in this sense, just list operators and unary operators behaving as functions because you put parentheses around the arguments. These are all documented in the perlfunc manpage. If any list operator (print(), etc.) or any unary operator (chd...
You can embed pod documentation in your Perl scripts. Start your documentation with a "=head1" command at the beginning, and end it with a "=cut" command. Perl will ignore the pod text. See any of the supplied library modules for examples. If you're going to put your pods at the end of the file, and you're using an __END__ or __DATA__ cut mark, make sure to put an empty line there before the first pod directive. __END__ =head1 NAME modern - I am a modern module If you had not had that empt...
You may not (usefully) use a reference as the key to a hash. It will be converted into a string: $x{ \$a } = $a; If you try to dereference the key, it won't do a hard dereference, and you won't accomplish what you're attempting. You might want to do something more like $r = \@a; $x{ $r } = $r; And then at least you can use the values(), which will be real refs, instead of the keys(), which won't....
Upon startup, Perl looks for your script in one of the following places: 1. Specified line by line via -e switches on the command line. 2. Contained in the file specified by the first filename on the command line. (Note that systems supporting the #! notation invoke interpreters this way.) 3. Passed in implicitly via standard input. This works only if there are no filename arguments--to pass arguments to a STDIN script you must explicitly specify a "-" for the script name. With methods 2 and 3...
Like many languages, Perl provides for user-defined subroutines. These may be located anywhere in the main program, loaded in from other files via the do, require, or use keywords, or even generated on the fly using eval or anonymous subroutines (closures). You can even call a function indirectly using a variable containing its name or a CODE reference to it, as in $var = \&function. The Perl model for function call and return values is simple: all functions are passed as parameters one single ...
Prior to release 5.0 of Perl, a programmer could use dbmopen() to connect an on-disk database in the standard Unix dbm(3x) format magically to a %HASH in their program. However, their Perl was either built with one particular dbm library or another, but not both, and you couldn't extend this mechanism to other packages or types of variables. Now you can. The tie() function binds a variable to a class (package) that will provide the implementation for access methods for that variable. Once this ...
Before you create a class, you need to decide what to name it. That's because the class (package) name governs the name of the file used to house it, just as with regular modules. Then, that class (package) should provide one or more ways to generate objects. Finally, it should provide mechanisms to allow users of its objects to indirectly manipulate these objects from a distance. For example, let's make a simple Person class module. It gets stored in the file Person.pm. If it were called a Ha...
The Change Permissions tool allows the user to change the permissions and ownership on a set of files and directories. First, the user constructs a list of files (or directories) to be modified. Files can be added to the list in two ways: 1) by dragging and dropping files into the colored Files and Directories panel and 2) by clicking on the "Add File To List..." button or selecting File->Add... (Ctrl+A) from the menu. Next, the user can change ownership or permissions. To change the ownership...
pfa2pfb converts Adobe Type 1 font programs from the Printer Font ASCII (PFA) to the Printer Font Binary (PFB) format. If the file output is not specified, output goes to the standard output. If the file input is not specified, input comes from the standard input. In this way pfa2pfb can be used as a filter.
pfb2pfa converts Adobe type-1 font programs in PFB (binary) format to PFA (hexadecimal) format. If the file output is not specified output goes to the standard output. If the file input is not specified input comes from the standard input. In this way pfb2pfa can be used as a filter.
pfconv is one of the sample programs distributed with the OpenGL Performer high-performance graphics library. pfconv loads one or more files into an OpenGL Performer scene graph, and then writes the resulting scene graph out to a named output file. It is installed in the /usr/sbin directory on IRIX, and /usr/bin/X11 on Linux. The following formats support file writing: dwb Coryphaeus Software Designer's Workbench format medit Medit productions modeler format pfa OpenGL Performer ASCII file form...
pfmt uses format for printf style formatting of args. pfmt encapsulates the output in the standard error message format and displays it on stderr. The following options are available. -l label Specify the label string to be displayed with the message (for example, "UX:cat"). label is a character string no more than 25 characters in length; it will be automatically suffixed with a colon (:). When unspec...
pfpalettize is one of the sample programs distributed with the OpenGL Performer high-performance graphics library. pfpalettize loads one or more files into an OpenGL Performer scene graph, searches for all textures and palettizes them according to defaults or options specified, and then writes the resulting scene graph to an output file and writes the newly created palettized textures out to new palettized image files. pfpalettize command line options -h - "Usage" message -m - Enabel ...
The pg command is a filter that allows the examination of files one screenful at a time on a CRT. (If no file is specified or if it encounters the file name -, pg reads from standard input.) Each screenful is followed by a prompt. If the user types a carriage return, another page is displayed; other possibilities are listed below. pg processes supplementary code set characters in files, and recognizes supplementary code set characters in the string given to the -p opti...
Photoshop is an imaging application developed and supported by Adobe Systems Inc. 'photoshop_sgi' is a performance package which works in conjunction with Photoshop to provide SGI specific acceleration and customization. 'photoshop_sgi' has been designed to work in harmony with Adobe's standard version of Photoshop. When Photoshop and photoshop_sgi are installed by default, 'photoshop' will invoke Photoshop as shipped by Adobe and 'photoshop_sgi' will invoke Photoshop as modified by SGI...
Ping is a tool for network testing, measurement and management. It utilizes the ICMP protocol's ECHO_REQUEST datagram to elicit an ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE from a host or gateway. ECHO_REQUEST datagrams (``pings'') have an IP and ICMP header, followed by an 8-byte timestamp, and then an arbitrary number of ``pad'' bytes used to fill out the packet. The host can be the name of a host or its Internet address. The options are: -c count Stop after sending (and waiting the specified delay to receive) ...
pixdump prints out the formatted contents of the tables from one or more SpeedShop instrumented executables or DSOs. Options are used to control the printing of the files. -verbose Print detailed information. -perf Print out the contents of the perf section. -graph Print out the contents of the graph section. -binmap Print out the contents of the binmap section. -addrs Print out the contents of the addrs section. -argtrace Print out the contents of the argtrace section. -funcnode Print out the c...
pixie is an object instrumentation tool that can be used to measure code execution frequency in a program for performance analysis. pixie reads an executable program, partitions it into basic blocks, and writes an equivalent program containing additional code that counts the execution of each basic block. (A basic block is a region of the program that can be entered only at the beginning and exited only at the end). Other options allow producing an uninstrumented copy of the executable, with map...
pl2pm is a tool to aid in the conversion of Perl4-style .pl library files to Perl5-style library modules. Usually, your old .pl file will still work fine and you should only use this tool if you plan to update your library to use some of the newer Perl 5 features, such as AutoLoading.
playaifc parses AIFF-C (and/or AIFF) file(s) containing 8-bit or 16-bit audio sample data (single channel, stereo, or 4-channel) and plays the samples through the audio hardware. playaifc reads the contents of the AIFF/AIFF-C Common and Sound Data chunks, and skips all other chunks. The hardware sample rate is modified, if possible, so that it agrees with the value in the Common chunk. By default, the hardware sample rate will not be modified if another program is using an output audio port at a...
-d what Specify what modules should print debugging information. what is a string of letters from the following set: a, c, d, j, m, s, t, v. Use A or * to print all information. -e Give environment variables precedence over those in the makefile(s). -f makefile Specify a different makefile to read than the standard ``Makefile'' or ``makefile''. If makefile is "-", standard input is read. -h Prints out help information and default values. -i ``Ignore errors'' - ignore non-zero exit status...
pod2man converts its input file containing embedded pod directives (see the perlpod manpage) into nroff source suitable for viewing with nrof using the man(7) macro set. Besides the obvious pod conversions, pod2man also takes care of func(), func(n), and simple variable references like $foo or @bar so you don't have to use code escapes for them; complex expressions like $fred{'stuff'} will still need to be escaped, though. Other nagging little roffish things that it catches include translatin...
portmap is a server that converts RPC program numbers into TCP or UDP protocol port numbers. It must be running in order to make RPC calls. When an RPC server is started, it tells portmap what port number it is listening to, and what RPC program numbers it is prepared to serve. When a client wishes to make an RPC call to a given program number, it first contacts portmap on the server machine to determine the port number where RPC packets should be sent. After portmap starts, inetd(1M) can regist...
portstat is a very simple program which dumps the status of all the currently open audio ports on a system. For each open port, it prints, in order: "port," the name of the port as passed to ALopenport; "pid," the ID of the process that opened the port; "rbid," the internal ID of the sample queue; "AL v," the version of the Audio Library which was used to open the port; "type," the type of the port (input or output); "nchans," the number of channels in the port's sample queue; "fil...
This command brings the system to a state where nothing is running so the power can be turned off. By default, the user is asked questions that control how much warning the other users are given. The options: -y prevents the questions from being asked and just gives the warning messages. There is a 60 second pause between the warning messages. -Y is the same as -y except it has no pause between messages. It is the fastest way to bring the system down....
PPP is a standard protocol for transmitting network data over point-topoint links using synchronous modems, asynchronous modems, or ISDN links. It can be used to transfer data between applications which are using TCP/IP or UDP/IP. The ppp program is used to connect to a remote machine. It does everything necessary to permit network data to reach the modem or ISDN line, and to connect the TTY port to the rest the network system. It does things that are done by ifconfig(1M) for other network inter...
Managers display information about your system and provide access to interactive guides (also called tasks) that let you administer your system. For example, the User Manager displays a list of the user accounts currently on the system and gives you access to guides like "Add a User Account" and "Modify a User Account". In the Manager window, you can open a guide by choosing its name from the Task menu or by clicking its button at the bottom of the window. The PPP manager displays a list of ...
pppstat displays the current status of PPP links. Both configuration values (e.g. IP addresses, protocols, and packet sizes) and operational values (e.g. recent compression performance, corrupted packets, and current links in the multilink bundle) are displayed. The options are: -n display numbers instead of names. -u unit display the stat of PPP unit unit instead of the first active unit. -i interval refresh the screen every interval seconds instead of once per second. -m d|r|z display using d ...
pr is used to format and print the contents of a file. If file is -, or if no files are specified, pr assumes standard input. pr prints the named files on standard output. By default, the listing is separated into pages, each headed by the page number, the date and time that the file was last modified, and the name of the file. Page length is 66 lines which includes 10 lines of header and trailer output. The header is composed of 2 blank lines, 1 line of text ( can be altered with -h), and 2 bla...
The praliases utility displays the current system aliases, one per line, in no particular order. The options are as follows: -f Read the specified file instead of the default sendmail system aliases file. The praliases utility exits 0 on success, and >0 if an error occurs.
preallocColors is run early in the login process to preallocate a small set of colors used by the IRIX Interactive Desktop. By preallocating these colors early in the login process, it avoids colormap flashing when running GL programs. On machines with multiple colormaps, where flashing is not a problem, preallocColors exits immediately, without allocating any colors. On machines with a single colormap, preallocColors will allocate the colors, and for a child. The parent will exit immediately, w...
preset is a tool to be used only as a last resort. preset resets the lp spooling system to a state in which no printers are installed, the spooler is not running, and all special spooler files have been removed and recreated. After preset has been run, no information regarding previously installed printers will exist on the system. preset should be used only when all other methods of manipulating printers and the printing queues fail....
These options apply only to raster image files supported by Impressario, but are independent of the image file type. All of the following options apply to all supported image types. bestfit Rotate and scale the image to occupy the largest possible amount of space on the page. rotate Rotate the image in integer degrees, clockwise. Takes one integer argument. flip Flip the image, producing a mirror image. Useful for printing transparencies and iron-on decals. zoom Scale the image to an integer per...
printers provides a graphical interface to the System V print spooling system. It allows the user to easily add, remove, and configure printers. It also has commands for setting the system default printer, setting printer specific options, and viewing the job queue of a particular printer. printers is typically started by using the "Printer Manager" command on the "System" menu of the toolchest(1). printers can also be started from the "System Manager" (chost(1M)) or the command line....
The printf command converts, formats, and prints its args under control of the format. It fully supports conversion specifications for strings (%s descriptor); however, the results are undefined for the other conversion specifications not specifically mentioned below. format a character string that contains three types of objects: 1) plain characters, which are simply copied to the output stream; 2) conversion specifications, each of which results in fetching zero or more...
printstatus, also known as PrintStatus, provides a graphical interface for monitoring printers under the AT&T System V print spooling system. The program can be displayed on 24-bit, 8-bit, and 1-bit X displays. Command Line Options -e updateInterval Specifies the interval, in seconds, between updates of the printer engine status information. This includes the icon itself and the Current Printer Status area of the interface. This information is polled whether printstatus is iconified or not. -q u...
prioinfo prints out the priority IO allocation table of the system. Each entry represents an allocation, with a blank line in between entries. Within each entry, the first row is the bandwidth allocation handle, the process id of the process which owns the allocation, followed by the bandwidth in bytes/second. The second row is the source name, the third row is the sink name.
Managers display information about your system and provide access to interactive guides (also called tasks) that let you administer your system. For example, the User Manager displays a list of the user accounts currently on the system and gives you access to guides like "Add a User Account" and "Modify a User Account." In a Manager window, you can open a guide by choosing its name from the Task menu or by clicking its button at the bottom of the window. The Privilege Manager displays inform...
Managers display information about your system and provide access to interactive guides (also called tasks) that let you administer your system. For example, the user Manager displays a list of the user accounts currently on the system and gives you access to guides like "Add a User Account" and "Modify a User Account". In the Manager window, you can open a guide by choosing its name from the Task menu or by clicking its button at the bottom of the window. The Process manager displays the pr...
Proclaim is a client that communicates with a DHCP server to obtain configuration parameters, including at least an IP address. The format of DHCP messages is based on the format of bootp messages, described in RFC 951. A detailed protocol specification of DHCP is in RFC 1541, available from the Network Information Center. The DHCP protocol uses UDP/IP as its transport mechanism. The DHCP server receives service requests at the UDP port indicated in the bootp service description contained in the...
ProclaimRelayMgr is a graphical front end that displays the status and configuration of the proclaim relay-agent running on the local host. It also displays the set of proclaim servers to which requests are forwarded. Proclaim is an implementation of DHCP (dynamic host configuration protocol). The main window allows you to add and delete addresses and names of proclaim servers. You can enable or disable the relay-agent by clicking the Relay On/Off button in the main window. The File button opens...
ProclaimServerMgr is a graphical front end that displays the status and configuration of the proclaim server running on the local host. It displays the set of IP addresses and lease times that are currently assigned. Proclaim is an implementation of DHCP (dynamic host configuration protocol). The File button on the main window opens a pull-down menu for editing options and configuration files. The Options menu choice allows you to edit proclaim server options defined in the /etc/config/proclaim_...
prof analyzes one or more data files generated by the SpeedShop performance tools and produces a report. (Note that most reports are formatted with long lines, and should be viewed in a window that is 135 characters wide, and printed in wide format.) The second form is used to analyze data files generated by the SpeedShop performance tools if the target program is not in the same directory as the data files (in which case should be the path to the target program). Multiple file...
Prfld, prfstat, prfdc, prfsnap, and prfpr form a system of programs to facilitate an activity study of the UNIX operating system. Prfld is used to initialize the recording mechanism in the system. It generates a table containing the starting address of each system subroutine as extracted from system_namelist. Prfstat is used to enable or disable the sampling mechanism. The range parameter selects what values will be sampled at the sampling points. The current choices for range are pc to select P...
The proxy manager (proxymngr) is responsible for resolving requests from xfindproxy (and other similar clients), starting new proxies when appropriate, and keeping track of all of the available proxy services. The proxy manager strives to reuse existing proxies whenever possible. There are two types of proxies that the proxy manager deals with, managed and unmanaged proxies. A managed proxy is a proxy that is started ``on demand'' by the proxy manager. An unmanaged proxy, on the other hand, is...
prs prints, on the standard output, parts or all of an SCCS file [see sccsfile(4)] in a user-supplied format. If a directory is named, prs behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files (last component of the path name does not begin with s.), and unreadable files are silently ignored. If a name of - is given, the standard input is read; each line of the standard input is taken to be the name of an SCCS file or directory to be processed; n...
prtvtoc prints a summary of the information in the volume header for a single disk or all of the local disks attached to a system (see vh(7M)). The command is usually used only by the superuser. The rawdiskname name should be the raw device filename of a disk volume header in the form /dev/rdsk/dks?d?vh. Note: prtvtoc knows about the special file directory naming conventions, so the /dev/rdsk prefix can be omitted. If no name is given, the information for the root disk is printed. In singl...
ps prints information about active processes. Without options, information is printed about processes associated with the controlling terminal. The output consists of a short listing containing only the process ID, terminal identifier, cumulative execution time, and the command name. Since a batch job doesn't have a controlling terminal, invoking ps without options from a batch job will result in an error. Otherwise, the information that is displayed is controlled by the selection of options. o...
The psf filter, a printer driver for PostScript printers, accepts PostScript on input and supports AppleTalk networked and serially-connected printers. The psf filter carries on a full duplex dialog with the printer determining status, etc. as the job is sent. When psf opens a printer (either through AppleTalk or serially), it queries the printer to insure that the correct version of all needed dictionaries are loaded, and loads the correct version if they are not. If there is no PRINTER.PPD fil...
The psfiletype program scans the given file to figure out what kind of file it is; mainly to distinguish between PostScript and image files so that they may be printed correctly on a PostScript printer. After determining the data type, psfiletype prints one of the strings: image, eps, PostScript, unsupported, or unknown. The result ``unsupported'' means that the file is an image, but the imagetops program won't be able to convert it to PostScript....
The filter psif is a csh(1) script which runs psf(1m). It is usually specified in /etc/printcap ( printcap(5)) as the input filter (if=) and is called by lpd(1m) as part of processing each job. This script is usually created by the configks(1m) program and is primarily concerned with printing data. You can modify the psif script to reverse page order if you want by adding psreverse(1m) and the -r option in the psif script....
If no options are given, psifconfig will show the configuration of the packet scheduler for the specified interface. A system administrator can also set some configuration parameters. The interface name must be specified.
The program psreverse reverses the pages for the printer. It is usually called from the lp(1) or lpr(1) printer script. One usually pipes the output of psreverse into psf(1m).
The program pssplit reads a PostScript print job file and writes separate output files each containing one page of the job, repeating the PostScript header and dictionaries in each file. While the resulting output files will not be EPS, many applications that accept EPS will accept them. The output file(s) written by pssplit will each have a pathname of the form destdir/filename.pgofsuffix, where is the sequential page numbers, starting with 1, and is the total number of pa...
The following is the old c2ph.doc documentation by Tom Christiansen Date: 25 Jul 91 08:10:21 GMT Once upon a time, I wrote a program called pstruct. It was a perl program that tried to parse out C structures and display their member offsets for you. This was especially useful for people looking at binary dumps or poking around the kernel. Pstruct was not a pretty program. Neither was it particularly robust. The problem, you see, was that the C compiler was much better at parsi...
pwck scans the password file and notes any inconsistencies. The checks include validation of: the number of fields, login name, user ID, group ID, and whether the login directory and the program-to-use-as-Shell exist. The default password file is /etc/passwd. pwck has the ability to parse YP entries in the password file. The -p option prevents checking of the login directory and shell fields, useful for NIS administrators in checking the yppasswd file, where each login directory is not usu...
The pwconv command creates and updates /etc/shadow with information from /etc/passwd. If the /etc/shadow file does not exist, pwconv creates /etc/shadow with information from /etc/passwd. The command populates /etc/shadow with the user's login name, password, and p...
pwd prints the path name of the working (current) directory. pwd is both an explicit command (invoked as /usr/bin/pwd), as well as a builtin command to each shell (invoked as pwd).
qlist is used to display the list of print queues available on a NetWare server. If no server is specified on the command line, the default (most recently logged-into) NetWare server is used.
qmorf reads in a series of Inventor quad mesh files and draws an animated sequence which metamorphoses from one object to the next. These quad mesh files must meet the exact specifications described below (40x40). Qmorf is not related to other morphing programs (like the program used to produce the effects in Michael Jackson's "Black or White" video). Those programs use image warping techniques to modify 2D images; this program actually modifies an object's 3D geometry. qmorf was written usi...
The query program sends a PostScript query (from queryfile) to a printer, and places the result in the file outfile. The flags are defined as follows: -a look in all zones (default) -s indicates the printer is serial (see below) -v says be verbose -P says look for printer with this name (default is LaserWriter) -T means look as if it is this type of printer (default is LaserWriter) -Z tells it which zone to look in (default is all zones) The queryfile must exist, and contain a PostScript procedu...
QuickPage sends messages to a paging terminal using the SNPP and IXO (also known as TAP) protocols. It is normally used with no options other than a recipient and the message text, in which case the message is sent to the SNPP server where it is submitted to a page queue to be sent by a separate daemon process. Page groups and duty schedules are supported. Status notification messages indicating the success or failure of a page are sent via e-mail to submitters of high-priority (level 0) pages. ...
quota displays users' or projects' disk usage (in kilobytes) and limits. Only the super-user may use the optional idname argument to view the limits of another user or project. If a -n flag is supplied, quota will only display user's or project's quotas for local file systems. Remotely mounted file systems are ignored. If a -j flag is supplied, quota will report project quotas. If the -j flag isn't supplied, quota will report user quotas. Normally, output pertaining to only those filesystem...
quotacheck examines local EFS filesystems, builds a table of current disk usage, and compares this table against that stored in the disk quota file for the filesystem. If any inconsistencies are detected, both the quotas file and the current system copy of the incorrect quotas are updated (the latter only occurs if quotas has been enabled for the filesystem). The filesystem has to be mounted for quotacheck to be able to operate on it. quotacheck ignores XFS filesystems since the XFS quota system...
quotaon announces to the system that disk quotas should be enabled on one or more local filesystems. The filesystem(s) specified must be mounted at the time. quotaoff announces to the system that filesystems specified should have any disk quotas turned off. Both these commands behave slightly differently between EFS and XFS filesystems. On EFS filesystems, a quota file must be present in the root directory of the specified filesystem and be named quotas. XFS filesystems have two components to th...
rarpd responds to Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (Reverse ARP, RARP) requests. It puts itself in the background, and requires root privileges. The Reverse ARP protocol is used by systems at boot time to discover their 32-bit Internet Protocol (IP) address given their 48-bit Ethernet address. In order for a RARP request to be answered, the requesting system's name-to-IP-address entry must exist in the /etc/hosts file and its name-to-Ethernet-address entry must exist in the /etc/ethers file....
rbview is a very simple GL program which monitors the state of the sample queues for all audio applications on a system. This is primarily helpful for debugging audio applications: rbview is useful in determining where an application acquires latency, whether or not it is losing audio data, and when it opens and closes audio ports. For each open port, rbview displays a bar indicating the current number of samples in the port's sample queue. Within the bar are two lines: the line on the left dis...
This file is executed by an entry in /etc/inittab and is responsible for performing those operations that bring the system down to either the administrative maintenance state, traditionally state s, called the "single-user" state, or to the system halt state in preparation for powering the system down. /etc/rc0 runs files beginning with K in /etc/rc0.d. These files are executed by /bin/sh in ascii sort-sequence order (see FILES below for more information). Each of these files can also check th...
/etc/rc2 is executed via an entry in /etc/inittab and is responsible for the initializations that bring the system to a ready-to-use state, traditionally state 2, which is called the "multi-user" state. /etc/rc2 runs files beginning with S in /etc/rc2.d. These files are executed by /bin/sh in ascii sort-sequence order (see FILES below for more information). Each of these files may also check the state of the corresponding chkconfig flag for that function. If the state is on, the script starts ...
rcp copies files between machines. Each file or directory argument has one of these forms: o A local filename, path, containing no : characters, or a \ before any :'s. o A remote filename of the form remhost:path. o A remote filename of the the form remuser@remhost:path, which uses the user name remuser rather than the current user name on the remote host. If path is not a full pathname, it is interpreted relative to your login directory on remhost. A path on a remote host can be quoted (using...
rcpDevice is a simple shell script for copying a single file or directory to a remote system. Its icon can be found on the Desktop Tools page of the IconCatalog. Users can also launch it from a Unix shell command line. Users may find it easier to copy files between hosts using the accessworkstation(1) panel, available on the toolchest as Desktop > Access Files > By Remote Login. That panel can be used to launch a remote directory view or iconview(1). Users can then Ctrl-drag files from the iconv...
rcs creates new RCS files or changes attributes of existing ones. An RCS file contains multiple revisions of text, an access list, a change log, descriptive text, and some control attributes. For rcs to work, the caller's login name must be on the access list, except if the access list is empty, the caller is the owner of the file or the superuser, or the -i option is present. Pathnames matching an RCS suffix denote RCS files; all others denote working files. Names are paired as explained in ci...
rcsclean removes files that are not being worked on. rcsclean -u also unlocks and removes files that are being worked on but have not changed. For each file given, rcsclean compares the working file and a revision in the corresponding RCS file. If it finds a difference, it does nothing. Otherwise, it first unlocks the revision if the -u option is given, and then removes the working file unless the working file is writable and the revision is locked. It logs its actions by outputting the correspo...
rcsdiff runs diff(1) to compare two revisions of each RCS file given. Pathnames matching an RCS suffix denote RCS files; all others denote working files. Names are paired as explained in ci(1). The option -q suppresses diagnostic output. Zero, one, or two revisions may be specified with -r. The option -ksubst affects keyword substitution when extracting revisions, as described in co(1); for example, -kk -r1.1 -r1.2 ignores differences in keyword values when comparing revisions 1.1 and 1.2. To av...
rcsfreeze assigns a symbolic revision number to a set of RCS files that form a valid configuration. The idea is to run rcsfreeze each time a new version is checked in. A unique symbolic name (C_number, where number is increased each time rcsfreeze is run) is then assigned to the most recent revision of each RCS file of the main trunk. An optional name argument to rcsfreeze gives a symbolic name to the configuration. The unique identifier is still generated and is listed in the log file but it wi...
Author: Walter F. Tichy. Revision Number: 5.7; Release Date: 2000/10/27. Copyright c 1982, 1988, 1989 by Walter F. Tichy. Page 4 RCSINTRO(1) RCSINTRO(1) Copyright c 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993 by Paul Eggert.
rcsmerge incorporates the changes between two revisions of an RCS file into the corresponding working file. Pathnames matching an RCS suffix denote RCS files; all others denote working files. Names are paired as explained in ci(1). At least one revision must be specified with one of the options described below, usually -r. At most two revisions may be specified. If only one revision is specified, the latest revision on the default branch (normally the highest branch on the trunk) is assumed for ...
rdisc implements the ICMP router discover protocol. The first form of the command is used on hosts and the second form is used on routers. On a host rdisc is invoked at boot time to populate the network routing tables with default routes. On a router it is also invoked at boot time in order to start advertising the router to all the hosts. Host (First Form) On a host rdisc listens on the ALL_HOSTS (224.0.0.1) multicast address ...
Rdist is a program to maintain identical copies of files over multiple hosts. It preserves the owner, group, mode, and mtime of files if possible and can update programs that are executing. Rdist reads commands from distfile to direct the updating of files and/or directories. If distfile is `-', the standard input is used. If no -f option is present, the program looks first for `distfile', then `Distfile' to use as the input. If no names are specified on the command line, rdist will update al...
Rdistd is the server program for the rdist command. It is normally run by rdist via rsh(1). The -S argument must be specified. The option is required so that rdistd is not accidentally started since it normally resides somewhere in a normal user's $PATH.
The read utility will read a single line from standard input. By default, unless the -r option is specified, backslash () acts as an escape character. If standard input is a terminal device and the invoking shell is interactive, read will prompt for a continuation line when: The shell reads an input line ending with a backslash, unless the -r option is specified. A here-document is not terminated after a newline character is entered. The line will be split into fields as in the shell; the first ...
readlink provides command-line access to the readlink(2) system call. readlink uses the readlink(2) system call to print the value of a symbolic link to stdout. If path is not a symbolic link, path is printed ant a non-zero exit status is returned. The readlink command is intended for use by developers who need access to symbolic link contents for their FTR rules.
realpath provides command-line access to the realpath(3C) library routine. realpath uses the realpath(3C) library routine to resolve all links, symbolic links, and references to ``.'' and ``..'' in path and prints the result to stdout. If the realpath(3C) call fails for any reason, path is printed and a non-zero exit status is returned. The realpath command is intended for use by developers who need access to absolute pathnames for their FTR rules....
reaper is responsible for managing a login session via xdm. When a user logs in through xdm, reaper is executed as part of the session. It places a property on the root window which specifies that a login session is in progress, and then exits. When this property is removed from the root window, via execution of endsession, the session is terminated. xdm then puts up the login window and awaits the next login. If reaper is not included in the user's session, such as in a $HOME/.xsession script,...
In an IRIX shell, reboot halts and then restarts the system in an orderly fashion. It is useful after changing the configuration of the system. You must have superuser privilege to use this command. If you are remotely logged in to the system, you are prompted to confirm the reboot. To halt the system before turning it off, use halt(1M) or shutdown(1M) instead of reboot.
sfrecord creates an output file containing audio sample data recorded through the audio hardware. sfrecord records audio input for a time equal to a given -t argument, or until the user sends it an interrupt. The file's sampling rate will be equal to the rate of the default audio input device. This can be set via the -r argument. The format, compression, and channel count can be set via the appropriate arguments. Silicon Graphics has adopted AIFF-C (".aifc" suffix) as its standard interchange...
The regcmp command performs a function similar to regcmp(3X) and, in most cases, precludes the need for calling regcmp(3X) from C programs. This saves on both execution time and program size. The command regcmp compiles the regular expressions in file and places the output in file.i. If the - option is used, the output will be placed in file.c. The format of entries in file is a name (C variable) followed by one or more blanks followed by a regular expression enclosed in double quotes. The outpu...
With On-line Registration, SGI hopes to establish a mutually beneficial information link with the primary user of each low end and high end system. To register your system with SGI, fill out and return your completed Online Registration form via the Internet. Note: You will need to have Netscape (or an equivalent browser) to launch On-line Registration. To Access On-line Registration Double click on the Register_To_Win icon that appears on your desktop at user login or use your web browser to ac...
registrar, which runs on a NIS master only, is a NIS hostname data base update program. A hostname registration request can be sent from either the yp_host(1M) command, or from the PROM IP address auto-registration function. This requests is initially sent to a RPC daemon process rpc.ypupdated(1M). registrar is invoked indirectly by rpc.ypupdated(1M) by an intermediate make file updaters(4). The host-file parameter should be the host file that is used in NIS database makefile, /var/yp/Makefile. ...
reinstallpr deletes and reinstalls all network printers currently installed on the system. Printers physically attached to the system are not deleted or reinstalled.
relnotes is an interface to the on-line release notes. It displays the release notes by product and chapter using the man(1) command. It can also show which products' release notes are installed and the title of each chapter installed. With no arguments, relnotes shows which products have release notes installed. -h shows how to use the command. product shows the chapters that are installed for the named product. If no table of contents file can be found, relnotes shows you a list of chapter nu...
remotedir opens a remote directory. It first attempts to bring up a dirview(1) running on the local workstation displaying the remote directory via autofs(1M). If that fails, remotedir will run accessworkstation(1). -f directory directory is the directory on the remote workstation to view. -h hostname hostname is the remote workstation to log into. -l login login is the login id passed to accessworkstation if autofs cannot access directory. remotedir is used by the file typing rules (FTRs) for O...
Managers display information about your system and provide access to interactive guides (also called tasks) that let you administer your system. For example, the User Manager displays a list of the user accounts currently on the system and gives you access to guides like "Add a User Account" and "Modify a User Account." In a Manager window, you can open a guide by choosing its name from the Task menu or by clicking its button at the bottom of the window. The removable media manager gets its ...
The command, removeOldLangCatalog, is a shell script that checks for the existence of $HOME/.desktop-/configchecks/lastloginlocale. If not found, or if the locale in that file is not the same as the current locale (as set in LANG environment variable), it removes all empty directories under $HOME/.desktop-/iconcatalog/pages. It then writes the current locale in the lastloginlocale file. For information about the entire IRIX Interactive Desktop environment, see the IID(1) man ...
removeSwap removes the specified swap element from the system with the swapctl(2) system call, deletes the disk file corresponding to the swap element, and removes the swap element's entry in /etc/fstab/ This privcmd is not intended for command line use. The swap(1M) command provides a more robust and capable user interface for managing swap from the command line.
renice alters the scheduling priority of one or more running processes. renice'ing a process group causes all processes in the process group to have their scheduling priority altered. renice'ing a user causes all processes owned by the user to have their scheduling priority altered. The -n increment specifies how the system scheduling priority of the specified process(es) is to be adjusted. The increment option-argument is a positive or negative decimal integer that is used to modify the syste...
repquota outputs a summary of the disk usage and quotas for the specified filesystems for all users declared in the local /etc/passwd file. For each user the current number of files and amount of space (in kilobytes) is printed, along with any quotas created with edquota(1M). Using repquota, it is possible to obtain information about the overall XFS quota system as well as output XFS quota limits in a format understood by edquota....
Resize prints a shell command for setting the TERM and TERMCAP environment variables to indicate the current size of xterm window from which the command is run. For this output to take effect, resize must either be evaluated as part of the command line (usually done with a shell alias or function) or else redirected to a file which can then be read in. From the C shell (usually known as /bin/csh), the following alias could be defined in the user's .cshrc: % alias rs 'set noglob; eval `resize`...
The Restore command copies the named file or directory from a local or remote backup tapes to disk. If no file or directory is specified, Restore copies all the files found on the tape to disk. Files are restored into the current directory if the backup tape contains pathnames beginning with ".". Files on disk are overwritten even if they are more recent than the respective files on tape. The options and arguments to Restore are: -h hostname If a tape drive attached to a remote host is used fo...
restore, and rrestore are applicable only to dumps made by dump(1m) from EFS filesystems, but they can restore files into any type of filesystem, not just an EFS filesystem. restore reads tapes dumped with the dump(1M) command and restores them relative to the current directory. Its actions are controlled by the key argument. The key is a string of characters containing at most one function letter and possibly one or more function modifiers. Any arguments supplied for specific options are given ...
restore, and rrestore are applicable only to dumps made by dump(1m) from EFS filesystems, but they can restore files into any type of filesystem, not just an EFS filesystem. restore reads tapes dumped with the dump(1M) command and restores them relative to the current directory. Its actions are controlled by the key argument. The key is a string of characters containing at most one function letter and possibly one or more function modifiers. Any arguments supplied for specific options are given ...
All named files are recreated with their current symbolic link information. A symbolic link is a special kind of file whose contents are the name of another file (see symlink(2)). A symbolic link contains the name of the file to which it is linked, and is created with the ln(1) command. The resymlink command allows a user to recreate a current symbolic link, possibly using different filesystem creation policies. In particular, if the Extent Filesystem global system parameter efs_inline is non-ze...
revo is an interactive Inventor program for creating 3d objects by drawing a curve and then revolving it around an axis. The program has two main viewing windows: the curve view and the 3d rendered view. To create a object, click the left mouse button in the curve view near the default blue line. Hold the button down and continue to move the mouse, the point will be dragged. You can drag existing points on the curve by clicking and dragging. To delete a point from the curve, simply click the poi...
rexd is the rpc(4) server for remote program execution. This daemon is started by inetd(1M) whenever a remote execution request is made (see the note below). For non-interactive programs, standard file descriptors are connected directly to TCP connections. Interactive programs involve pseudo-terminals, similar to the login sessions provided by rlogin(1C). This daemon may use NFS to mount filesystems specified in the remote execution request. rexd should be used on trusted networks only. It is no...
Rexecd is the server for the rexec(3N) routine. The server provides remote execution facilities with authentication based on user names and passwords. NOTE: password aging is not supported by this daemon. Rexecd listens for service requests at the port indicated in the ``exec'' service specification; see services(4). When a service request is received the following protocol is initiated: 1) The server reads characters from the socket up to a null (`\0') byte. The resultant string is interpre...
rfind is a fast, client-server adaptation of the find(1) command. It maps the specified file-system name to a host machine, and submits the search-expression to the rfindd(1M) daemon running on that host, for evaluation over the specified file-system. The rfindd(1M) daemon searches side files for the requested information, and returns it to rfind(1) for display on stdout. These side files were previously created by the fsdump(1M) command, and contain information about a particular file-system If...
rfindd is the daemon that handles requests from rfind(1). This daemon is started during system initialization from the /etc/init.d/rfindd script if the configuration flag rfindd is set on. Use the chkconfig(1M) command to turn this flag on or off. See the fsdump(1M) reference page for more details.
rgb reads the standard input and writes ndbm files /usr/lib/X11/rgb.pag and /usr/lib/X11/rgb.dir. These files are suitable for use by the X server. The expected use of rgb is to support custom modification of /usr/lib/X11/rgb.txt. Typically, it is used by invoking: rgb < [path]rgb.txt NOTE: You must have permission enabling you to write the files in /usr/lib/X11. Typically, this means running as the Super-User....
On systems with TSIX networking enabled, the kernel uses an internal lookup table, called the internal Remote Host Database (RHDB), to enforce per host security policy. The rhost command loads the RHDB with the attributes of remote hosts and networks, specified in /etc/rhost.conf.
The ripsock program accepts data from stdin and sends it to the specified TCP/IP socket. Its purpose is to send the output of a spooler to a RIP that accepts data that way without ever hitting disk. This filter is designed to be called from a "Custom" print queue. The flags are defined as follows: -h specifies the host to send the job to. The default is the local host. -s defines the name of the service (as specified in /etc/services) to be used. Defaults to "dps". If a port is specified, th...
rlog prints information about RCS files. Pathnames matching an RCS suffix denote RCS files; all others denote working files. Names are paired as explained in ci(1). rlog prints the following information for each RCS file: RCS pathname, working pathname, head (i.e., the number of the latest revision on the trunk), default branch, access list, locks, symbolic names, suffix, total number of revisions, number of revisions selected for printing, and descriptive text. This is followed by entries for t...
rlogin connects your terminal on the current local host system to the remote host system rhost. The remote username used is the same as your local username, unless you specify a different remote name with the -l option or use the username@rhost format. The rlogin arguments and options are: rhost The hostname of the remote system. username The user ID to be used on the remote system. -l username Specifies the user ID to be used on the remote system. -ec Specifies a different escape character. The...
Rlogind is the server for the rlogin(1C) program. The server provides a remote login facility with authentication based on privileged port numbers from trusted hosts. The -a option verifies the remote host name and address match on all incoming connections. Normally this check is performed only for connections from hosts in the local domain. The -l option disables validation using .rhosts files, unless the user is logging in as the superuser. Transport-level keep-alive messages are enabled unles...
rm removes the entries for one or more files from a directory. It does not remove .. and anything above target directory when invoked with an argument which ends in /.. It will print error messages in these cases. If the directory containing the file to be removed has the 'sticky' bit set (see chmod(2)) then in order to remove the file one of the following must be true: the user owns the file, the user owns the directory, or the user is the super-user. If the kernel tunable xpg4_sticky_b...
Rmail interprets incoming mail received via uucp(1), collapsing ``From'' lines in the form generated by mail.local(8) into a single line of the form ``return-path!sender'', and passing the processed mail on to sendmail(8). Rmail is explicitly designed for use with uucp and sendmail.
rmdefpriv removes an entry from the defaultPrivileges(4) database. After running rmdefpriv, privilege will no longer be a default privilege (see runpriv(1M)). In order to run rmdefpriv, you must either be running as root or you must provide the -auth auth-scheme arguments and pass the authentication test. If auth-scheme is unix, then must you type the root password when prompted in order to pass. The ability to run rmdefpriv is not itself a privilege. root cannot give other users the ability to ...
rmdel removes the delta specified by the SID from each named SCCS file. The delta to be removed must be the newest (most recent) delta in its branch in the delta chain of each named SCCS file. In addition, the specified must not be that of a version being edited for the purpose of making a delta (i. e., if a p-file [see get(1)] exists for the named SCCS file, the specified must not appear in any entry of the p-file). The -r option is used for specifying the SID (SCCS IDentification) level of the...
Rmfstabentry removes a filesystem entry from the /etc/fstab file. The filesystem is not unmounted. Use umountfs(1M) to unmount the filesystem before executing this command.
rmprinter removes a printer from the System V printer spooling system. Normally, if print jobs are pending in the print queue, rmprinter will not remove the printer. If the -f flag is specified, the printer will be removed regardless of pending print jobs. In this case the pending print jobs will not be printed. If the -x flag is specified, any pending print jobs will be moved to dest printer and then the printer will be removed. More than one printer can be specified for removal at one time. If...
rmpriv removes the entry in the privilege(4) database that grants privilege to user. If the -acct argument is specified, then all privileges will be removed for user. If the -all argument is specified, then all users will lose privilege. The -chkconfig option is used to disable all privileges on the system. rmpriv -chkconfig runs the command chkconfig privileges off. To see the privileges associated with individual tasks, choose "View as Tasks" from the Privilege Manager menu. See privmgr(1M)....
rmprivuser removes an entry from the privilegedUsers(4) database. username will no longer be a privileged user. username may still be able to run privileged commands; see runpriv(1M) for a description of the criteria for a user to be able to run a privileged command. In order to run rmprivuser, you must either be running as root or you must provide the -auth auth-scheme arguments and pass the authentication test. If auth-scheme is unix, then must you type the root password when prompted in order...
Rmt is a program used by the remote programs in manipulating a magnetic tape drive through an interprocess communication connection. Rmt is normally started up with an rexec(3N) or rcmd(3N) call. The rmt program accepts requests specific to the manipulation of magnetic tapes, performs the commands, then responds with a status indication. All responses are in ASCII and in one of two forms. Successful commands have responses of: Anumber\n where number is an ASCII representation of a decimal numbe...
roboinst is a tool to help automate the process of upgrading software on a number of hosts. roboinst can help in automating installing and upgrading operating system and application software, installing patches, repartitioning disks, and other software installation tasks. More complete documentation is provided in the online book IRIX Admin: Software Installation and Licensing. This book can be obtained by installing the eoe.books.sgi_admin subsystem using inst(1M) or Software Manager(1M). Once ...
roboinst_config is run on the configuration server system to check and index the contents of an roboinst configuration directory (configdir). The mrconfig file is parsed for errors, other scripts, if any, are checked, and a table of contents is built. Any custom configuration directories (for specific hardware or network addresses) beneath the configuration directory are also checked and included in the table of contents. roboinst_config first reads the mrconfig file. The mrconfig file must be p...
Route is a utility used to manually manipulate the network routing tables. It normally is not needed, as a system routing table management daemon such as routed(1M), should tend to this task. The route utility supports a limited number of general options, but a rich command language, enabling the user to specify any arbitrary request that could be delivered via the programmatic interface -n Bypasses attempts to print host and network names symbolically when reporting actions. (The process of tra...
Routed is a dameon invoked at boot time to manage the network routing tables. It uses Routing Information Protocol, RIPv1 (RFC 1058), RIPv2 (RFC 1723), and Internet Router Discovery Protocol (RFC 1256) to maintain the kernel routing table. The RIPv1 protocol is based on the reference 4.3BSD daemon. It listens on the udp(7P) socket for the route service (see services(4)) for Routing Information Protocol packets. It also sends and receives multicast Router Discovery ICMP messages. If the host is a...
routeprint is a utility accessible from the IRIX command line to request a Bourne Shell command line which will convert the given file to the requested format. routeprint may also be used to convert files of various types to print on one of a set of desired printers. routeprint uses file types specified on the command line to look up print conversion rules for each file to be printed. The conversion rules are located in compiled .otr files in /usr/lib/filetype. The older ftr(1) database format, ...
rpc.passwd is a server that handles password change requests from yppasswd(1). It changes a password entry in the passwd file or if present, the shadow file. These files provide the basis for the passwd.byname and passwd.byuid maps. Entries in the passwd or shadow files are only changed if the password presented by yppasswd(1) matches the encrypted password of the entry. If the -D option is given the passwd or shadow files are located under the directory path specified with -D. The default direc...
rpcbind is a server that converts RPC program numbers into universal addresses. It must be running to make RPC calls. When an RPC service is started, it will tell rpcbind at what address it is listening, and what RPC program numbers it is prepared to serve. When a client wishes to make an RPC call to a given program number, it will first contact rpcbind on the server machine to determine the address where RPC packets should be sent. ...
This tool is part of the Samba suite. rpcclient is a utility initially developed to test MS-RPC functionality in Samba itself. It has undergone several stages of development and stability. Many system administrators have now written scripts around it to manage Windows NT clients from their UNIX workstation.
rpcgen is a tool that generates C code to implement an RPC protocol. rpcgen will produce file to be used with libc [see intro.3n(1)]. To produce file to be used with libnsl see rpcgen_tli(1). The input to rpcgen is a language similar to C known as RPC Language (Remote Procedure Call Language). rpcgen is normally used as in the first synopsis where it takes an input file and ...
rpcgen_tli is a tool that generates C code to implement an RPC protocol. rpcgen_tli will produce files to be used with libnsl [see intro.3n(1)]. To produce files to be used with the libc see rpcgen(1). The input to rpcgen_tli is a language similar to C known as RPC Language (Remote Procedure Call Language). rpcgen_tli is normally used as in the fir...
The rqsall command is used to requickstart ELF files that are out of sync on a system. This command reads a description of the ELF files that have been recorded (in an undocumented plain text format) in ifile. Those descriptions are generated using the rqsread command. Using those descriptions this command determines which ELF files will not quickstart when executed. For each of those files, this command will normally execute the command /usr/etc/rqs or /usr/etc/rqs64 (as appropriate) on that fi...
The rqsprint command is display information relating to a collection of ELF files on a system. This command reads a description of the ELF files that have been recorded in file. Those descriptions are generated using the rqsread command. Using those descriptions this command can be used to determine which files will not quickstart, which files have conflict symbols, the set of files that will be loaded when executing a particular file, etc. This command takes two set of options. The preoptions a...
The rqsread extracts the information needed by the program rqsall from files, so that rqsall can determine whether the files should be requickstarted or if other files that depend on files need to be requickstarted. If no files are specified and no other list of files has been specified using the -l option, then this command will read a list of files (one per line) to process from stdin. -c outfile Causes the output to be written to outfile. outfile is truncated if it already exists. -f outfile ...
rquotad is an rpc(4) server that returns quotas for a user of a local filesystem that is mounted by a remote machine using NFS. The results are used by quota(1) to display user quotas for remote filesystems. The rquotad daemon is normally invoked by inetd(1M).
Rshd is the server for the rcmd(3N) routine and, consequently, for the rsh(1C) program. The server provides remote execution facilities with authentication based on privileged port numbers from trusted hosts. The -a option verifies the remote host name and address match on all incoming connections. Normally this check is performed only for connections from hosts in the local domain. The -l option disables validation using .rhosts files. Transport-level keep-alive messages are enabled unless the ...
rsh connects to the specified host, and executes the specified command. rsh copies its standard input to the remote command, the standard output of the remote command to its standard output, and the standard error of the remote command to its standard error. Interrupt, quit, and terminate signals are propagated to the remote command; rsh normally terminates when the remote command does. The remote username used is the same as your local username, unless you specify a different remote name with t...
Rstat displays the RSVP reservation state on the local system or on any specific remote node. In default operation, rstat displays reservation state for each interface and each session (destination address and port) for which there is a reservation. Each line contains the interface name, the style, the session address and port, the filter spec selecting sender(s), and the next hop address. If there is path state but no reservation, rstat simply lists the session with the notation "(no resv)". ...
Rsvpd is a daemon program that uses the RSVP resource reservation protocol to set up reservation state in hosts and routers. It supports an API that allows applications to make reservation requests. It includes an adaptation module to the admission control and traffic control mechanisms provided by the output device drivers in the kernel. rsvpd contains a SNMP agent, called rsvpd-snmpagent. The rsvpd-snmpagent allows SNMP managers to read all RSVP and Integrated Service MIB variables, and to wri...
The RSVP daemon rsvpd is capable of multicasting UDP packets containing diagnostic information (a summary of its internal state) periodically and whenever the state changes. Rsvpeep is a command-line program to receive and display this state. By default rsvpeep will display state from all nodes. However, if one or more node_ID parameters occur, rsvpeep will display only the state from the specified node(s). A node_ID is the first component of the DNS name of a node....
Rsvpfilter selects which RSVP messages are selected according to the IP address. In the normal operation of rsvpd, all debugging messages of all sessions are logged as requested by the debugging mask and debugging level. Filter allows a user to request that messages of only specific sessions specified by IP address are logged. By default, rsvpd has filtering turned off. The on and off options turn filtering on and off respectively. When filtering is on, IP addresses to filter on can be added and...
Rsync synchronize RCS working files with the top revisions in their version files. The option -v causes more verbose output. If given twice, each directory name is printed as it is encountered. The option -rrcsdir specifies the name of RCS subdirectories. The default is "RCS". The option -ccmd causes cmd to be used instead of the default co. The option -R causes rsync to descend and synchronize the entire subtree below each specified directory. For each RCS file discovered, if the correspondin...
Rtap is an interactive test program that drives the RSVP daemon through the RSVP API. Rtap may be used either as a standalone application, or it may be linked directly into the RSVP daemon. Rtap repeatedly displays the command prompt >, and executes each command as it is entered. For the standalone version, -f parameter will execute a stream of commands from the file file_name; at the end of that file, rtap will enter interactive mode. This man page describes the rtap program included with Relea...
rtmon-client connects to the rtmond daemon running on the machine hostname and collects event data for one or more CPUs. This event data can be displayed by programs such as par(1), rtmon-dump(1), and the optional IRIXview(1) product. If event collection is done for an unspecified period of time (see the -t option below) then rtmon-client will collect event data until it is interrupted.
rtmon-dump prints binary event data collected from an rtmond(1) server process using rtmon-client(1) or padc(1). Data can be read from a file or from the standard input. By default, rtmon-dump displays all interesting events found in a file using the same format as par(1). Various options are provided for filtering which events are printed and how they are displayed.
rtmon-run is used in conjuction with rtmon-client(1) to collect system call and context switch events from a remote machine. rtmon-run marks one or more processes for system call and context switch event tracing and then pauses waiting for an interrupt or a time limit to expire. If no processes are specified on the command line, the entire system is monitored. Event collection must be done separately; typically from another machine with the rtmon-client application. rtmon-run must be run on the ...
rtmond is the server process that collects system and user events and dispatches them to clients such as padc(1), IRIXview(1), and rtmon- client(1). In normal operation, rtmond is atomatically started when the system is booted. Only one copy of rtmond can be started per machine. When clients connect to rtmond and request event data, rtmond creates additional children to collect event data from each CPU that event data is being requested for (if such children are not already run...
The rtmpd daemon is a host daemon which manages AppleTalk Routing Table Maintenance Protocol (RTMP) requests. It listens on the well-known RTMP and RTMPReq sockets. On machines with one Ethernet interface, it advertises the presence of the local pseudo-network. On machines with more than one interface, rtmpd advertises the networks on the other interfaces. Killing rtmp with a SIGUSR2 will cause it to dump its table of networks in /usr/adm/appletalk/at_log. -D Causes rtmpd to run in the foregroun...
Rtquery is used to query a RIP network routing daemon, routed(1M) or gated(1M), for its routing table by sending a request or poll command. The routing information in any routing response packets returned is displayed numerically and symbolically. Rtquery by default uses the request command. When the -p option is specified, rtquery uses the poll command, an undocumented extension to the RIP specification supported by gated(1M). When querying gated(1M), the poll command is preferred over the Requ...
The run-proclaim shell script is called during system startup from /etc/rc2 to obtain (or verify) an IP address and host configuration parameters. The script is called during system shutdown from /etc/rc0 to gracefully kill the proclaim(1) client. The arguments to run-proclaim are: start Do the following, using the configuration flags described below: o Kill any existing proclaim clients. o Run the proclaim client with the -i option to verify an existing lease if one exists and obtain a new addr...
runacct is the main daily accounting shell procedure. It is normally initiated via cron. runacct processes connect, fee, disk, and process accounting files. It also prepares summary files for prdaily or billing purposes. runacct takes care not to damage active accounting files or summary files in the event of errors. It records its progress by writing descriptive diagnostic messages into active. When ...
runcatalog runs a system administration manager. catalog-descriptor is a catalog descriptor file that contains a specification of the library that implements the manager and any privileges needed by the manager. Catalog descriptor files contain the pathname to the DSO that implements the catalog, the pathname to the DSO that implements the status panel for the object type monitored by the catalog, and a title, description, and list of keywords for the catalog....
runexec Runs the executable described by executable-descriptor, which is an executable descriptor file. The purpose of an executable descriptor file is to specify certain auxiliary information about a program that can by used by the System Manager (sysmgr(1M)). If operand is specified, it is passed on the command line to the executable described in executable-descriptor.
runon executes command, assigning it to run only on cpu n, where n varies between 0 and the number of processors on the system minus one. (For single-processor systems, then, there is only cpu 0.) This cpu affinity is inherited across fork() and exec() system calls. A sysmp(2) call can change the cpu affinity. Note that command may still run on other processors, briefly, to perform i/o or other hardwarespecific actions. runon can not run a command on a cpu that is part of a cpuset unless the use...
runpanel runs a system administration status panel. A status panel displays the status for an object on the system such as a user account. catalog-descriptor is a catalog descriptor file that specifies which class of system administration objects the status panel is for. object specifies which object in that class to display.
runpriv checks to see if you have been granted privilege, and if so it runs the command privilege found in the directory /usr/sysadm/privbin with the remaining arguments. runpriv succeeds if any one of following conditions are met: 1. You are running as root. 2. There is no root password on the system. 3. The file /var/sysadm/defaultPrivileges/privilege exists and has the string "on" as its first line (see defaultPrivileges(4)). 4. There is an entry in the privilegedUsers(4) database granting ...
runtask runs a system administration active guide specified by task- descriptor. Task descriptor files are located in /usr/sysadm/taskdf, and specify the library that implements the task, the privileges it requires, and a task name, description, and keywords used for the search feature in System Manager (sysmgr(1M)). Active guides typically use runtask(1M) to implement their actions.
Rup gives a status similar to uptime for remote machines; it broadcasts on the local network, and displays the responses it receives. Normally, the listing is in the order that responses are received, but this order can be changed by specifying one of the options listed below. When host arguments are given, rather than broadcasting rup will only query the list of specified hosts. Any sorting options are ignored in this case. A remote host will only respond if it is running the rstatd daemon, whi...
Ruptime gives a status line like uptime for each machine on the local network; these are formed from packets broadcast by each host on the network every three minutes. Machines for which no status report has been received for 11 minutes are shown as being down. Users idle an hour or more are not counted unless the -a flag is given. Normally, the listing is sorted by host name. The -l , -t , and -u flags specify sorting by load average, uptime, and number of users, respectively. The -r flag rever...
The rusers command produces a listing of users on remote machines. It broadcasts on the local network, and prints the responses it receives. Normally, the listing is in the order that responses are received, but this order can be changed by specifying one of the options listed below. When host arguments are given, rather than broadcasting rusers will only query the list of specified hosts. The default is to print out a listing with one line per machine. When the -l flag is given, a who(1) style ...
Rwall reads a message from standard input until end-of-file. It then sends this message, preceded by the line ``Broadcast Message ...'', to all users logged in on the specified host machines. With the -n option, it sends to the specified network groups, which are defined in netgroup(4). A machine can only receive such a message if it is running rwalld(1m), which is normally started up by the daemon inetd(1m)....
Rwalld is a server that handles rwall(1) and shutdown(1) requests. It is implemented by calling wall(1) to all the appropriate network machines. The rwalld daemon is normally invoked by inetd(1M).
The rwho command produces output similar to who, but for all machines on the local network. If no report has been received from a machine for 5 minutes then rwho assumes the machine is down, and does not report users last known to be logged into that machine. If a user hasn't typed to the system for a minute or more, then rwho reports this idle time. If a user hasn't typed to the system for an hour or more, then the user will be omitted from the output of rwho unless the -a flag is given....
Rwhod is the server which maintains the database used by the rwho(1C) and ruptime(1C) programs. Its operation is predicated on the ability to broadcast or multicast messages on a network. Rwhod is started at system initialization if the configuration flag rwhod is set ``on'' with chkconfig(1M). Site-dependent options and arguments to rwhod belong in the file /etc/config/rwhod.options. Rwhod operates as both a producer and consumer of status information. As a producer of information it periodic...
The Service Access Controller (SAC) is the overseer of the server machine. It is started when the server machine enters multiuser mode. The SAC performs several important functions as explained below. Customizing the SAC environment. When sac is invoked, it first looks for the per-system configuration script /etc/saf/_sysconfig. sac interprets _sysconfig to customize its own environment. The modifi...
sact informs the user of any impending deltas to a named SCCS file. This situation occurs when get(1) with the -e option has been previously executed without a subsequent execution of delta(1). If a directory is named on the command line, sact behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files and unreadable files are silently ignored. If a name of - is given, the standard input is read with each line being taken as the name of an SCCS file to...
sar, in the first instance, samples cumulative activity counters in the operating system at n intervals of t seconds, where t should be 5 or greater. If the -o option is specified, it saves the samples in file in binary format. The default value of n is 1. In the second instance, with no sampling interval specified, sar extracts data from a previously recorded file, either the one specified by -f option or, by default, the standard system activity daily data file /var/adm/sa/sadd for the current...
satconfig is a graphical user interface to saton(2), satoff(2), and satstate(2). It provides equivalent functionality to sat_select(1M). satconfig is fully self documenting. From the right hand corner of the menu bar, choose the help pull down. Choose Help Using Program for a complete explanation of the graphical user interface. Choose Help Choosing Events for one line descriptions of each audit event. SEE ALSO, sat_select(1M), saton(2), satoff(2), satstate(2). PPPPaaaaggggeeee 111...
satd saves its input data in the directories and/or files named in its path arguments. When one output path becomes full, satd replaces the current output path with a path that is not full. The method of replacement is configurable with the -r option. The output path is also replaced if satd receives a SIGHUP signal, for instance one sent with a kill -1 command. If an output path becomes nearly full, warnings are displayed to the system console to notify the administrator to move the audit trail...
sat_echo inserts the data from its standard input into the system audit trail. (Only the first 65535 bytes of standard input are used; the rest are discarded.) Use sat_echo in shell scripts that enforce security policy and must generate audit records.
sat_interpret takes binary audit records from standard input or optionally a file and prints the records to standard output in English. The auditing subsystem was changed with Irix 6.5, and audit records written on Irix 6.5 or later systems are shown in a different format than records that were written under previous release levels of Irix. To illustrate the output format of sat_interpret, the following is an example of an Irix 6.5 audit record: sat_open_ro,Success TIME = (09/23/1998,15:18:18) S...
sat_reduce examines an input stream of binary audit data, selects records that match the criteria specified by its run time arguments, and prints the chosen records in binary to standard output.
sat_select directs the system audit trail to collect records of a particular idtype describing certain events and to ignore records describing certain other events. Note that if no idtype is specified, then the events will be default to global event mask. sat_select with no arguments lists the audit events currently being collected. The effect of multiple executions of sat_select is cumulative. The auditable event types are described in the IRIX Admin: Backup, Security, and Accounting. For a bri...
sat_summarize prints a statistical summary of the audit trail to the standard output device. Data is displayed either when end of file is reached on input or when sat_summarize receives the SIGUSR1 signal. Run time options determine the format of the printout and which statistics are presented.
savecore is meant to be called by /etc/rc2.d/S48savecore. savecore attempts to save the core dump of the system (assuming one was made) and write a reboot message in the shutdown log. The S48savecore script will save all output files to dirname, which defaults to /var/adm/crash, unless overridden by site-specific command-line options in the file /etc/config/savecore.options. In the event of a software-detectable system crash, one of the last steps that the kernel performs before shutting down is...
Sccs is a front end to the SCCS programs that helps them mesh more cleanly with the rest of UNIX. It also includes the capability to run ``set user id'' to another user to provide additional protection. Basically, sccs runs the command with the specified flags and args. Each argument is normally modified to be prepended with ``SCCS/s.''. Flags to be interpreted by the sccs program must be before the command argument. Flags to be passed to the actual SCCS program must come after the command a...
sccsdiff compares two versions of an SCCS file and generates the differences between the two versions. Any number of SCCS files may be specified, but arguments apply to all files. -rSID? SID1 and SID2 specify the deltas of an SCCS file that are to be compared. Versions are passed to bdiff(1) in the order given. -p pipe output for each file through pr(1). -sn n is the file segment size that bdiff will pass to diff(1). This is useful when diff fails due to a high system load....
SceneViewer is a program for viewing and interacting with Inventor scene graph files (the SGI 3D file format standard). SceneViewer was written to demonstrate Inventor features, and serves as the basis for the IRIS Explorer Render Module. When SceneViewer is run, a window appears containing the Inventor examiner viewer and a menu bar. The viewer allows the user to interactively change the view of the scene through direct manipulation, or indirect slider and push button controls. The menu bar con...
The schemebr panel allows the user to select a new color scheme in which subsequently launched window applications will appear. It also lets users create new color schemes. The panel can be launched from a Unix shell command line, or from the toolchest (Desktop > Customize > Color Schemes). Like most other customization panels, the schemebr panel has the ``runonce'' feature, meaning only one instance of the application will run at one time. Attempting to launch the application a second time wi...
Script makes a typescript of everything printed on your terminal. The typescript is written to file, or appended to file if the -a option is given. It can be sent to the line printer later with lp. If no file name is given, the typescript is saved in the file typescript. The script ends when the forked shell exits. This program is useful when using a crt and a hard-copy record of the dialog is desired, as for a student handing in a program that was developed on a crt when hard-copy terminals are...
scsiadminswap allows a user to live plug or unplug a scsi device assuming it is not a primary resource (such as the system disk). There are three required options. These indicate whether to perform a plug or an unplug and provide a bus and device number. An additional argument can be used to change the default timeout value. To execute scsiadminswap, a user must have root status. There are many different ways that a disk may be accessed. While this man page outlines and gives examples of the mor...
scsicontrol may be used to print info from the SCSI inquiry commands, which normally indicate the device type, manufacturer, and similar info. Other options may be used show more data, or to issue commands that control the operation of the device, or the bus as a whole. By using the debug option (-d), the exact command sent, and the data returned (if any) is displayed, along with more extensive error information. The device(s) may be specified without the normal /dev/scsi prefix, if desired. -C ...
The first form is used to dump failover status, while the second and third are used to initiate failover. The device-name required when performing a failover should be that of the a disk (raw or block) or a devscsi device associated with the primary path of the group the failover is being attempted on. The difference between the -s and -t options is that the former will choose paths that do not require a controller tresspass in preference to paths that do, while the latter will choose the next p...
scsiha is used to perform operations on fibrechannel loops of SCSI devices and parallel SCSI buses. The following options apply to both parallel SCSI and fibrechannel SCSI: -p Probe for devices on the bus or loop. On parallel SCSI buses, this option causes the driver to look for devices at every ID on the SCSI bus. On fibrechannel SCSI loops, this option causes the driver to look for devices at every ID that was reported in use at the most recent loop initialization. On parallel SCSI buses, when...
scsiquiesce is used to stop all operations on a SCSI bus for a specific amount of time. Ctrl-C kills the quiesce. You can extend the quiesce time by pressing the Enter key and inputting additional quiesce time. When the quiesce completes, the bus is rescanned for new devices. The options are: -q bus_quiesce_time Quiesce time in seconds. This required option informs the low level SCSI driver how many seconds to quiesce the bus for. -t quiesce_in_progress_timeout How long the low level driver shou...
sdiff uses the output of diff(1) to produce a side-by-side listing of two files indicating those lines that are different. Each line of the two files is printed with a blank gutter between them if the lines are identical, a < in the gutter if the line only exists in file1, a > in the gutter if the line only exists in file2, and a | for lines that are different. For example: x | y a a b < c < d d > c The following options exist: -w n Use the next argument, n, as the width of the output line. The ...
sdpd listens for multicast announcements on the network (as observed by the server), maintains an updated list of these announcements, and makes them available to clients through the use of the .sdr mime type suffix. sdpd also maintains a list of locally created announcements, broadcasting the information periodically. The sdpd server supports Mbone announcements of type SPD V1, SPD V2, and SGI Radio....
sdr-launch is a HTTP helper application that is launched on the client system through the use of the .sdr mime typeextension. This application parses the session directory announcement sent by the Web Server and after consulting the transformations file (mbone-fmt.txt) launches the appropriate media tool for audio, video, whiteboard announcements.
The searchbook (or search tool) contains named pages on which users can create queries to find files. The user can launch searchbook from the toolchest (Find > Search For Files) or at a Unix shell command line. This application has the ``runonce'' feature, meaning only one instance of the application will run at one time. Attempting to launch the application a second time will have the effect of deiconifying the application window or popping it to the top on the current desk. The options have ...
This command tries to improve the security of the system by modifying parameters that affect the security of the system. They include disable or enable Java and/or JavScript for user accounts, add password, lock or delete user accounts, remove NIS accounts, lock out an account if it has no password, use shadow password, turn off graphical login (clogin(1)), disable the use of privilege accounts on system adminitration tools (see PrivilegeManager(1M)), disable the display of windows of remote sys...
sed copies the named files (standard input default) to the standard output, edited according to a script of commands. The -e option causes the script to be take from the script option argument. The -f option causes the script to be taken from file script_file. The scripts from the -e and -f options accumulate. If there is just one -e option and no -f options, the flag -e may be omitted. The -n option suppresses the default output. sed has two operating modes. By default, sed operates compatibly ...
Sendmail sends a message to one or more recipients, routing the message over whatever networks are necessary. Sendmail does internetwork forwarding as necessary to deliver the message to the correct place. Sendmail is not intended as a user interface routine; other programs provide user-friendly front ends; sendmail is used only to deliver pre-formatted messages. With no flags, sendmail reads its standard input up to an end-of-file or a line consisting only of a single dot and sends a copy of th...
Managers display information about your system and provide access to interactive guides (also called tasks) that let you administer your system. For example, the User Manager displays a list of the user accounts currently on the system and gives you access to guides like "Add a User Account" and "Modify a User Account." In a Manager window, you can open a guide by choosing its name from the Task menu or by clicking its button at the bottom of the window. The serial device manager displays an...
sesdaemon is a daemon which allows communication with attached fibre channel drive enclosures; status is collected and re-configuration is allowed. The low-level transport protocol is the industry standard SES (SCSI-3 Enclosure Services). See sesmgr(1M) for details. The sesdaemon is normally started automatically during boot if sesdaemon is chkconfig'ed on. One process containing 4 threads is started for each instance of sesdaemon; the backend polling thread which handles polling the drive encl...
The sesmgr command is a user front end to sesdaemon which collects status of all supported fibre channel enclosures and allows for configuration changes.
The setAudioDevice program sets the SoundScheme audio output device. Applications that play sounds through SoundScheme (for example, the IRIX Interactive Desktop software) will be affected. This program is not intended to be run by end users. If no argument is given, then SoundScheme sounds will be made to play through the Default Output as set on the audiopanel(1) control panel. If a non-negative integer argument whichDevice is specified on the command line, then SoundScheme sounds will be play...
setdevperms adds or removes entries from the /etc/ioperms file. If the line exists in the file then it is not added. If the line to delete exists more then once in the file then all occurrences are deleted. When deleting a line leading and trailing white space is NOT ignored. Any line to add or delete must start with "/dev" or "#". There are no other syntax checks performed on lines added or removed. Multiple lines can be added and removed at the same time by specifying multiple instances of...
setDiskParts changes the partion table in a disk's volume header. The setDiskParts privcmd is used by Tasks which need to change partition information, since root permission is required to write to the disk's volume header. This privcmd should not be called directly from the command line. fx provides a much more robust user interface for accomplishing the same operations.
setlogopt is a privileged command that sets options that control system administration logging. rotsize is the size in bytes that the log file /var/sysadm/salog is allowed to reach before it gets rotated to /var/sysadm/oldsalog. If -syslog is specified, messages in /var/sysadm/salog will be copied to syslogd(1M). -nosyslog turns off the copying of messages to syslogd.
setmnt creates the /etc/mtab table, which is used by the mount(1M) and umount commands, among others. If given the -f option, it creates an alternate mtab. setmnt reads standard input and writes an entry in mtab(4) format for each line read. Input lines have the format: fsname dir where fsname is the name of the filesystem's special file (for example, /dev/dsk/dks?d?s?) and dir is the mountpoint of that filesystem. Thus, fsname and dir become the first two strings in the mount table entry....
setmon changes the video output format to the one specified; it also specifies the default video format to be used at system power-up or graphics initialization. You must set the DISPLAY environment variable to the local machine (e.g. :0.0) so that any GL calls that setmon makes will occur on the local machine, and not over a network interface. If none of (-n, -x, -w) options are specified on the command line, then setmon will prompt for input to determine whether the format being loaded should ...
setNameServers is a privileged command that edits /etc/resolv.conf to contain the nameserver entries specified on the command line. After setNameServers runs, the only nameserver entries in /etc/resolv.conf will be those that were specified on the command line. Thus, if no nameserver entries are specified, all nameserver entries in /etc/resolv.conf will be removed. Between 0 and 3 nameservers can be specified on the command line....
setPowerSaver checks to see if the system's monitor supports the powersave option. If it is supported, setPowerSaver sets the powersave to a default of 1200 seconds (20 minutes). This program is intended to be run whenever the user logs into the system and has not (yet) chosen a custom screensaver. The Xsession.dt file executes setPowerSaver automatically; the program is not intended to be run on the command line by end users. If it is run in this way, it will simply reset the powersave timeout...
setsym reads in the symbol table of the file filename and writes it back into an internal symbol table that is part of the filename .data section. The input file is intended to be a debug kernel. This internal symbol table is used by symmon(1M) for symbolic debugging of the kernel. Normally, filename is unix or unix.install. The -d flag Dump symbols from already processed file. The -e flag includes ELF symbols only (default is ELF & DWARF). Additional error messages can be seen with the -v flag....
settime sets the access and modification dates for one or more files. The dates are set to the specified date, or to the access and modification dates of the file specified via -f. Exactly one of these methods must be used to specify the new date(s). The first mm is the month number; dd is the day number in the month; hh is the hour number (24 hour system); the second mm is the minute number; yy is the last two digits of the year and is optional. For example: se<...
setupMacPrinters is a privileged command that installs a printer connected to a Macintosh or a NetWare server. After the installation, the installed printer can be administered by the Printer Manager and will work like a general printer connected to an SGI machine. The Macintosh or NetWare server needs to be on the same network as the SGI machine. The printerInfo string includes all the configuration information needed in the installation. If it is a Macintosh printer, printerInfo should have an...
The setxkbmap command maps the keyboard to use the layout deterined by the options specified on the command line. An XKB keymap is constructed from a number of components which are compiled only as needed. The source for all of the components can be found in /usr/lib/X11/xkb.
The setxkeymap command maps all of the keys on the keyboard to use the layout specified in a keymap file; keymap files normally have a .xkm extension. The directory /usr/lib/X11/input/PC contains about a dozen keymaps for the Indy and Indigo^2, while /usr/lib/X11/input/SGI contains keymaps for all older machines. In IRIX5.1 and later, the directory /var/X11/input is symbolically linked to the appropriate machine dependent directory. If the specified keymap file is not found, setxkeymap tries add...
set_vacation creates a default vacation message for when you will be away from the office and sets up the .forward file to activate the vacation program. set_vacation will launch the jot editor to allow you to customize the message sent to users when you are gone and sets a default interval of 7 days. PPPPaaaaggggeeee 1111
sfconvert converts a soundfile to another soundfile of a different file format or data format. If invoked with no arguments, sfconvert displays help. The default conversion is to the same format. So, the following invocation: sfconvert in.snd out.snd Is basically like "cp in.snd out.snd," except that it will not copy comments or undocumented chunks found in the input file to the output file. If invoked with a pair of filenames and some output keywords, sfconvert will attempt to open 'infile'...
sfinfo reports information about the soundfile(s) specified. If invoked with no arguments, it will display help. If invoked like: sfinfo flute.aif It will give you info in the format: Filename: flute.aif File Format: Audio Interchange File Format (aiff) Size: 32100 sample frames, 0.73 seconds, 64.6 Kbytes. Format: 1 channel 16-bit integer (2's complement, big endian) file. Sampling Rate: 44.100 kHz. Data begins at offset 402 (192 hex). If you specify the -short (-s) option, sfinfo reports infor...
These keywords are used in situations where information about a soundfile format is needed, such as in sfconvert: sfconvert in.snd out.aif format aiff integer 16 2 chan 2 Specifies a stereo, 16-bit (2's complement signed) integer aiff file. Note that some keywords, such as 'integer', require parameters. These parameters can also be abbreviated, except for the parameter of the 'format' keyword. The 'format' keyword specifies the file format. Currently supported file formats are: aiff Audio...
sfplay plays the given soundfile(s). It will play files in many formats not supported by the audio hardware, by automatically converting the data as it is played. If invoked with no arguments, sfplay will display help. By default, sfplay ignores any file specified that is not a valid soundfile, reporting no error. The -reporterror (-r) option tells sfplay to report an error in this case. It is often useful to see information about soundfiles as they are played. The -printinfo option prints this ...
sgihelp is an online help viewer. This viewer provides an easy-to-use interface which allows the user to browse through help information that is distributed from Silicon Graphics. sgihelp is based on the insight(1) on-line viewing technology. The content for the help information that is displayed is derived from the insight(1) books. sgihelp is an application that gets started only when a request is made for "help". A user should never have to start sgihelp from the commandline, unless it is u...
sgimeeting is a desktop collaboration tool that allows for data conferencing between IRIX desktops and other T.120 compliant applications such as Microsoft NetMeeting and PictureTel LiveShare Plus. sgimeeting provides T.128 application sharing, T.127 file transfer, T.126 whiteboarding, and Microsoft NetMeeting proprietary whiteboarding, chat and shared clipboards. The sgimeeting program contains extensive online help and user guide. Please read the SGImeeting online User's Guide available from ...
Build the .so using the -shared option to ld or cc. Make sure that the build line references all libraries that are needed by the extension library; for example, Tk requires "-lX11 -lc -lm". Adding the -no_unresolved flag will ensure that there are no unresolvable symbols which will probably save you time later. Many of the TCL packages come with a makefile that builds a .a archive which can be given to ld to build the shared object. If not, you'll need to identify what object files need to b...
sgi_use_anyaddr executes command with the reserved range of the virtual address space (from 0x30000000 to 0x40000000) disabled. Normally, the kernel does not auto-place mappings made by mmap(2) and shmat(2) in the reserved range. By disabling the reserved range with sgi_use_anyaddr, the kernel is permitted to use any available virtual address for mapping requests made by command. sgi_use_anyaddr is implemented by invoking syssgi(2) with request parameter...
Note: As of IRIX 6.4, sh is the Korn shell rather than the Bourne shell. See bsh(1) for the Bourne Shell description. See the COMPATIBILITY ISSUES section below for more detail. sh is a command and programming language that executes commands read from a terminal or a file. /usr/lib/rsh is a restricted version of the standard command interpreter sh; it is used to set up login names and execution environments whose capabilities are more controlled than those of the standard shell. S...
sharefinder displays a user interface for accessing shared resources on remote workstations. Three catagories of information are displayed: shared directories, shared removable media devices, and shared printers. The list of shared directories is obtained from the getExportList(1M) privileged command. getExportList uses the mountd(1M) protocol to query the remote workstation for its shared directories. The list of shared removable media devices is obtained from mediad(1M) running on the remote w...
The Shared Resource Manager displays the directories, removable media devices, and printers on your workstation that are shared over the network with other workstations. The directories displayed by sharemgr are those which have been exported via nfs using the exportfs(1M) command. The removable media devices are those which have been shared via mediad(1M). Printers are displayed if remote workstations are allowed to print to your printers, which is controlled by the rhosts(4) file for the lp ac...
sharePrinters is a privileged command that enables the sharing of local printers by editing the .rhosts file for the "lp" user account. When "lp" on one IRIS can rlogin(1C) to the "lp" account on another IRIS, the first IRIS can then forward print jobs to the second IRIS. When the -all option is used, /var/spool/lp/.rhosts is edited to contain one line with the single character '+'. This enables remote access for all hosts. When the -hosts option is used, /var/spool/lp/.rhosts is edited ...
shareRemovableMedia is a privileged command that shares a removable media device with other systems on the network. After running shareRemovableMedia, device will be accessible via mediad(1M) on remote workstations.
Share_inst , client_inst , and clone_client are tools that install the system software for diskless workstations. Share_inst installs the portion of the IRIX operating system that diskless workstations can share. This shared software is known as the share tree. A share tree can contain only one IRIX release; a separate share tree must be installed for each additional IRIX release that clients require. Client_inst installs the software that is used exclusively by an individual diskless client. Th...
Share_setup , client_setup , and verify are tools that help create proper configuration files for diskless installation. Configuration files are fed into share_inst(1M), client_inst(1M), and clone_client(1M) so that installation tools will know the hardware information for the machines that will act as diskless clients. Share_setup allows a user to interactively create a configuration file for a share tree while client_setup allows the same for a client tree configuration file. Verify is a progr...
IRIS Showcase is a mixed media presentation system. It's very useful for creating interactive or printed presentations, short documents, onlinehelp systems and much more. Showcase allows you to integrate 2D drawings, text, raster images, 3D models, and audio. By default, showcase displays a blank page, the Master Gizmo and the Status Gizmo. The Master Gizmo has a palette of objects that can be created on the page. These objects include text, 3D scenes, images, audio, filled and unfilled rectang...
showfiles is a tool used to list files belonging to installed software products. The -f option can be used to list files in a software distribution packaged in the inst(1M) archive format. Current command-line options are: product List only files belonging to the given product(s). -- file List only files matching the specified file expression(s), which must follow the -- argument. Filename expressions are those described in regexp(5), with special treatment of the asterisk * and period . charact...
Showfont displays data about the font that matches the given pattern. The wildcard character "*" may be used to match any sequence of characters (including none), and "?" to match any single character. If no pattern is given, "*" is assumed. The "*" and "?" characters must be quoted to prevent them from being expanded by the shell.
showmount lists all the clients that have remotely mounted a filesystem from host (or the local host if host is not given). This information is maintained by the mountd(1M) server on host, and is saved across crashes in the file /etc/rmtab.
showprods is a tool used to list products installed, previously installed, or present on a distribution. The prods arguments specifies which products are to be listed. If no products are specified, all products are listed. showprods lists only products listed in the database used by the inst or swmgr commands. The command line options are: -a List all products, not just products currently installed (default is to list only installed products). -D depth List products down to the specified depth (...
The showrgb program reads an rgb color-name database compiled for use with the dbm database routines and converts it back to source form, printing the result to standard output. The default database is the one that X was built with, and may be overridden on the command line. Specify the database name without the .pag or .dir suffix.
This command is executed by the superuser to change the state of the machine. By default, it brings the system down into the PROM monitor. The command sends a warning message and a final message before it starts actual shutdown activities. By default, the command asks for confirmation before it starts shutting down daemons and killing processes. The options are used as follows: -y Pre-answers the confirmation question so the command can be run without user intervention. A default of 60 seconds i...
sid displays the array session handle and the project ID and name of the array session that the current process belongs to. -a Reports only the array session handle of the current array session, printed as a 16-digit hexadecimal number preceded by "0x". -p Reports only the project ID of the current array session. -P Reports all of the project IDs for which the current user is authorized, each separated by a space. -n Reports project names instead of numeric pro...
sitemgr.cgi allows access to sitemgr(1) data through a HTTP web server. Installing sitemgr.sw.server places links into the default CGI root (/var/www/cgi-bin/), which will enable sitemgr(1) to access the web site through it's interface. sitemgr.cgi should not be executed standalone, but should be used in conjunction with the sitemgr(1) client.
sitemgr.cgi allows access to sitemgr(1) data through a HTTP web server. Installing sitemgr.sw.server places links into the default CGI root (/var/www/cgi-bin/), which will enable sitemgr(1) to access the web site through it's interface. sitemgr.cgi should not be executed standalone, but should be used in conjunction with the sitemgr(1) client.
sitestat.cgi allows access to sitemgr(1) log file information through a HTTP web server. Installing sitemgr.sw.server places links into the default CGI root (/var/www/cgi-bin/), which will enable sitemgr(1) to access the site's log file information through the client interface. sitestat.cgi should not be executed standalone, but should be used in conjunction with the sitemgr(1) client.
The size command prints segment or section information in bytes about the various sections or segments of each named ELF object file. Each file can be an object or an archive. When calculating segment information, the size command prints out the total file size of the non-writable segments, the total file size of the writable segments, and the total memory size minus the total file size of the writable segments. If it cannot find segment information, size calculates based on section information....
SlaToIv converts an SLA formatted file into an Open Inventor 2.0 file. Copyright 1993 by Iowa State University. Specifies the name of the SLA file to read and convert. Specifies the name of the Open Inventor file to use for output.
sleep suspends execution for time seconds. It is used to execute a command after a certain amount of time, as in: (sleep 105; command)& or to execute a command every so often, as in: while true do command sleep 37 done
SLIP or SL/IP stands for Serial Line Internet Protocol. It is used to extend a local area network using low speed telephone lines. It can be used to transfer data between machines which are using TCP/IP or UDP/IP. The modems and communications lines used with SLIP are relatively inexpensive, and operate at 2400 to 38,400 bits/second. This makes SLIP appropriate for remote sessions and modest file transfers. The slip program is used to connect to a remote machine. It does everything necessary to ...
slist is used to display a list of all NetWare servers visible on the network. The list of available servers can also be obtained using ls on the /netware directory.
This tool is part of the Samba suite. smbclient is a client that can 'talk' to an SMB/CIFS server. It offers an interface similar to that of the ftp program (see ftp(1)). Operations include things like getting files from the server to the local machine, putting files from the local machine to the server, retrieving directory information from the server and so on.
This tool is part of the Samba suite. smbsh allows you to access an NT filesystem using UNIX commands such as ls, egrep, and rcp. You must use a shell that is dynamically linked in order for smbsh to work correctly.
smcmd allows a user (from the command-line; within a window shell) to publish documents and perform some administrative tasks on a web site that has the proper SiteMgr server extensions (see sitemgr.cgi(1)) installed.
smdbf.cgi initializes a sitemgr(1) database through a HTTP web server. Installing sitemgr.sw.server places links into the default CGI root (/var/www/cgi-bin/), which will enable sitemgr(1) to initialize it's database entirely from the client interface. smdbf.cgi should not be executed standalone, but should be used in conjunction with the sitemgr(1) client; however, it can be used to reinitialize the sitemgr database. Refer to the SiteMgr Release Notes for information....
The smrsh program is intended as a replacement for sh for use in the ``prog'' mailer in sendmail(8) configuration files. It sharply limits the commands that can be run using the ``|program'' syntax of sendmail in order to improve the over all security of your system. Briefly, even if a ``bad guy'' can get sendmail to run a program without going through an alias or forward file, smrsh limits the set of programs that he or she can execute. Briefly, smrsh limits programs to be in the director...
sn0log is run at system boot by /etc/rc2.d/S33sn0start. It displays any messages that were written to one or all CPU board flash PROM logs since the last time a sync mark was written to the log(s). If the -s option is used, a sync mark is automatically written to the log(s). Messages in a CPU board flash PROM log may include analysis data for a prior system crash. The options are: -a Specifies that all CPU board flash PROM logs in the system should be processed. Otherwise, a single hub_mon_devic...
sn0msc performs operations on the Origin and Onyx2 Module System Controllers (MSCs). WARNING: If used improperly, this command may cause system malfunction that is not fixed by system reset or power cycling. See below for more information. There are three basic operations controlled by the flags given: -r Reads the MSC NVRAM contents of a specific MSC device (elsc_nvram_dev) at a specific address (addr) for a specific number of bytes (count, default 1). Output is in hex if the -x flag is given, ...
snetd configures a STREAMS network from a specification given in a configuration file whose format is described in the Configuration section. By default the configuration is taken from the file /etc/config/snetd.options. An alternative file may be specified as a command line argument (config_file). The special filename '-' is taken to mean the standard input. Upon system startup, if the state of the snetd daemon is on, the daemon is started by /etc/init.d/network. You may use chkconfig(1M) to ...
snmpd is a daemon for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) as specified in Internet RFC 1157, and supports MIB II, as specified in Internet RFC 1213. The daemon, called the SNMP agent, can be configured to run from the network star-tup script at boot time by the command chkconfig snmpd on or started from the command line. You must be superuser (root) to run snmpd. snmpd listens on a udp(7P) socket for the snmp service for SNMP queries. If no such service can be found, a default port of ...
snoop captures packets from the network and displays their contents. snoop uses both the network packet filter and streams buffer modules to provide efficient capture of packets from the network. Captured packets can be displayed as they are received, or saved to a file for later inspection. snoop can display packets in a single-line summary form or in verbose multi-line forms. In summary form, only the data pertaining to the highest level protocol is displayed. For example, an NFS packet will h...
SoftimageToIv converts 3D model files in Softimage version 2.6 model (.hrc) format into Open Inventor 2.0 files. Scene files are also handled, the default database settings are used or the database indicated by the -d flag. NURB curves and surfaces, polygons, hierarchy, textures, cameras and lights are converted into equivalent Open Inventor objects. Softimage NURB surfaces are converted into Open Inventor surfaces, which are then tesselated into polygons according to the object complexity setti...
The sort command sorts lines of all the named files together and writes the result on the standard output. The standard input is read if - is used as a filename or no input files are named. Comparisons are based on one or more sort keys extracted from each line of input. By default, there is one sort key, the entire input line, and ordering is lexicographic by bytes in machine collating sequence. sort processes supplementary code set characters according to the locale ...
soundeditor provides a graphical interface for recording, playing and editing AIFF format soundfiles. Features include: - Realtime audio recording and playing - Tape recorder-style transport controls - Graphical audio waveform display - Cut & paste editing of audio data - Fade-in and out, level, echo, pitch and reverse effects - Undo/redo for editing operations For more detailed instructions on using soundeditor, access the on-line help facility via the "Help" menu item on the right side of th...
soundplayer is a simple-to-use application which plays sound files using the built-in audio hardware. soundplayer also plays Standard MIDI Files to an external MIDI sound module or the Silicon Graphics MIDI synthesis software (see midisynth(1)). The following sound/MIDI file formats are supported: AIFF (.aiff) and AIFF-C (.aifc) Sun/NeXT (.au, .snd) Microsoft RIFF WAVE (.wav) MPEG-1 layer I, II audio bitstreams (.mpa, .mpg, .mp2) Sound Designer II BICSF (IRCAM) Audio Visual Research (.avr) Amiga...
soundscheme is an X-based server daemon which provides high-level audio playback services for applications. Based on the audio and audiofile libraries, soundscheme mixes and plays sounds on demand as requested by multiple client programs using a single audio port. Each client may provide an X resource file which specifies a palette of sound names and the mappings of these names to soundfiles. Named sounds are activated within applications using function calls from the daemon's client library. T...
SoundTrack is a graphical application for recording, editing and processing up to 32 tracks of audio. SoundTrack can be used to create multi-element soundtracks for movies, commercials, and web pages. A wide variety of soundfile formats is supported for import/export and cut/paste. Also, SoundTrack allows pre-mastering of digital audio tapes via the export-to-DAT feature. For more detailed instructions on using soundtrack, access the on-line help facility via the "Help" menu item on the right ...
SpeedShop works under IRIX 6.2, or later, and supports executables compiled with the IRIX 6.2 compilers (o32, n32 and 64), or with the MIPSPro 7.x compilers (n32 and 64). SpeedShop supports C, C++, FORTRAN, ADA, and asm programs. Programs must be built using shared libraries (DSOs); nonshared or stripped executables are not supported.
Spell collects words from the named documents, and looks them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on the standard output. If no files are named, words are collected from the standard input. Spell ignores most troff, tbl and eqn(1) constructions. Under the -v option, all words not literally in the spelling list are printed, and plausible derivations from spelling...
The diagnostics Pragma This module extends the terse diagnostics normally emitted by both the perl compiler and the perl interpeter, augmenting them with the more explicative and endearing descriptions found in the perldiag manpage. Like the other pragmata, it affects the compilation phase of your program rather than merely the execution phase. To use in your program as a pragma, merely invoke use diagnostics; at the start (or near the start) of your program. (Note that this does enable perl's ...
split reads an input file and writes it in one or more output files. The default size of each output file is 1000 lines. The size of the output files can be modified by -b and -l options. Each output file is created with a unique suffix. The suffix consists of exactly suffix_length lower-case letters from locale. The letters of the suffix are used as if they were a base-26 digit system, with the first suffix to be created consisting of all a characters, the second with...
spoolserv responds to queries via its own protocol used to monitor and manipulate print queues. Currently the only client application is "Queue Master" for the Macintosh. This client allows users to check on jobs and move jobs between print queues, and remove jobs. The -a -u and -g options control administrator access. Administrator access allows users to manipulate jobs that they did not queue, as well as start and stop the queues. If the -a option is given, all users have administrator acces...
spray sends a one-way stream of packets to host using RPC, and then reports how many were received by host and what the transfer rate was. The hostname can be either a name or an Internet address.
squeeze will allocate a region of its virtual memory of a size given by its arguments, and lock that virtual memory down into real memory, thus making it unavailable to other processes. It can only be used by the superuser. The amount of memory locked is specified as an integer argument, in units given by the flag argument. By default it is in megabytes (-m flag). A flag of -p, implies that the amount is in pages; a flag of -k implies that the amount in kilobytes; and a flag of -% implies a perc...
The srchtxt utility is used to display all the text strings in message databases, or to search for a text string in message databases [see mkmsgs(1)]. These databases are files in the directory /usr/lib/locale/locale/LC_MESSAGES [see setlocale(3C)], unless a file name given with the -m option contains a /. The directory locale can be viewed a...
The ssaver customization panel allows the user to toggle the screen saver on or off, demo the available screen savers, and choose a new screen saver. In IRIX 6.2 and later releases, it also lets the user configure the power saver option available on some systems. This customization panel does not control the power saver settings that take effect when no one is logged into the console. To change these, edit (as root) the /usr/lib/X11/xdm/Xlogin file. See the xdm(1) reference page for more informa...
sscord is a tool designed to allow a user to explore the working set behavior of an executable or shared library (DSO), and to construct a feedback file for use by cord to generate an executable with improved working-set behavior. sscord reads the executable or DSO given by executable, and generates a function list from it. It can import individual working-sets or the sets named in a working-set-list file; it can also import an existing order (feedback file). It shows the list of working sets, a...
ssdoallexp is a noship script will successively run ssdoexp using all of the supported experiments on the target executable with the provided arguments.
ssdoexp is a noship script will run ssrun with the given experiment name, on the given executable, with its stout and stderr directed to a file named OUT.. It assumes that any executables needed have been built in the current directory, and will clean out any files with names that it might use for output. After the target runs, ssdoexp will check for a core dump, and, if found, will append a cvdump suummary of the crash to the file, as well as save the core file. Then, it will then run ...
ssdump prints out the formatted contents of one or more SpeedShop performance experiment data files. Each of the files consists of a string of "beads", or count-key-data records. If any of the named files contain beads indicating additional data files, from descendant processes of the original run, those files will also be dumped. Options are used to control the printing of the files. -d Print detailed information for each bead. For compressed beads, the compressed form will be dumped. -D Prin...
ssorder is a tool designed to allow generation of a cord feedback file from the executable or DSO and a list of working set files, and weights, derived from measurements. ssorder is a command-line version of sscord; it generates identical feedback files, but can be run from a script. The theory and strategy for the computations involved is described in the man page for sscord(1), q.v.
Note: The version of ssperf in this release is not functional. PLEASE DO NOT USE. Use prof instead. ssperf presents a graphical display of the performance data gathered in a SpeedShop Performance experiment(s) whose output data is given by the command line arguments. The main window has a Experiment and status component, a Function List component, and a TimeLine component. The Experiment and Status-simply states the task or objective that the user selected for this experiment. The Function List-...
ssrun is used by the SpeedShop performance tools to establish the environment to capture performance data for an executable, and create a process from the executable (or an instrumented version), and then run it. When performance data is collected, it is written to a file whose name is of the form .. where can be 'm' for the master process created by ssrun, 'p' for a process created by a call to sproc(), 'f' for a process created by a call to fork(), 'e...
ssusage is a SpeedShop executable that runs a process from the given command and arguments, and prints out a summary of the resources used during the run. It is used in exactly the same way as time(1), but prints additional information. The usage information is printed to stderr in the form: 1.89 real, 0.04 user, 0.29 sys, 15 majf, 2 minf, 0 sw, 1 rb, 0 wb, 21 vcx, 38 icx 854, mxrss The real, user, and sys fields give the real-time, user-CPU time, and system-CPU time, respectively. majf gives ma...
sswsextr is a script that will determine how many caliper-points were recorded in the given experiment file, and extract working-set files for each consecutive interval for the named DSO and produce a working-set list file, suitable for processing with sscord or ssorder. DSOname may either be the base executable, or any DSO contained in the executable. The experiment file must be from an ideal experiment. Working set files will be named with the convention: ..ws. where ...
stacker is an administrative utility used to move tapes between a robotic tape library's slots and drive(s). stacker currently supports the Exabyte 10i and 10e, the DLT2500, DLT2500xt, DLT2700, DLT2700xt, DLT4500, DLT4700, the IBM Magstar (3590) and IBM Magstar MP (3570), the SGI DLT7000 autoloader (Minivault), the Fujitsu Computer Products of America (FCPA) M1016/M1017, M2483 and M2488 3480/3490 drives, and all tape robots that conform to the SCSI-2 Medium Changer command set. The device argum...
Startautofs starts the autofs deamon. "chkconfig autofs on" and "chkconfig nfs on" are executed also. The options in /etc/config/autofs.options and in /etc/auto_master are used when starting the deamon.
Startautomount starts the automount deamon. "chkconfig automount on" and "chkconfig nfs on" are executed also. The options in '/etc/config/automount.options' are used when starting the deamon.
The startdesktop utility opens a dirview of the user's home directory. It does not restart the file manager (fm(1)) on the desktop background, however. (Compare with the similar /usr/lib/desktop/telldesktop restart command.) The startdesktop program can be launched from the toolchest (Desktop > Access Files > In my Home Directory). Users can also run it from a Unix shell command line. For more information about the entire IRIX Interactive Desktop environment, see the IID(1) man page....
startgfx turns the windowsystem configuration flag on, and executes the X Display Manager, xdm. stopgfx turns the windowsystem configuration flag off, and terminates the X Display Manager.
Startmidi initializes the serial ports and links them to the MIDI streams driver. startmidi also reports the names of the MIDI interfaces currently configured. stopmidi removes the specified interface. The following options control the startmidi command: -n name Name of the interface. -d device The actual driver this interface will talk to, either a s...
NOTE: The startx script supplied with the X11 distribution is a sample designed more as a base for customization than as a finished product. Site administrators are urged to customize it for their site. And to update this manual page when they do! The startx script is a front end to xinit that provides a somewhat nicer user interface for running a single session of the X Window System. It is typically run with no arguments. To determine the client to run, startx first looks for a file called .xi...
For each argument name, stat(2) that name and display the results. By default, display all the stat(2) attributes. If specific attributes are requested, just display those requested. The options are: -L Use lstat(2) instead. -q Quiet; just print numeric value of displayed attributes, without syntactic sugar, for easier use in shell scripts. -i Show inode number (st_ino). -d Show device (st_dev). -r Show raw device (st_rdev). -l Show link count (st_nlink). -s Show size (st_size). -p Show permissi...
statd is an intermediate version of the status monitor. It implements a simple protocol that allows applications to monitor the status of other machines. lockd(1M) uses statd to detect both client and server failures. statd is started during system initialization if the chkconfig(1M) lockd flag is set on. Applications use RPC to register machines they want monitored by statd. The status monitor maintains a database of machines to track and the corresponding applications to notify of crashes. It ...
When compiling for the old 32-bit ABI (-32), the compilers generate an intermediate language which is separated into binary instructions and debugging information, each constituting a separate file. Use stdump to dump a file containing debugging information which was generated by the compilers. stdump writes to the standard output. The organization of the output is simple but the details of the output are complicated. The detailed output is be defined here. The output of stdump is subject to cha...
Stopppp stops a PPP call of the specified entry name. The call could be started with execppp(1M). -c connName The unique entry name given to this call entry.
strace without arguments writes all STREAMS event trace messages from all drivers and modules to its standard output. These messages are obtained from the STREAMS log driver (log(7)). If arguments are provided they must be in triplets of the form mid, sid, level, where mid is a STREAMS module ID number, sid is a sub-ID number, and level is a tracing priority level. Each triplet indicates that tracing messages are to be received from the given module/driver, sub-ID (usu...
strain is used to extract error messages from a build log. It displays the error and a certain amount of context around it. strain can work on an arbitrary input, but works best with input that has special markers known to strain. For large build logs, strain is an effective tool in determining build success or failure. strain works by folding the log file into 512 character lines and feeding these lines through a nawk(1) script which looks for known error messages patterns. When strain encounte...
strclean is used to clean up the STREAMS error logger directory on a regular basis (for example, by using cron). By default, all files with names matching error.* in /var/adm/streams that have not been modified in the last three days are removed. A directory other than /var/adm/streams can be specified using the -d option. The maximum age ...
strerr receives error log messages from the STREAMS log driver (log(7)) and appends them to a log file. The error log files produced reside in the directory /var/adm/streams, and are named error.mm-dd, where mm is the month and dd is the day of the messages contained in each log file. The format of an error log message is:
The strings command looks for ASCII strings in a binary file. A string is any sequence of 4 or more printing characters ending with a newline or a null character, or (if not in XPG4 mode) any non-printing character. strings is useful for identifying random object files and many other things. The following options are available: -a Look everywhere in the file for strings. If this flag is omitted, strings only looks in the initia...
The strip command removes the symbol table (the section named ".symtab", Elf section kind SHT_SYMTAB) and relocation bits ordinarily attached to the output of the assembler and loader. This is useful to save space after a program has been debugged. Unless option -f is given, only objects marked with ELF type ET_EXEC (the type given to main programs) are stripped. See /usr/include/elf.h for the type codes. The effect of the default strip is similar to use of the -s option of ld. Strip recognize...
stty sets certain terminal I/O options for the device that is the current standard input; without arguments, it reports the settings of certain options. In this report, if a character is preceded by a caret (^), then the value of that option is the corresponding CTRL character (e.g., ``^H'' is CTRL-H ; in this case, recall that CTRL-H is the same as the ``backspace'' key.) The sequence ``^''' means that an option has a null value. For example, normally stty -a will report that the value o...
su allows you to become another user without logging off. The default user name is root (that is, superuser). To use su, you must supply the appropriate password (except as described below). If the password is correct, su executes a new shell with the real and effective user ID set to that of the specified user. The new shell is the program optionally named in the shell field of the specified user's password file entry (see passwd(4)), or /bin/sh if none is specified (see sh(1)). To restore nor...
suattr allows root to execute a command using the given capabilities set and at the given MAC label. suattr is designed primarily for system initialization, to grant commands executed by startup scripts the privileges they need. To use suattr, the real user id must be 0.
sulogin is automatically invoked by init when the system is first started. It prompts the user to type the root password to enter system maintenance mode (single-user mode) or to type EOF (typically CTRL-d) for normal startup (multi-user mode). sulogin should never be directly invoked by the user.
sum calculates and prints a 16-bit checksum for the named file, and also prints the number of blocks in the file. NULL characters (with ASCII value zero) are ignored in computing the checksum. sum is typically used to look for bad spots, or to validate a file communicated over some transmission line. The option -r causes an alternate algorithm to be used in computing the checksum. This alternate algorithm does not ignore NULL characters....
swap provides a method of adding, deleting, and monitoring the system swap areas used by the memory manager. The following options are recognized: -a Add the specified swap resource. name is the name of the block special partition, for example, /dev/dsk/dks0d1s1 or a regular file. Files on NFS mounted file systems are also permitted (see Swapping to NFS Files below). low is the offset in 512-byte blocks into the partition/file ...
Managers display information about your system and provide access to interactive guides (also called tasks) that let you administer your system. For example, the User Manager displays a list of the user accounts currently on the system and gives you access to guides like "Add a User Account" and "Modify a User Account." In a Manager window, you can open a guide by choosing its name from the Task menu or by clicking its button at the bottom of the window. The Swap Manager monitors the system...
swmgr is the graphical tool used to install, remove, and browse software distributed by Silicon Graphics. SoftwareManager invokes swmgr with the arguments provided after prompting for the root password if one is necessary. The -f option specifies the location of new software to be installed. The source argument is either a single distribution, or a directory containing one or more distributions. Software distributions are in a format defined by Silicon Graphics and that can be read only by swmgr...
Swpkg is a Motif based tool used to package software for inst, the Silicon Graphics installation program. Swpkg provides an environment for creating and updating spec and idb files and running gendist(1M). A spec file defines the products that will be turned into a software distribution by gendist. It gives the names of the products, their images and subsystems, information about the contents of those subsystems, and the installation procedure and environment they require. Installation database ...
sync executes the sync(2) system primitive. If the system is to be stopped, sync must be called to insure filesystem integrity. It flushes all previously unwritten system buffers out to disk, thus assuring that all file modifications up to that point are saved. See sync(2) for details.
syntheditor allows users to edit and modify the active presets and voices in midisynth in real time, and also functions as an editor for modifying or creating synthesizer preset files (see synthpreset(4)). syntheditor has the following command-line options: -help Display the available options and flags. -channel Listen on MIDI channel . Default is channel 1. -nomidi Do not communicate with midisynth(1) via MIDI. This mode is useful when editing and/or creating synthpreset(4) files i...
synthpanel manages all 16 MIDI channels in a compact grid of 16 rows. It also provides an interface through which synthesizer preset banks may be added and selected for use with midisynth(1). On startup, synthpanel polls the internal software synthesizer for its configuration. Since MIDI includes minimal provisions for query, synthpanel is unable to poll external MIDI devices. You can also use synthpanel to monitor MIDI data played by soundplayer....
sysconf provides a method to determine the current values of certain configurable system limits, options and parameters. If the optional name argument or list is given, sysconf(1) will print the value of each requested system parameter, one per line. If name is not supplied, sysconf(1) will print all known values with accompanying parameter names. In some cases the value will be 1 or -1, indicating that the system does (1) or does not (-1) implement that...
sysctlrd can be run as a user command or as a daemon run by /etc/rc2.d/S33sysctlr. It handles all necessary communications with an Onyx or Challenge L/XL system's system controller, which controls power sequencing and fan speed, monitors system sensors, and drives the LCD front panel. sysctlrd runs the cpu activity histogram on the front panel, retrieves environmental sensor data, and handles warning and alarm messages from the system controller. sysctlrd also logs configuration error messages ...
syserrpanel is the Desktop control panel for System Alert notification. It is part of the Desktop System Monitor (sysmon) and can be launched from the Icon Catalog's "Control Panel" Page. It can also be launched from the Toolchest by selecting "Desktop" then "Customize" then "System Alerts." The notification toggle button will enable or disable all notification. If audio notification is enabled, an error or warning sound will accompany the notification. Users can also turn off notificat...
sysevent capture messages generated from syslogd(1m) and, using regex(3g) pattern stored in a configuration file, allow one or more user-defined action to be performed when a message match a given expression. sysevent is multi-threaded. Someone may also want to use the -T mode to remove duplicates from the configuration file: the new configuration file will go on standard output. sysevent capture syslogd-generated messages using syslog pipe file mechanism. By default, /tmp/.sysevent is used and ...
syseventEp syseventEp read on stdin a formatted configuration file for sysevent(1m) and generate an ESP event profile on stdout. This file is normally /etc/sysevent.config.
sysinfo with no options prints the unique identifier of the system. This identifier is guaranteed to be unique within the Silicon Graphics product family. With the -s option a shorter (32 bit) identifier is printed. This identifier is not guaranteed to be unique but in practice is. This number is the same that is available from within a program via the sysid function. On multiple module systems this will return a 32 bit version of the lowest numbered module's identifier. Because this interface ...
syslogd reads and logs messages into a set of files described by the configuration file /etc/syslog.conf. Each message is one line. A message can contain a priority code, marked by a number in angle braces at the beginning of the line. Priorities are defined in . syslogd reads from the stream device /dev/log, from an Internet domain socket specified in /etc/services, and from the special device /dev/klog (to read kernel messages). syslogd reads its configuration when it starts up a...
sysmeter opens a window and displays various system performance values collected from either local machine, or any remote machine that implements the rstat version 3 protocol. When sysmeter starts, it makes a connection to the rstatd(1M) daemon on the target machine and periodically collects data from the daemon. Various performance data can be selected for display. Each selected performance value will be displayed within one sub-window in either of the two styles: bar chart or strip chart. In b...
The sysmgr command is available from the Desktop Toolchest and allows the user to access Desktop System Administration Managers and Active Guides. This document provides an overview of the Desktop System Administration model and describes how to use the System Manager. IRIX 6.5.14 updates the System Manager appearance to adhere to modern SGI branding guidelines (layout, colors, and font), but System Manager functionality is the same....
sysmon is part of the Desktop System Monitor. It can be launched by selecting the Toolchest "System Manager" menu, then selecting "System Performance" and then "View the System Log." sysmon allows a user to browse the system log file (/var/adm/SYSLOG). The 8 syslog priorities (see syslog(3B)) are simplified into 4 priority levels. The following table shows how syslog priorities map into sysmon's simplified priority scheme: Sysmon Priority Syslog Priority # Priority Symbol ________________...
systune is a tool that enables you to examine and configure your tunable kernel parameters. systune can adjust some parameters in real time and informs you if you need to reboot your system after reconfiguration. It saves the reconfigured kernel in /unix.install, unless the -f option is used. systune has two modes: interactive and noninteractive. Interactive mode allows you to query information about various portions of tunable parameters or to set new values for tunable parameters. Some paramet...
tabs sets the tab stops on the user's terminal according to the tab specification tabspec, after clearing any previous settings. The user's terminal must have remotely-settable hardware tabs. tabspec Four types of tab specification are accepted for tabspec. They are described below: canned (-code), repetitive (-n), arbitrary (n1,n2,...), and file (--file). If no tabspec is given, the default value is -8, i.e., UNIX system ``standard'' tabs. The lowest column number is 1. Note that for tabs, ...
tag is used to set, clear or query the tag number in a MIPS executable or shell script that follows the convention of #!/bin/sh or #!/bin/csh on the first line. The tag number is used by the IRIX Interactive Desktop to determine the type of a file and thus display the appropriate icon and have it exhibit the correct behavior when the user interacts with it. Usually software developers use the tag command. End users have no need to use the tag command. End users who create their own personal desk...
tail copies the named file to the standard output beginning at a designated place. If no file is named, the standard input is used. Copying begins at distance +number from the beginning, or -number from the end of the input (if number is null, the value 10 is assumed). If the -c or -n options are used, number is assumed to be negative unless a + sign is prepended. Number is counted in units of lines, blocks, or characters, according to the appended/prepended opti...
Talk is a visual communication program which copies lines from your terminal to that of another user. If you wish to talk to someone on your own machine, then person is just the person's login name. If you wish to talk to a user on another host, then person is of the form user@host. If you want to talk to a user who is logged in more than once, the ttyname argument may be used to indicate the appropriate terminal name, where ttyname is of the form ``ttyXX''. When first called, talk sends the ...
talkd is the server that notifies a user that somebody else wants to initiate a conversation. It acts as a repository of invitations, responding to requests by clients wishing to rendezvous to hold a conversation. In normal operation, a client, the caller, initiates a rendezvous by sending a CTL_MSG to the server of type LOOK_UP (see ). This causes the server to search its invitation tables to check if an invitation currently exists for the caller (to speak to the callee speci...
tar saves and restores multiple files on a single file (usually a magnetic tape, but it can be any file). This single logical file may span multiple physical tapes (this is known as "multi-volume tar"). Such tapes do not have a filemark at the end of intermediate volumes, and an archived file may be split across multiple tapes. The second through last tape may be read without earlier tapes (aside from the possible first file split across the tape boundary) by using the e option. The key argume...
Tclsh is a shell-like application that reads Tcl commands from its standard input or from a file and evaluates them. If invoked with no arguments then it runs interactively, reading Tcl commands from standard input and printing command results and error messages to standard output. It runs until the exit command is invoked or until it reaches end-of-file on its standard input. If there exists a file .tclshrc in the home directory of the user, tclsh evaluates the file as a Tcl script just before ...
This registers an interpreter using the name name. The name must be unique to the server. It takes a tcl interpreter and a toplevel widget as additional arguments. This creates two commands within the interpreter, send and interps. The send command behaves like the send command for Tk: given an interpreter name and a command, it executes the command in that interpreter. The interpreter for the command may be the current interpreter. The interps command returns a list of interpreters currently kn...
Tcsh is an enhanced version of the Berkeley UNIX C shell csh(1). It behaves similarly to the C shell, except for the added utilities of: 1) Command line editing using Emacs-style commands. 2) Visual step up/down through the history list. 3) Terminal mode sanity checking and resetting. 4) Interactive command, file name and user name completion. 5) File/directory/user list in the middle of a typed command. 6) Spelling correction of command, file, and user names. 7) Lookup of command documentation ...
tee transcribes the standard input to the standard output and makes copies in the files. The sole purpose of tee is to serve, as its name implies, as a ``T'' in a pipe. For example, the command grep pattern file1 | tee file2 | wc -l catches the output of grep in file2 without having to reexecute the command. The available options are: -i ignore interrupts; -a causes the output to be appended to the files rather th...
The telldesktop utility invokes file manager (fm) functions as long as the file manager was started with the -b parameter. (If the file manager is not running on the desktop background, then these commands will have no effect because there will be no file manager process to intercept them.) Most file manager functions require an icon to be selected before the operation can be performed.
The tellwm utility invokes window functions in a cooperating resident window manager program. Cooperating window managers post the _SGI_TELL_WM property on the root window, containing a list of command strings they support externally. If the command argument given to tellwm matches this published protocol, tellwm forwards the command to the window manager for execution. tellwm exits with a non-zero status if the current window manager does not provide the cooperating property, or if it does not ...
The telnet command is used to communicate with another host using the TELNET protocol. If telnet is invoked without the host argument, it enters command mode, indicated by its prompt, telnet>. In this mode, it accepts and executes the commands listed below. If it is invoked with arguments, it performs an open command (see below) with those arguments. Options: -d Sets the initial value of the debug toggle to TRUE. -n tracefile Opens tracefile for recording trace information. See the set tracefile...
telnetd is a server which supports the Internet standard TELNET virtual terminal protocol. telnetd is invoked by the Internet super-server (see inetd(1M)), normally for requests to connect to the TELNET port as indicated by the /etc/services file (see services(4)). The -h option suppresses the host information banner before the login prompt. The -n option suppresses transport-level keep-alive messages. The use of keepalive messages allows sessions to be timed out if the client crashes or becomes...
test evaluates the expression expr and, if its value is true, sets a zero (true) exit status; otherwise, a non-zero (false) exit status is set; test also sets a non-zero exit status if there are no arguments. When permissions are tested, the effective user ID of the process is used. All operators, flags, and brackets (brackets used as shown in the second SYNOPSIS line) must be separate arguments to the test command; normally these items are separated by spaces. The following primitives are used ...
This tool is part of the Samba suite. testparm is a very simple test program to check an smbd configuration file for internal correctness. If this program reports no problems, you can use the configuration file with confidence that smbd will successfully load the configuration file. Note that this is NOT a guarantee that the services specified in the configuration file will be available or will operate as expected. If the optional host name and host IP address are specified on the command line, ...
This tool is part of the Samba suite. testprns is a very simple test program to determine whether a given printer name is valid for use in a service to be provided by smbd(8) "Valid" in this context means "can be found in the printcap specified". This program is very stupid - so stupid in fact that it would be wisest to always specify the printcap file to use.
Textcolors is used to set the various colors used by a xwsh window. When no arguments are given, textcolors will query xwsh for the current settings and report them. The values reported will be in hexadecimal. When one or more arguments are given (up to 8), xwsh uses the argument to set a specific color. The color arguments are either a hexadecimal number (starts with a #), or a name. Textcolors will also allow color indices for backwards compatibility....
textomatic is an Inventor program for creating beveled, 3D text. It supports arbitrary bevels, arbitrary messages, assigning different materials to the front, back and sides of the text, and supports pasting into other applications (like showcase or SceneViewer). The textomatic window is split into four parts: The top of the window is an Inventor examiner viewer, displaying the 3D text and allowing you to rotate and zoom it. By default the "decoration" of buttons and thumbwheels used to contro...
The textps filter converts text to Postscript. It accepts ASCII text on standard input and sends PostScript language to standard output. The textps filter passes PostScript through without changing it. The textps filter allows page layout specification, but does not cause the text within a page to be rearranged. Text extending beyond the maximum image area, however, is truncated. The output defaults to the Courier typeface. K-Spool usually uses textps in the pipeline of the input filter of a pri...
Tftp is the user interface to the Internet TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol), which allows users to transfer files to and from a remote machine. The remote host may be specified on the command line, in which case tftp uses host as the default host for future transfers (see the connect command below).
tftpd is a server that supports the Internet Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP). The TFTP server operates at the port indicated in the tftp service description; see services(4). The server is normally started by inetd(1M). The use of tftp(1C) does not require an account or password on the remote system. Due to the lack of authentication information, tftpd allows only publicly readable files to be accessed. Files containing the string ../ are not allowed. Files can be written only if they alre...
thrash will allocate a region of its virtual memory of a size given by its arguments, and either randomly or sequentially access that memory in order to explore the system paging behavior. The amount of memory to thrash over is specified by a size flag followed by an integer argument, whose units are determined by the particular size flag used. The flag may be -m, for megabytes, -p, for pages; or -k for kilobytes. An additional argument of -s implies sequential thrashing; the default is random. ...
The command tic translates a terminfo file from the source format into the compiled format. The results are placed in the directory /usr/share/lib/terminfo. The compiled format is necessary for use with the library routines in curses(3X). -vn Specifies that (verbose) output be written to standard error trace information showing tic's progress. The optional integ...
The command is executed; after it exits, time prints resource usage statistics to standard error. By default, this report includes the elapsed time the command spent running, the CPU time spent in execution of the command its reaped children, and the CPU time spent executing system code by the command and its reaped children. Times are reported in seconds. time may be directed to produce other resource usage reports via command line options. Additionally, the environment variable TIME may be use...
Timed is a time server daemon and is normally invoked at boot time from the /etc/init.d/network file. It synchronizes the host's time with the time of other machines in a local area network running timed. These time servers will slow down the clocks of some machines and speed up the clocks of others to bring them to the average network time. The average network time is computed from measurements of clock differences using the ICMP timestamp request message. Timed communicates with the date(1) c...
timedc is used to control the operation of the timed(1M) program. It may be used to: o measure the differences between machines' clocks o find the location where the master time server is running o enable or disable tracing of messages received by timed o perform various debugging actions Without any arguments, timedc prompts for commands from the standard input. If arguments are supplied, timedc interprets the first argument as a command and the remaining arguments as parameters to the command...
timeserver responds to queries from the Macintosh Chooser rdev 'K-Time'. This rdev is used to set the clock on the Mac so that its time matches the UNIX machine's time. If no name is give, the machine's hostname is used. If the -D option is used, timeserver stays in the foreground and prints debugging information about activity,
Timeslave matches the clock in the local machine to a better clock. It does this by speeding up or slowing down the local clock, or if the local clock is particularly wrong, by changing the date. When the date is changed, because the difference is too great to correct smoothly, timeslave logs the event in the system log. Timeslave understands several options: -H netmaster specifies the hostname or Internet address of another machine that has a better clock or that has, in turn, slaved its clock ...
The given command is executed; the elapsed time, user time and system time spent in execution are reported in seconds. Optionally, process accounting data for the command and all its children can be listed or summarized, and total system activity during the execution interval can be reported. The output of timex is written on standard error. Options are: -p List process accounting records for command and all its children. Suboptions f, h, k, m, r, and t modify the data items reported. The option...
Tlink creates a directory tree rooted at target identical to the directory tree rooted at source, populating the directories in the target tree with symbolic links to corresponding files under the source tree. If optional paths are supplied after source and target, only the subtrees named by concatenating each path with source are linked under target. The -c (clean) option causes tlink to walk the target tree removing any directory which lacks a counterpart in the source tree, any symbolic link ...
toggleSystemTunes is a privileged command that controls the speaker volume during boot up. This controls the startup, shutdown, and bad graphics tunes. toggleSystemTunes uses the nvram(1M) command to set the value of the volume variable.
The togglexhost utility turns on or off access control for the local X server, running the xhost(1) command with the appropriate argument and posting a feedback dialog to the user. It requires one argument: + The plus symbol enables remote display (disables access control), allowing X display access to any remote host. - The minus symbol disables remote display (enables access control), preventing X display access to remote hosts. The script can be run from the toolchest (System > Utilities > Di...
The toolchest program displays a list of buttons, each of which can invoke a useful command or present a submenu of additional buttons. The standard set of menu buttons in the IRIX Interactive Desktop toolchest is Desktop, Selected, Find, System, and Help. Each menu provides lists of useful commands for running top-level window management programs (in conjunction with 4Dwm), desk utilities, search utilities, system administration functions, or documentation-displaying programs....
Top displays the top processes on the system and periodically updates this information. If standard output is an intelligent terminal (see below) then as many processes as will fit on the terminal screen are displayed by default. Otherwise, a good number of them are shown (around 20). Raw cpu percentage is used to rank the processes. If number is given, then the top number processes will be displayed instead of the default. Top makes a distinction between terminals that support advanced capabili...
Machine topology information is extracted from the hardware graph. The output of the topology command is not guaranteed to remain constant between releases. The topology command is an editable script that can be customized by the end user.
touch causes the access and modification times of each argument to be updated. The file name is created if it does not exist. If no time is specified [see date(1)] the current time is used. The -a and -m options cause touch to update only the access or modification times respectively (default is -am). The -c option silently prevents touch from creating the file if it did not previously exist. The -r option causes touch to...
to_dos converts a UNIX text file into a MSDOS text file by appending a control-M character at the end of each line and a control-Z character at the end of the file. to_unix converts a MSDOS text file into a UNIX text file by stripping trailing control-M and control-Z characters. Both commands can take zero, one, or two arguments. If no arguments are given, the commands act as a filter, taking input from stdin and writing the modified file to stdout. When a single argument is specified, the argum...
to_imap copies files and directories from a specified folder directory such as $HOME/Mail or $HOME/nsmail, to the IMAP folder directory, typically $HOME/imap. Use this program if you will be using the IMAP server from University of Washington. This server can be found in the June 1998 Edition of SGI Freeware. Do not use this program if you will be using Netscape Messaging Server because the folder structure is different in the Netscape Messaging Server. If the current folders are not on the same...
tput uses the terminfo database to make the values of terminal-dependent capabilities and information available to the shell (see sh(1)), to initialize or reset the terminal, or return the long name of the requested terminal type. tput outputs a string if the attribute (capability name) is of type string, or an integer if the attribute is of type integer. If the attribute is of type boolean, tput simply sets the exit code (0 fo...
tr copies the standard input to the standard output with substitution or deletion of selected characters. Input characters found in string1 are mapped into the corresponding characters of string2. tr processes supplementary code set characters according to the locale specified in the LC_CTYPE environment variable [see LANG on environ(5)]. Searches and translations are performed on characters, not bytes. The following options are s...
The Internet is a large and complex aggregation of network hardware, connected by gateways. Tracking the route your packets follow (or finding the miscreant gateway that's discarding your packets) can be difficult. traceroute utilizes the IP protocol ``time-to-live'' (TTL) field and attempts to elicit an ICMP TIME_EXCEEDED response from each gateway along the path to some host. The only mandatory parameter is the destination host name or IP address. The default probe datagram length is 40 byt...
trcore will truncate file1 or copy file1 to file2 truncated to trunc_level. If file2 is not supplied, then file1 is truncated in place. There is a three second delay after the warning message is printed to abort the operation. Aborting any time before the end of execution will leave file1 intact. The resulting file ( file1 or file2) will be equivalent to a crash vmcore dump written at a lower dump level. The equivalent dump level is specified by trunc_level. The following options apply to trcore...
The tsarchive command renames the tspd.log log file in the /var/spool/ts/pd/log directory so that the file can be archived. A cron job executes the command daily in the /var/spool/cron/crontabs/root directory, and the file is renamed if the file size is greater than 1024000 bytes. The file is renamed ...
The tsdaemon command starts tape support. If you configure a system to do so, it is started during the system boot. To modify the exiting tape support personality-daemon definitions after tsdaemon has been started, send signal 17 to tsdaemon to request that it read a new configuration. tsdaemon rereads the configuration file specified at startup and modifies its personality-daemon information. The exi...
The tserrpt command prints selected records from the /var/spool/ts/pd/log/tspd.log file. If one or more record-selection options are specified, records matching all the specified options are selected. If no record-selection options are specified, all records are selected. file specifies an input file that you want to search for records. The special filename, '-', specifies stand...
Tset causes terminal dependent processing such as setting erase and kill characters, setting or resetting delays, and the like. It first determines the type of terminal involved, names for which are specified by the /usr/lib/terminfo data base, and then does necessary initializations and mode settings. In the case where no argument types are specified, tset simply reads the terminal type out of the environment variable TERM and re-initializes the terminal. The rest of this manual concerns itself...
The tsort command produces on the standard output a totally ordered list of items consistent with a partial ordering of items mentioned in the input file. If no file is specified, the standard input is understood. The input consists of pairs of items (nonempty strings) separated by blanks. Pairs of different items indicate ordering. Pairs of identical items indicate presence, but not ordering.
The tsset command sets option values in a personality daemon. These option settings override those set in the personality-daemon configuration file, /etc/config/tspd.config. The options set by tsset remain in effect until they are reset by another tsset command. The command currently supports one option, the tracing enabled setting. For more information on the personality-daemon conf...
The tsstop command stops tape support or one of the personality daemons. When a personality daemon is terminated, the tape support driver terminates all users with the device file open and prevents further opens of the device until all current users have closed the device file. The tsstop command accepts the following options: -a Terminates tape support. This option stops the entire system including all personality daemons. -d pathname Terminates t...
Ttcp times the transmission and reception of data between two systems using the UDP or TCP protocols. It differs from common ``blast'' tests, which tend to measure the remote inetd as much as the network performance, and which usually do not allow measurements at the remote end of a UDP transmission. For testing, the transmitter should be started with -t and -s after the receiver has been started with -r and -s. Tests lasting at least tens of seconds should be used to obtain accurate measureme...
tty prints the path name of the user's terminal. -l prints the synchronous line number to which the user's terminal is connected, if it is on an active synchronous line. -s inhibits printing of the terminal path name, allowing one to test just the exit code. EXIT CODES 2 if invalid options were specified, 0 if standard input is a terminal, 1 otherwise.
Twm is a window manager for the X Window System. It provides titlebars, shaped windows, several forms of icon management, user-defined macro functions, click-to-type and pointer-driven keyboard focus, and user-specified key and pointer button bindings. This program is usually started by the user's session manager or startup script. When used from xdm(1) or xinit(1) without a session manager, twm is frequently executed in the foreground as the last client. When run this way, exiting twm causes t...
type1xfonts is a utility normally run during the installation process which creates a Type1 font directory suitable for use with the X server or font server. Symbolic links are made to Type1 fonts elsewhere on the system and a fonts.scale file is created. After the links are made, type1xfonts will run mkfontdir to generate the necessary fonts.dir file. If some condition exists that prevents type1xfonts from effectively generating a directory, the utility at least attempts to create a fonts.dir f...
In order to improve performance, the IRIX Interactive Desktop automatically maintains a cache of ftr types for all of the directories that are viewed with fm or dirview. The typeCache utility can be used to "pre-fill" this cache for the specified directory.
The uadmin command provides control for basic administrative functions. This command is tightly coupled to the System Administration procedures and is not intended for general use. It can be invoked only by a privileged user. The arguments cmd (command) and fcn (function) are converted to integers and passed to the uadmin(2) system call.
uconv converts a FORTRAN unformatted data file either from IRIS Series 2000 or IRIS Series 3000 FORTRAN form to IRIS-4D Series FORTRAN form, or vice versa. uconv allows FORTRAN users to port their otherwise nonportable data files opened as FORM="UNFORMATTED". The uconv command has the following options: -i Identifies the input file as an IRIS Series 2000 or IRIS Series 3000 FORTRAN unformatted data file. This is the default. Note: the -c option may not be specified with this option. -c Identif...
The uilcommand invokes the UIL compiler. The User Interface Language (UIL) is a specification language for describing the initial state of a user interface for a Motif application. The specification describes the objects (menus, dialog boxes, labels, push buttons, and so on) used in the interface and specifies the routines to be called when the interface changes state as a result of user interaction. file Specifies the file to be compiled through the UIL compiler. options Specifies one or more o...
The ul command reads the named filenames (or the standard input if none are given) and translates occurrences of underscores to the sequence which indicates underlining for the terminal in use, as specified by the environment variable TERM. ul uses the appropriate /usr/share/lib/terminfo file to determine the character sequences for underlining. If the terminal is incapable of underlining, but is capable...
The ulimit utility sets or reports the file-size writing limit imposed on files written by the shell and its child processes (files of any size may be read). Only a process with appropriate privileges can increase the limit.
The user file-creation mode mask is set to ooo. The three octal digits refer to read/write/execute permissions for owner, group, and others, respectively (see chmod(2) and umask(2)). The value of each specified digit is subtracted from the corresponding ``digit'' specified by the system for the creation of a file (see creat(2)). For example, umask 022 removes group and others write permission (files normally created with mode 777 become mode 755; files created with mode 666 become mode 644). I...
umerge, the ucode inliner, reads the input binary ucode file into an input ucode buffer. An output ucode buffer is then allocated. umerge then makes a pass over the input ucode buffer to collect information and build data structures, including the program call graph. This pass also copies all top-level non-procedure ucode to the output buffer. It then analyzes the data structures to decide what to do for the output ucode. Finally, it copies the code from the input buffer to the output buffer acc...
Umountfs unmounts a filesystem. -a indicates that all filesystems should be unmounted -d fsMountPoint specifies the mount point of the filesystem to be unmounted -r indicates that the specified entry is to be removed from /etc/fstab -s netwareServerName specifies the name of the netware server containing the filesystem to be unmounted
uname prints information that identifies the current IRIX system to standard output. The string IRIX64 is printed on systems that support 64-bit addressing (pointers); also see the KERN_POINTERS argument to sysconf(1). The options cause selected information returned by uname(2) to be printed: -a Behave as though all of the options -mnrsv were specified. -m Print the machine hardware name. This is the type of CPU board that the system is running on, e.g. IP22. -n Print the hostname or nodename. T...
uncompvm expands IRIX vmcore.n.comp files into standard vmcore.n files. Under some circumstances, an IRIX operating system core dump may be made in a special compressed format. Running file(1) on a vmcore.n.comp file yields something like the following: vmcore.0.comp: IRIX vmcore dump of 'IRIX abu stever-j 03080214 IP19' uncompvm without any command-line options uncompresses these into files of up to the size of the physical memory on the system that created the dump. For this reason, it may n...
The unconfigks program unconfigures printers that were configured with the configks(1m) utility. It removes the printer(s) from /etc/printcap, kills any daemons and prompts the user to remove appropriate spool directories. If the configuration was modified by hand after it was created with configks(1m), some parts may have to be removed by hand. The unconfigks program will inform the user if this is necessary....
The unexpand utility copies files or the standard input to the standard output, converting blank characters at the beginning of each line into the maximum number of tab characters followed by the minimum number of space characters needed to fill the same column positions originally filled by the translated blank characters. By default, tabstops are set at every eighth column position. Each backspace character is copied to the output, and causes the column position count for tab calculations to b...
unget undoes the effect of a get -e done prior to creating the intended new delta. If a directory is named, unget behaves as though each file in the directory were specified as a named file, except that non-SCCS files and unreadable files are silently ignored. If a name of - is given, the standard input is read with each line being taken as the name of an SCCS file to be processed. Keyletter arguments apply independently to each named file. -rSID Uniquely identifies which delta is no longer inte...
Unifdef reads C source files and prints all input lines except those excluded by #ifdef constructs that refer to specified identifiers. The -D option defines name as a macro with the value 1, causing unifdef to simplify #ifdef name Included text #else Excluded text #endif to just Included text and contrariwise for #ifndef. The -U option works like -D except that name is undefined, so the #ifdef above would simplify to Excluded text -Dname=string causes unifdef to replace occurrences of name with...
uniq reads the input file comparing adjacent lines. In the normal case, the second and succeeding copies of repeated lines are removed; the remainder is written on the output file. Input and output should always be different. Note that repeated lines must be adjacent in order to be found; see sort(1). If the -u flag is used, just the lines that are not repeated in the original file are output. The -d option specifies that one copy of just the repeated lines is...
units converts quantities expressed in various standard scales to their equivalents in other scales. It works interactively in this fashion: You have: inch You want: cm * 2.540000e+00 / 3.937008e-01 A quantity is specified as a multiplicative combination of units optionally preceded by a numeric multiplier. Powers are indicated by suffixed positive integers, division by the usual sign: You have: 15 lbs force/in2 You want:...
unschedBackup is a privileged command that uses at(1) to unschedule backups scheduled to occur once at a later time and cron(1M) to unschedule recurring backups. See the backup(1M) man page for information on how backups are scheduled.
unsharePrinters is a privileged command that disables the sharing of local printers by removing the .rhosts file for the "lp" user account. Additionally, if the "lp" account has no password, '*' is written into the password field for the "lp" account in /etc/passwd. This prevents the "lp" account on other hosts from being able to rlogin(3C) to the local "lp" account, which disables printer sharing....
unshareRemovableMedia is a privileged command that stops a removable media device from being shared with other systems on the network. After running unshareRemovableMedia, device will not be accessible via mediad(1M) on remote workstations.
uopt, the MIPS ucode optimizer, reads the input binary ucode file, performs optimization on an intra-procedural, global basis and outputs the optimized binary ucode file. It checks the version stamp of the ucode file, and if it does not correspond to its own stamp, a warning message will be printed. By convention, unoptimized binary ucode files have the extension .B and optimized binary ucode files have the extension .O, but uopt does not force this convention on the user. The string file is use...
Updateclogin updates the /var/sysadm/config/clogin.conf file. The configuration file customizes the behavior of clogin(1), including not displaying icons for certain users, displaying generic icons vs. images, etc.
updbootparam, which runs on an NIS master only, is the NIS bootparams(4) update program that modifies the database upon request. An update request is sent from yp_bootparam(1M) command using an RPC call. updbootparam is invoked indirectly by the RPC daemon rpc.ypupdated(1M) via an intermediate makefile updaters(4). updbootparam is designed to be used in the makefile updaters. The parameter bootparams-file is the bootparams file used in the NIS database makefile, /var/yp/Makefile. Usually, it is ...
Uptime prints the current time, the length of time the system has been up, and the average number of jobs in the run queue over the last 1, 5 and 15 minutes. It is, essentially, the first line of a w(1) command.
userenv executes a user's login shell, finds the resulting environment, and then prints to stdout commands such as PATH=mypath; export PATH which can be eval'ed by /bin/sh in order to set the environment. Userenv starts an interactive shell. Before executing the shell, it sets the environment variable ENVONLY equal to 1. Thus, when your login scripts are executed as a result of userenv, they will execute fastest if, after seeing that ENVONLY = 1, they do very little except for setting the envi...
Managers display information about your system and provide access to interactive guides (also called tasks) that let you administer your system. The User Manager displays a list of the user accounts currently on the system and gives you access to related guides. In the Manager window, you can open a guide by choosing its name from the Task menu or by clicking its button at the bottom of the window....
uucheck checks for the presence of the uucp system required files and directories. Within the uucp makefile, it is executed before the installation takes place. It also checks for some obvious errors in the Permissions file (/etc/uucp/Permissions). When executed with the -v option, it gives a detailed explanation of how the uucp programs will interpret the Permissions file. The -x option is used for debugging. debug_level is a single digit in the range 1-9; the higher the value, the greater the ...
uucico is the file transport program for uucp work file transfers. Role numbers for the -r are the digit 1 for master mode or 0 for slave mode (default). The -r option should be specified as the digit 1 for master mode when uucico is started by a program or cron. uux and uucp both queue jobs that will be transferred by uucico. It is normally started by the scheduler, uusched, but can be started manually; this is done for debugging. For example, the shell uutry starts uucico with debugging turned...
uucleanup scans the spool directories for old files and takes appropriate action to remove them in a useful way: Inform the requester of send/receive requests for systems that can not be reached. Return mail that cannot be delivered to the sender. Delete or execute rnews for rnews type files (depending on where the news originated--locally or remotely). Remove all other files. In addition, there is provision to warn users of requests that have been waiting for a given number of days (default 1)....
uucp uucp copies files named by the source-file arguments to the destination- file argument. A file name may be a path name on your machine, or may have the form: system-name!path-name where system-name is taken from a list of system names that uucp knows about. The system-name may also be a list of names such as system-name!system-name!...!system-name!path-name in which case an attempt is made to send the file via the specified route, to the destination. See WARNINGS and BUGS below for restrict...
uucpd allows the use of incoming UUCP connections over TCP/IP. The UUCP/TCP server operates at the port indicated in the uucp service description; see services(4). The server is normally started by inetd(1M). Any of the UUCP protocols supported by uucico can be used, but 'e' and 't' are most common. uucpd relies primarily on the authentication mechanisms of uucico. However, it first obtains a username and password from the remote system, and checks them in much the same way as getty and logi...
Uuencode and uudecode are used to transmit binary files over transmission mediums that do not support other than simple ASCII data. Uuencode reads the named source file, file, (or by default, the standard input) and writes an encoded version to the standard output. Normally it will be used as part of a pipeline, or with the output redirected to a file, similar to this: uuencode binarydatafile decoded_name | mail someuser In this case, when the file is decoded with uudecode after it is received, ...
uugetty is similar to getty(1M), but changes have been made to support using the line for uucico, cu, and ct; that is, the line can be used in both directions. The uugetty will allow users to login, but if the line is free, uucico, cu, or ct can use it for dialing out. The implementation depends on the fact that uucico, cu, and ct create lock files when devices are used. When the "open()" returns (or the first character is read when -r option is used), the status of the lock file indicates whe...
uusched is the uucp file transport scheduler. It is usually started by the uudemon.hour script that is started by cron(1M) from an entry in /var/spool/cron/crontabs/uucp such as: 39 * * * * /etc/uucp/uudemon.hour The two options are for debugging purposes only: -x sched_level Output debugging messages from uusched. -u cico_level Passed as -x cico_level to uucico. The sched_level or cico_level is a number between 0 and 9. Larger numbers give more detailed information. Before starting to contact e...
uustat will display the status of, or cancel, previously specified uucp commands, or provide general status on uucp connections to other systems. Only one of the following options can be specified with uustat per command execution: -a Output all jobs in queue. -m Report the status of accessibility of all machines. -p Execute a ``ps -flp'' for all the process-ids that are in the lock files. -q List the jobs queued for each machine. If a status file exists for the machine, its date, time and sta...
uuto sends source-files to destination. uuto uses the uucp(1C) facility to send files, while it allows the local system to control the file access. A source-file name is a path name on your machine. Destination has the form: system!user where system is taken from a list of system names that uucp knows about (see uuname). User is the login name of someone on the specified system. Two options are available: -p Copy the source file into the spool directory before transmission. -m Send mail to the s...
Uutry is a shell that is used to invoke uucico to call a remote site. Debugging is turned on (default is level 5); -x will override that value. The -r overrides the retry time in /var/spool/uucp/.status. The debugging output is put in file /tmp/system_name. A tail -f of the output is executed. The current INTR character, which is often , , or , will give control back to the terminal while the uucico continues to run, putting its output in /tmp/system_name....
uux will gather zero or more files from various systems, execute a command on a specified system and then send standard output to a file on a specified system. NOTE: For security reasons, most installations limit the list of commands executable on behalf of an incoming request from uux, permitting only the receipt of mail (see mail(1)). (Remote execution permissions are defined in /etc/uucp/Permissions.) The command-string is made up of one or more arguments that look like a shell command line, ...
uuxqt is the program that executes remote job requests from remote systems generated by the use of the uux command. (Mail uses uux for remote mail requests.) uuxqt searches the spool directories looking for X. files. For each X. file, uuxqt checks to see if all the required data files are available and accessible and file commands are permitted for the requesting system. The Permissions file is used to validate file accessibility and command execution permission. There are two environment variab...
Vacation automatically returns a message to anyone who sends you mail. Typically, this message informs the sender that you are not available to read your mail. Initializing the Database When called with the -i flag, vacation initializes the ndbm(3B) database files .vacation.pag and .vacation.dir in your home directory. If a vacation database already exists, vacation will delete the old one and create a new (empty) one. vacation uses this database to keep track of the people to whom it has sent m...
val determines if the specified file is an SCCS file meeting the characteristics specified by the optional argument list. Arguments to val may appear in any order. The arguments consist of keyletter arguments, which begin with a -, and named files. val has a special argument, -, which causes reading of the standard input until an end-of-file condition is detected. Each line read is independently processed as if it were a command line argument list. val generates diagnostic messages on the standa...
The vc command copies lines from the standard input to the standard output under control of its arguments and control statements encountered in the standard input. In the process of performing the copy operation, user declared keywords may be replaced by their string value when they appear in plain text and/or control statements. The copying of lines from the standard input to the standard output is conditional, based on tests (in control statements) of keyword values specified in control statem...
verifyDisk invokes fx to perform two verification passes over the disk surface, isolate any bad blocks found, and then partition it as an option disk with all usable space in one partition, partition 7. It is essentially equivalent to performing the operation fx -x -c VERIFY on the indicated disk.
versions calls the programs showprods, showfiles, and (in the case of removing software with versions remove|removehist), inst. Users may wish to use these programs directly, instead of versions, since these programs provide a more complete and consistent set of capabilities. To find out what underlying command versions would execute with a given set of arguments, use the -V option ahead of other options, for example, versions -V remove ftn.sw pas.sw. The versions command has three functions: - ...
vi (visual) is a display-oriented text editor based on an underlying line editor ex(1). It is possible to use the command mode of ex from within vi and vice-versa. The visual commands are described on this manual page; how to set options (like automatically numbering lines and automatically starting a new output line when you type carriage return) and all ex line editor commands are described on the ex(1) reference page. When using vi, changes you make to the file are reflected in what you see o...
